Home

Suzuki 2010 Kizashi Automobile User Manual

1. 5 1 Automatic Lights Operation 2 101 Automatic Locking Retractor 2 36 Average Fuel Consumption 2 83 Average Speed 2 81 B iei d 7 39 Brake Assist 3 28 Brake 7 25 Brake Pedal 3 11 7 26 Brake System Warning Light 2 70 Brake S nuire 7 25 eR 3 28 m 4 1 Brightness Control eese 2 79 Bulb 7 45 Catalytic Converter Center Console Changing Engine Oil and Changing Wheels Charging Child Lock System rear doors Child Restraint Systems eese Cigarette Lighter
2. 2 75 Turn Signal Operation 2 106 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading 7 33 Universal Serial Bus USB Socket 5 81 Using the 2WD i AWD intelligent All Wheel Drive jg L M 3 19 Using the 3 13 V Vehicle Cleaning aeree nennen nennen 9 3 Vehicle Identification 10 1 Vehicle 6 1 7 37 W Warning and Indicator Lights 2 69 Warning and Indicator Messages 2 86 Warranties eeeeeeeee essen eene enne n nnne LECT EIDEM WiINCOWS Windshield Washer Windshield Washer Fluid 7 56 Windshield Wipers 2 107 Wiper Blades 7 54 13 5 Prepared by SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION December 2010 Part No 99011 57L20 03E Printed in U S A TP384 SERVICE STATION INFORMATION Fuel recommendati
3. 2 79 Theft Deterrent Alarm System 2 14 2 84 Tilt Telescoping Steering Lock Lever 2 110 Tire Chains 4 5 Tire Changing 8 1 Tire Inflation 7 30 Tire Inspection 7 31 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 3 34 Tire 7 34 Tire Sidewall Labeling 7 28 Tire Size Towing a Disabled Vehicle Towing Your Vehicle recreational towing 6 2 Traction Control System 3 31 Trailer Towing eese esee eeeene anina nennen 6 2 Transaxle Warning 2 76 Lulu 2 84 Ini dELm auaina pn aas 2 5 Trunk Lid Lock Switch eese 2 6 Trunk 5 79 Turn Signal Control 2 105 Turn Signal Indicators
4. 2 100 Locking Rear 2 34 Low Fuel Warning Light 2 74 Low Tire Pressure Warning Light 2 69 3 35 Luggage Under box 5 92 M Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditioris 7 7 7 11 Maintenance Schedule 7 2 Malfunction Indicator 2 74 Manual Transaxle 3 13 Master Warning Indicator Light 2 77 e 2 20 INDEX N Net Rope HOOKS 5 92 2 84 Oil Level Check 7 15 Oil Pressure 2 72 On Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data 10 3 Open Door Warning 2 75 Outside Rearview Mirrors 2 22 Overhead Console eese 5 86 P Parking Brake Lever 3
5. 2 54 Seat Belt Reminder eene 2 40 Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems 2 34 Seat Position Memory 2 26 Selection Of Coolant 7 18 Selection of Power Supply 3 4 Setting 2 85 Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster 2 43 Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air Bags 2 59 Side Door Locks eese enne 2 3 Sn w EI fue 7 35 7 20 SPECIFICATIONS ieri cnin urna 12 1 Specified 7 24 Specified Gear Oil creen 7 22 Specified Oil error 7 15 Speedometer eese teens 2 78 Spot Eight 5 80 Stability Control 3 31 Starting the Engine esee 3 7 Steering Wheel eese eee enne 7 27 Suri VISOF 5 77 5 83 Supplemental Restraint System air bags 2 55 T 2 78 Temperature
6. 2 111 High Beam Indicator Light 2 75 Highway Driving eeeeeee nennen enne nnns 4 3 Hill Hold Control 3 34 1 5 93 lenti 2 111 How the ABS Works 3 30 Identification Numbers If the Engine is Flooded If the Engine If the Starter Does Not Operate If You Cannot Shift CVT Gearshift Lever Out of Ba Jg 3 18 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck 4 4 Illumination Indicator 2 75 Immobilizer System 2 2 3 4 Immobilizer Keyless Start System Warning Light 2 76 Improving Fuel Economy 4 2 Information Display 2 80 Inside Rearview Mirror 2 20 Installation of Child Restraint with Top Strap
7. 6 2 VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING Vehicle Loading en 9 OD IT Your vehicle was designed for specific weight capacities The weight capacities of your vehicle are indicated by the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and the Vehicle Capacity Weight The GVWR and GAWR front and rear are listed on the Safety Certification Label which is located below the driver s side door latch striker The Vehicle Capacity Weight is listed on the Tire Information Label which is located below the Safety Certification Label SEL GVWR Maximum permissible overall weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all the occupants accessories and cargo GAWR Front and Rear Maximum per missible weight on an individual axle 6 1 Vehicle Capacity Weight Maximum per missible load weight a vehicle can carry including the weight of all the occupants accessories and cargo The weight of any accessories already installed on your vehicle at the time of pur chase or that you or the dealer install after purchase must be subtracted from the Vehicle Capacity Weight to determine how much capacity remains available for occu pants and cargo Contact your dealer for further information Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and actual loads at the front and rear axles can only be determined by weighing the vehicle using a vehicle scale To measur
8. ee BEEK TRACK CAT 8 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display 1 Insertion slot 2 Eject button 3 CD button 4 Up button 5 Down button 6 RPT button 7 RDM button 8 DISP button A Track number B Play time 5 24 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO A CDs or CD ROMs carrying no mark A cannot be used Some discs previously recorded in CD R CD RW format may not be used A CD is inserted with its label facing upward When there is a CD already loaded in the unit another CD cannot be loaded at the same time Do not use force when inserting the CD into the CD insertion slot f a blank disc non recorded CD R is loaded in the unit the disc will be ejected 5 25 CAUTION Never insert your finger or hand into the CD insertion slot Never insert foreign objects Never insert a CD with glue coming out from adhesive tape or a rental CD label or with a trace indicating that adhesive tape or a rental CD label has been removed This may cause the CD not to eject or result in a malfunction Selecting a CD mode Press the CD button 3 Each time the button is pressed the source is switched as follows CD gt Bluetooth audio Loading a CD Insert a CD in the Insertion slot 1 When a CD is loaded play starts Ejecting a CD Press the Eject but
9. 5 89 Front Seat Heater 2 28 Front Seals 2 23 Fuel Filler 5 74 Fuel Filler 5 73 2 78 Fuel Pump Labeling 1 1 Fuel 1 1 Full Wheel Cover 8 5 dic e E 7 40 FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS 11 1 Fuses in the Engine Compartment 7 40 Fuses under the Dash Board 7 42 G Gasoline Containing MTBE 1 1 Gasoline Ethanol blends 1 1 Gasoline Methanol 1 1 Oil eem 7 22 Gear Oil Level Check 7 23 Gear Oil Replacement eene 7 23 GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOLOGY 7 36 GIOVE E 5 85 H Hazard Warning Switch 2 106 Head Restraint esee Headlight Aiming Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors if equipped Switch
10. ITEM Light WATTAGE BULB No Headlight 12V 55W H7 Front fog light 12V 55W H11 Front turn signal light 12V 27W 2357A Rear turn signal light 12V 21W PY21W Parking light 12V 5W W5W Brake tail light 12V 21 5W P21 5W License plate light 12V 5W C5W Reversing light 12V 21W P21W Front dome light 12V 8W Rear dome light 12V 10W Glove box light 12V 1 4W Footwell lights LED Trunk room light 12V 5W W5W Spot light 12V 8W High mount stop light LED Front side marker light 12V 5W 168 Curtsey light 12V 5W Vanity mirror light 12V 2W 12 3 SPECIFICATIONS ITEM Wheel Tire size front and rear P215 60R16 P215 55R17 P235 45R18 Tire pressure For the specified tire pressure see the Tire Information Label located on the driver s door lock pillar ITEM Steering Toe in total front 0 x 2mm 0 0 08 in rear 2 x 1 0 08 0 04 in Camber angle front 0 30 1 rear 1 15 30 Caster angle front 4 10 1 ITEM Capacities Coolant including reserve tank 6 6 L 13 9 US pt Fuel tank 63 L 16 7 US gal Engine oil replaced with filter 4 5 L 4 8 quarts Transaxle oil Manual transaxle 2 5 L 5 3 US pt CVT 8 34 L 17 7 US pt when overhauling Rear differential oil 0 8 L 1 7 US pt Transfer gear box oil 0 9 L 1 9 US pt 12 4 INDEX Symbols CRUISE
11. 2 28 Rear Seats crc ceeteteettnanttetei see sieis 2 29 Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems 2 34 Supplemental Restraint System air bags 2 55 Instrument Cluster Warning and Indicator Lights Speedometer Tachometer UCT GU Ge e Temperature Gauge Brightness Control eere Information Display Lighting Control Lever Front Fog Light Switch if equipped Turn Signal Control Lever Hazard Warning Switch Rain sensing Wipers and Washer Lever Tilt Telescoping Steering Lock Lever if equipped 2 110 hDrnm 2 111 Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors if equipped Switch 2 111 BEFORE DRIVING Keys EXAMPLE 1 57L21001 Your vehicle comes with two identical key less start system remote controllers 1 each with a detachable key
12. 80JM032 Front side air bags rear side air bags and side curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in severe side impact collisions 54G027 2 60 BEFORE DRIVING ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS Be aware that no system can prevent all pos sible injuries that may occur in an accident Front side air bags rear side air bags and side curtain air bags will probably not inflate Front Passenger s Seat Belt Buckle Sensor The front passenger s seat belt buckle is 57L21126 Front side air bags rear side air bags and side curtain air bags are not designed to inflate in frontal or rear collisions rollovers or minor side collisions since they would offer no protection in those types of acci dents Only the front side air bag rear side air bag and side curtain air bag on the side of the vehicle that is struck will inflate However in a frontal angle collision the right and left front side air bags rear side air bags and side curtain airbags may inflate Remember since an air bag deploys only one time during an accident seat belts are needed to restrain occu pants from further movements during the accident Therefore an air bag is NOT a substitute for seat belts To maximize your protection 2 61 A WARNING An air bag supplements or adds to the crash protection offered by seat belts The driver and all passengers must be properly restrained by wear ing seat belts at all ti
13. 2 52 Installation with Lap Shoulder Seat Belts child restraint with no top 2 46 Installation with the LATCH System 2 49 Instantaneous fuel consumption 2 82 Instrument nennen 2 68 intelligent All Wheel Drive i AWD Indicator Light 2 76 Interior Light Switch eene 5 78 Interior Workable Area for Engine Starting Power Supply Mode Selection and Remote Controller Outside 3 6 Internal Trunk 2 6 J Jacking Instructions 8 2 Jump Starting Instructions 8 6 K Keyless Push Start 3 4 Keyless Start System Remote Controller 2 6 ert canina lane an ora hona C a RS 2 1 L Lap Shoulder Belt eese 2 36 Lidded Instrument Panel Box 5 87 Light Reminder Buzzer 2 104 Lighting Control Lever eee 2 100 Lighting Operation
14. 15 16 17 571 1 006 ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS TIRE CHANGING TOOL Floorboard P 8 1 1 2 3 4 Luggage under box P 8 1 Jack P 8 1 Wheel Brace P 8 1 Tow hook P 5 96 Spare Tire P 7 34 P 8 1 Jack Handle P 8 1 No OLE ON 57L1F007 LOCATION OF WARNING MESSAGES Read and follow all of the warnings labels etc on your vehicle Make sure you understand all of them Keep them on the veh any icle Do not remove the messages for reason If a label comes off or the messages become difficult to be read hav 1 i i ONDINA ON e it corrected by your SUZUKI dealer Air bag warning labels on both sun visors Jacking warning label Fuel filler cap message Brake fluid cap message Engine cooling fan warning label Radiator cap warning label Air conditioner warning label Battery label Compact spare tire warning label if equipped Side air bag warning label Rear center head restraint warning label Jacking instruction warning label Rear center seat belt warning label Floor mat warning label if equipped Driver Passenger vu 57L1F008 FUEL RECOMMENDATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION Fuel Recommendation 65D394 FUEL RECOMMENDATION Fuel Recommendatio
15. 643045 This indicator light comes on while the position lights tail light and or the head lights are on 50G055 When you turn on the left or right turn sig nals the corresponding green arrow on the instrument panel will flash along with the respective turn signal lights When you turn on the hazard warning switch both arrows will flash along with all of the turn signal lights High Beam Indicator Light 506056 This indicator comes on when headlight high beams are turned on Intelligent All Wheel Drive i AWD Indicator Light if equipped AWD HH When the 2WD i AWD switch is in the i AWD mode with the engine switch in the ON mode the light comes on and stays on For details refer to Using the 2WD i AWD Switch in the OPERATING YOUR VEHI CLE section Daytime Running Light D R L Indi cator Light if equipped 00 60B245 With the D R L system the headlights light but are dimmer than the low beam when the following three conditions are all met Whenever the D R L system is oper ating the D R L indicator light remains on Conditions for D R L system operation 1 The engine is running 2 The parking brake is released 3 The headlights are off Transaxle Warning Light if equipped 80J219 This light comes on when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON
16. After using the block heater 1 Unplug the extension cord and reinstall the plug cap 2 Tie the block heater cord back to its original position 3 12 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Secure the block heater cord back to its original position or to the routed position A loose cord could get caught in the engine accessory drive belt s or other moving parts 3 Close the engine hood securely before starting the engine 3 13 Using the Transaxle Manual Transaxle EXAMPLE H 80J2081 Starting off To start off depress the clutch pedal all the way to the floor and shift into ist gear After releasing the parking brake gradually release the clutch When you hear a change in the engine s sound slowly press the accelerator while continuing to gradu ally release the clutch Shifting All forward gears are synchronized which provides for quiet and easy shifting Always depress the clutch pedal all the way to the floor before shifting gears Keep the engine speed does not rise into the red zone of the tachometer 80J2082 Reverse gear with lifting up ring shift the gearshift lever to the right engage gear OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Downshifting maximum allowable speeds CAUTION CAUTION For J24B engine When downshifting to a lower gear To help avoid clutch damage do 9 make sure not to operate with the not use the clutch pedal as a foot speed faster tha
17. OWNER S MANUAL Keep With Vehicle At All Times Contains Important Information On Safety Operation amp Maintenance SUZUKI 2010 Kyzashi This owner s manual applies to the KIZASHI series 57L1F001 NOTE The illustrated model is one of the KIZASHI series 2009 SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Suzuki Motor Corporation FOREWORD All information in this manual is based on the latest product information avail able at the time of publication Due to improvements or other changes there may be discrepancies between informa tion in this manual and your vehicle SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION reserves the right to make production changes at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes to vehicles previously built or sold SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION believes in conservation and protection of Earth s natural resources To that end we encourage every vehicle owner to recycle trade in or properly dis pose of as appropriate used motor oil coolant and other fluids batteries and tires IF YOU HAVE ANY PROBLEMS WITH YOUR SUZUKI Please review the New Vehicle Warranty Information booklet supplied with your SUZUKI Should you have a question or problem regarding the
18. 491 Miles 57L31012 1 Manual mode indicator 2 Gear position The information display shows the manual mode indicator 1 and the current gear position 2 3 16 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The indicated gear position on the infor mation display when you shift from D to is the gear position that was selected automatically when the gearshift lever was in D You can change to the manual mode temporarily by pulling the shift paddle if equipped on the steering wheel toward you when the gearshift lever is in D Shifting in the manual mode You can shift gears from 1st to 6th depend ing on driving speed NOTE e If the CVT fluid becomes hot such as when driving uphill the transaxle will automatically shift up in order to protect itself and the engine regardless of your gear shifting operation e When the driving speed becomes slow the gear shifts down automatically and when the vehicle stops the gear position will be in 1st gear without shifting the gearshift lever If you depress the accelerator pedal a certain amount the gear shifts down automatically even if the gearshift lever is in the manual mode 3 17 NOTE When you change gear sometimes the transaxle may not shift to the desired gear but a buzzer sounds instead This is to maintain good drivability and to protect the transaxle Using the gearshift lever NOTE To shift gears continuously remo
19. Certain cargo such as chemicals fertiliz ers cleaners salts etc are extremely cor rosive by nature These products should be transported in sealed containers If a spill or leak does occur clean and dry the area immediately Use the body trim The use of the body trim will help protect your vehicle especially if you frequently drive on gravel or salted roads The fittings for such guards should also be corrosion resistant Please check with your autho rized SUZUKI dealer for information on these guards Store your vehicle in a dry well venti lated area Do not park your vehicle in a damp poorly ventilated area If you often wash your vehicle in the garage or if you frequently drive it in when wet your garage may be damp The high humidity in the garage may cause or accelerate corrosion A wet vehicle may corrode even in a heated garage if the ventilation is poor A WARNING Do not apply additional undercoating or rust preventive coating on or around exhaust system components such as the catalytic converter exhaust pipes etc A fire could be started if the undercoating substance becomes overheated APPEARANCE CARE Cover your vehicle 50G203 If you cannot regularly park your vehicle in a garage we recommend you use a vehi cle cover Years of exposure to midday sun can cause the colors in paint plastic parts and fabrics to fade Covering your vehicle with a high quality breathab
20. linkage 2 BH 20 1 gl 8 1 1 E _ 1 DD 1 2 This table shows the service schedule to 125000 km 75000 miles Beyond 125000 km 75000 miles perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart Clean more frequently if the air flow from the air conditioner decreases 2 Check or replace as necessary if you usually drive with high speed or high engine revolutions 7 10 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Periodic Maintenance Schedule for CANADA R Replace or change 1 Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary Interval This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months whichever comes first miles x 1000 15 18 21 24 27 30 36 39 km x 1000 a o a 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 65 months 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 ENGINE amp EMISSION CONTROL Drive belt Inspect for damage 2 Valve lash clearance 3 Engine oil and oil filter 4 Cooling system hoses and connections 5 Engine coolant a 6 Exhaust pipes and mountings 7 EVAP canister 8 Emission related hoses amp tubes 9 Spark plugs 10 Ignition coil plug cap 11 Fuel tank amp cap 12 Air cleaner filter element paved road 13 Fuel filter 14 Fuel lines and connections 15 Ca
21. 3 4 Starting the Engine eese 3 7 Parking Brake Lever 3 10 m 3 11 Engine Block Heater if equipped 3 12 Using the Transaxle 3 13 Using the 2WD i AWD intelligent All Wheel Drive Switch if equipped 3 19 Cruise Control if equipped 3 21 Parking Sensors if equipped 3 23 Braking 3 28 Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped 3 31 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS if equipped 3 34 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas Warning 52D334 A WARNING Avoid breathing exhaust gases Exhaust gases contain carbon mon oxide a potentially lethal gas that is colorless and odorless Since carbon monoxide is difficult to detect by itself be sure to take the following precautions to help prevent carbon monoxide from entering your vehicle Do not leave the engine running in garages or other confined areas Continued 3 1 A WARNING Continued Do not park with the engine run ning for a long period of time even in an open area If it is necessary to sit for a short ti
22. ACC or LOCK by pressing the engine switch The light sensor 5 for sensing the amount of outside light is installed on the upper part of the windshield It also serves as the rain sensor for the rain sensing wipers CAUTION If the light sensor area of the wind shield is covered with mud ice or other similar substances the head lights and position lights may be turned on even when it is still light outside Before removing such sub stances from the windshield always set the wiper control lever to the OFF position If the lever is left in the AUTO position the wipers could unexpectedly operate and cause injury and could also be dam aged BEFORE DRIVING NOTE e Avoid covering the light sensor area of the windshield with a sticker The sticker may impair the performance of the sen sor and make the system unable to con trol operation of the lights correctly f you changed the ignition mode to ON by pressing the engine switch and the AUTO position remains selected the headlights and position lights come on automatically as the outside gets dark even with the engine not running Leav ing the lights lit for a long time may lead to a completely discharged battery 200 3 Front position lights tail lights license plate light and instrument lights are on but headlights are off D 4 Front position lights tail lights license plate light instrument lights and headli
23. GREEN 30 H L CLNR Blank 15 BROWN 7 5 H L Head light 16 YELLOW 20 Fuel injection 17 WHITE 25 ABS SOL ESP control module 11 2 FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS 29 30 31 If 25 32 57171037 COLOR SIZE AMPS FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT 18 WHITE 25 B U Back up 19 BLUE 15 H LLOL Head light low Left 20 BLUE 15 H L LO R Head light low Right MAIN 21 BLUE 15 H LL Head light high Left FUSE 22 BLUE 15 H L R Head light high Right EUN 23 BLUE 15 AT CVT 24 YELLOW 20 FR FOG Front fog light 25 BLUE 15 O2 HTR O2 sensor heater 26 BLUE 15 HORN Horn In engine compartment 11 3 FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS 28 34 10 24 31 25 14 19 26 o o s olo s o w S 57L71037 COLOR SIZE AMPS FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT 27 E Head light low relay Left 28 Head light
24. Indicator Light eres 2 75 OFF Indicator 2 72 OFF switch esee ttentnnnnn 3 33 j AWD Indicator Light 2 76 3 19 SET Indicator Light e ener 2 75 A Accelerator Pedal 3 12 Accessory Socket on oiii 5 80 Adding Coolant 7 19 Adjusting Seat Position 2 23 2 24 Adjusting Seatbacks 2 24 2 25 Adjusting the Lumbar Support esee 2 26 AIR BAG Light cien iere nest 2 73 Air 7 20 Air Conditioning System 7 57 All Seat Belts Except Rear 2 37 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 3 29 Anti Lock Brake System ABS Warning Light 2 71 M Assist Grips eee cen Audio Systems Auto Dimming Rearview Mirror 2 21 Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System Climate
25. menu and voice recognition can be selected Default English 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The hands free mode is activated 2 Hold down RDM button 5 for 2 sec or more 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a language and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE The regular screen resumes if no opera tion is performed for 5 sec or more 5 39 Telephone registration To activate the hands free function with this unit your cell phone needs to be registered NOTE Up to 6 telephones can be registered To set up a new phone disconnect the system from the audio player The audio player shall be reconnected after phone setup is completed If connection cannot be confirmed within 120 seconds the connecting operation is canceled Please try again or refer to the Phone s manual for assistance with the pairing process 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Pair Phone and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Record Name and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Pronounce the name to be used at voice recognition 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND kno
26. remote controller outside warning may be given The remote controller s battery is low The remote controller is affected by strong radio signals or noise The remote controller is in contact with or covered by a metallic object The remote controller is in stowage like the glove box or a door pocket The remote controller is in the sun visor pocket or on the floor Even when the remote controller is out side the interior workable area if it is in any of the following conditions you may be able to start the engine or select the power supply mode The remote con troller outside warning may not be given at that time The remote controller is outside the vehicle but very close to a door The remote controller is on the instru ment panel 3 7 Starting the Engine Before Starting the Engine 1 2 Make sure the parking brake is set fully Manual Transaxle Shift to N Neu tral and fully depress the clutch pedal Hold the clutch and brake pedals fully depressed CVT If the gearshift lever is not in the P Park position shift it to P Hold the brake pedal fully depressed The PUSH START SWITCH message will appear on the information display in the instrument cluster Push the engine switch 1 When the engine is started the starter motor will automatically stop 82K254 A WARNING Make sure that the parking brake is set fully and the tran
27. 30 mm 0 0 1 2 in Check the play of the steering wheel by gently turning it from left to right and mea suring the distance that it moves before you feel slight resistance The play should be between the specified values Check that the steering wheel turns easily and smoothly without rattling by turning it all the way to the right and to the left while driving very slowly in an open area If the amount of free play is outside the specification or you find anything else to be wrong an inspection must be performed by your SUZUKI dealer Tires For safe operation of your vehicle it is important that the tires be the correct type and size in good condition and properly inflated Be sure to follow the requirements and recommendations in this section Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall The example below shows a typical passenger car tire Typical Passenger Car Tire Sidewall 67D027 A Tire Manufacturer The name of the tire manufacturer is shown here B D Tire Name Model The tire name or model is shown here Tire Size The tire size code is a combina tion of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size explanation later in this section for more details U S DOT Tire Identification Num ber The Department of Tran
28. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Refilling Changing Engine Oil and Filter EXAMPLE EXAMPLE Open Close Son wi 81A147 Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly through the filler hole to bring the oil level to the upper limit on the dipstick Be careful not to overfill Too much oil is almost as bad as too little oil After refilling start the engine and allow it to idle for about a minute Stop the engine wait about 5 min utes and check the oil level again 60G306 Drain the engine oil while the engine is still warm 1 Remove the oil filler cap 2 Remove the engine under cover 3 Place a drain pan under the drain plug 4 Using a wrench remove the drain plug and drain out the engine oil A WARNING The engine oil temperature may be high enough to burn your fingers when the drain plug is loosened Wait until the drain plug is cool enough to touch with your bare hands 7 16 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE A WARNING New and used oil and solvent can be hazardous Children and pets may be harmed by swallowing new or used oil or solvent Repeated prolonged contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer Brief contact with used oil or solvent may irritate skin Keep new and used oil and solvent away from children and pets Wear a long sleeve shirt and water proof gloves Wash with soap if oil or solvent contacts your skin 5 Reinstall the drain plug and gasket
29. if there is any problem with the continuously variable transaxle CVT The light should normally come on when the ignition mode is changed to ON by pressing the engine switch and stay on for about 2 seconds before going out NOTE The following conditions may indicate some problem with the CVT system If any of these conditions occurs have your vehi cle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer The light comes on while driving The light does not come on even when the ignition mode is changed to ON by pressing the engine switch BEFORE DRIVING The light does not go out in about 2 sec onds after changing the ignition mode to ON by pressing the engine switch Immobilizer Keyless Start System Warning Light 80JM122 When you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON the light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working If this light stays on there is a problem with the system This light flashes if you press the engine switch while the system is not sensing the remote con troller For details refer to Immobilizer System in this section i AWD Warning Light if equipped 57L30042 When you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON the light 2 76 BEFORE DRIVING comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working This light comes on if there is any prob lem with the intelligent all whee
30. l R l 7 5 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE R Replace or change Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary This int dosd Boi i miles x 1000 82 5 90 97 5 105 112 5 120 127 5 135 142 5 150 nterval This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months whichever comes first km x 1000 137 5 150 162 5 175 187 5 200 212 5 225 237 5 250 months 82 5 90 97 5 105 112 5 120 127 5 135 142 5 150 CHASSIS AND BODY 1 Clutch for manual transaxle Pedal and fluid level l l 2 Brake discs and pads front rear 8 Brake hoses and pipes l l 4 Brake fluid level check replacement R 1 1 5 Brake pedal stroke check adjustment l l 6 Parking brake lever and cable Lever movement check adjustment 1 1 7 Tires including tire rotation l l 8 Wheel discs l 9 Suspension system l 10 Propeller shafts i AWD Drive axle boots l l l 11 Manual transaxle oil Level check amp replacement Genuine SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 R l Other than SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 R R R 12 Continuously variable transaxle CVT Fluid level l l Fluid hose 13 Transfer oil i AWD R l 14 Rear differ
31. sion as it has an automatic tensioner If you need to replace or adjust the belt have it done by your SUZUKI dealer ADB GE AC ADB Accessory drive belt GE Generator AC Air conditioner compressor 57L71001 7 15 Engine Oil and Filter Specified Oil Starburst 80JC103 Use engine oil with the American Petro leum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines Starburst symbol We highly recommend you use SAE 5W 30 oil CAUTION Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage Oil Level Check Engine oil dipstick 80G064 It is important to keep the engine oil at the correct level for proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine Check the oil level with the vehicle on a level surface The oil level indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle is on a slope The oil level should be checked either before starting the engine or at least 5 minutes after stopping the engine EXAMPLE 225 Ww EM we M The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col ored yellow for easy identification Pull out the oil dipstick wipe oil off with a clean cloth insert the dipstick all the way into the engine then remove it again The oil on the stick should be between the upper and lower limits shown on the stick If the oil level indication is near the lower limit add enough oil to raise the level to the upper limit
32. smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 8 8 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the oress hold release sequence a second time and depend ing on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming pro cess HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons begin with Programming HomeLink step 2 Do not repeat step 1 For questions or comments please con tact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Gate Operator Canadian Program ming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having diffi culties programming a gate operator by using the Programming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink step 3 with the following NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device duri
33. tered To use Bluetooth ready audio devices with this unit the devices need to be registered NOTE To set up a new audio player disconnect the system from the phone The phone shall be reconnected after audio player setup is completed If connection cannot be confirmed within 120 seconds the connecting operation is canceled Please try again or refer to the audio player manual for assistance with the pairing process 1 Press the Off Hook button 6 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select BT A Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 5 50 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Record and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 5 Pronounce the name to be used at voice recognition 6 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 7 Select M MEDIA from the Bluetooth menu of the audio player and make a connection Refer to the manual of your audio player for further information 8 Enter the Passkey displayed on the system into the audio player NOTE Selection of
34. 1 simultaneously 3 Enter a 4 digit PIN number using the Preset buttons 2 1 4 4 Hold down the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 4 for 1 sec or more If the PIN that you input matches the registered PIN the power of the audio system will turn off and you will be able to operate the audio system NOTE If you input your PIN incorrectly ERROR will be displayed If you enter an incorrect PIN more than 10 times HELP will be displayed and you can not perform any further operation Troubleshooting OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT If you suspect something wrong check and take steps as described below If the described suggestions do not solve the problem it is recommended to take the unit to your nearest dealer Problem Possible cause Possible solution Common Unable to operate The security function is on If the unit displays SECURITY enter your user ID If the unit displays HELP consult your dealer Power is not turned on No sound is produced Fuse is blown Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer Radio Much noise The unit is not exactly tuned in to the sta tion Tune it in exactly to the station Unable to receive by auto tuning There is no station emitting signals pow erful enough Pick up a station by manual tuning XM Channel unselectable No contact with XM Satellite radio Inc Refer to the XM s website to sign up for XM Ra
35. 10A Dome light 5 7 5 102 SIG 26 20 Door lock 6 15 Ignition coil IA The fuses are also located under the 7 15 ccessory 2 driver s side of the dashboard To access 8 15A Accessory these fuses pull the dashboard under cover to release its clip engagements and 9 10A ESP control module then remove the undercover The amper 57L70027 age of each fuse is shown on the top of the 2 Dashboard undercover 10 7 5A Cruise control dashboard undercover 7 42 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE CAUTION Remove the dashboard undercover while being careful not to damage the Passenger s side EXAMPLE wiring fitted on it If the wiring is dam aged the courtesy lights will not work inca d 57L70016 57L71013 1 Passengers side fuse box NO AMPS FUSE NAME 57L70030 30A Power seat Left 30A Blank 2 Dashboard undercover 3 Screw 1 20A Ped d window 2 20A Lett power window 3 20A Pigh Mf window 4 15A 4WD 5 20 Battery fan 6 20 Audio 7 30A Power seat Right 7 43 The fuses are also located under the pas senger s side of the dashboard Remove the two screws and dashboard under cover The amperage of each fuse is shown on the top of the dashboard under cover CAUTION Remove the dashboard undercover while being careful not to damage the wiring fitt
36. 2 housed inside 57L21002 2 1 To remove the key from the remote control ler slide the lock 3 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the key 57L21016 To stow the key into the remote controller push the key in the remote controller until you hear a click 57L21003 The key identification number 4 is stamped on a metal tag 5 provided with the keys Keep the tag in a safe place If you lose your keys you will need this num ber to have new keys made Write the number below for your future reference KEY NUMBER Immobilizer System A WARNING Never leave the keyless start system remote controller in the vehicle when leaving the vehicle The immobilizer system is an anti theft fea ture which checks whether the keyless start system remote controller that is com municating via radio waves with the vehicle has been registered to the vehicle s key less start system If the remote controller is not a registered one the system will refuse to start the engine using it Immobilizer Keyless Start System Warning Light 85K2210 This light is on the instrument cluster When you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to the light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working If the light is flashing the engine cannot be started The light also flashes when the remote contro
37. A WARNING All occupants including the driver should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash A WARNING All head restraints must be stalled to properly protect vehicle occupants A WARNING Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed Do not attempt to adjust the head restraint while driving NOTE It may be necessary to fold forward the seatback to provide enough overhead clearance to remove the head restraint Adjust the head restraint to the position which places the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears If this is not possible for very tall passengers adjust the head restraint as high as possi ble Rear 57L21039 Your vehicle is equipped with three head restraints on the rear seat Left and right seating places 57L30058 If the head restraint is tipped forward raise it upright BEFORE DRIVING 57L21040 1 head restraint 2 bars 3 release knob To raise the rear head restraint pull upward on the restraint until it clicks To lower the restraint push down on the restraint while holding in the release knob 3 57L30033 When the head restraints must be removed use the following methods For the left and right seating places tip the
38. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 1 2 Connect the other end to the positive terminal of the booster battery 2 3 Connect one end of the second jumper cable to the negative ter minal of the booster battery 2 8 6 EMERGENCY SERVICE 4 Make the final connection to an unpainted heavy metal part i e engine hook 3 of the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery 1 A WARNING Never connect the jumper cable directly to the negative terminal of the discharged battery or an explo sion may occur 4 If the booster battery you are using is installed on another vehicle start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery Run the engine at moderate speed 5 Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery 6 Remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which you connected Towing a Disabled Vehicle Emergency Towing If your vehicle is disabled it may be towed by a tow truck using one of the following methods 1 2 Tow the vehicle with two wheels lifted by the tow truck and the other two wheels on a towing dolly Use the appropriate towing method specified for your vehicle in the Towing Your Vehicle recreational towing sec tion but with the wheels lifted by the tow truck instead of on a towing dolly Be sure to carefully follow the specific instructions provided in th
39. ELRs that can be temporarily converted to function as automatic locking retractors ALRs The ALR mode should be used if you need to secure a child restraint system in the seat Refer to the Child Restraint Systems section for details Safety reminder BEFORE DRIVING Sit up straight and fully back Low on hips 60A038 Low on hips 60A040 2 36 BEFORE DRIVING To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt during a collision position the lap portion of the belt across your lap as low on your hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion of the belt upward through the latch plate The length of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself to allow freedom of movement 2 37 All Seat Belts Except Rear Center 60A039 0050 unfasten the belt push the red To fasten the seat belt sit up straight and PRESS button on the buckle and allow well back in the seat pull the latch plate the belt to retract attached to the seat belt across your body and press it into the buckle until you hear a click Rear Center Seat Belt Fastening BEFORE DRIVING Unfastening 57L21183 The rear center seat belt is a Lap shoul der belt with a buckle a latch plate and a detachable connector The buckle is marked as CENTER for distinction from the rear right seat belt buckle The rear c
40. HF function on off HF Power Toggles the Bluetooth function on and off 1 2 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select HF Power and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Turn on or Turn off and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu 5 48 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Bluetooth audio if equipped Hands free switches TUNE FOLDER CH VOL rusu POWER SOUND Display Ey CD USB J MENU 1 CD button 2 TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 3 Up button 4 Down button 5 DISP button 6 Off Hook button 7 Talk button A Track number B Play time 5 49 Registration of audio devices Pair Audio when no cell phone is regis tered To use Bluetooth ready audio d
41. LOCK but ton 1 To unlock the drivers door push the UNLOCK button 2 once To unlock other doors wait a second or two then push the UNLOCK button 2 a second time If you double click too fast the doors will not unlock The turn signal lights will flash once when the doors are locked 2 7 When the doors are unlocked The turn signal lights will flash twice f the interior light switch is in the DOOR position the interior light will turn on for about 15 seconds and then fade out If you press the engine switch during this time the light will start to fade out immediately Be sure the doors are locked after you operate the LOCK button 1 If no door is opened within about 30 sec onds after the UNLOCK button 2 is operated the doors will automatically lock again NOTE The maximum operating distance of the remote controller is about 5 m 16 ft but this can vary depending on the sur roundings especially near other trans mitting devices such as radio towers or CB Citizen s Band radios e The door locks cannot be operated with the remote controller if the ignition mode has been changed to LOCK OFF with the engine switch or if any door is open If any door is open you cannot lock the door by operating the remote controller however unlock the door You cannot lock the door unless all of the door are closed completely f you lose one of the remote control
42. YELLOW 20 DOOR FR Front power window Right 4 BLUE 15 4WD 4WD 5 YELLOW 20 BTRY FAN Battery fan 6 BLUE 20 AUDIO Audio 7 PINK 30 PWR SEAT R Power seat Right 8 PINK 30 PWR SEAT L Power seat Left 9 PINK 30 BELT Blank Under the dashboard of the passen ger s seat side 11 9 FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS are subject to change with Manual transaxle 2WD 2 wheel drive out notice CVT Continuously variable transaxle i AWD intelligent All Wheel Drive ITEM Dimensions UNIT mm in Overall length 4650 183 1 Overall width 1820 71 7 Overall height 1480 58 3 Wheelbase 2700 106 3 Tread Front 1565 61 6 Rear 1565 61 6 Minimum running ground clearance 145 5 7 ITEM Weight Gross axle weight rating Vehicle capacity weight 12 1 SPECIFICATIONS ITEM Engine Type J24B 16V DOHC Number of cylinders 4 Bore 92 0 mm 3 62 in Stroke 90 0 mm 3 54 in Piston displacement 2393 cm 2393 cc 146 0 cu in Compression ratio 10 0 1 ITEM Electrical Ignition timing 5 B T D C Standard spark plug SILFR6A1 1 Battery 12V GP24 Fuses See INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE and FUSES AND PRO TECTED CIRCUITS sections 12 2 SPECIFICATIONS
43. at the points indicated below 57L70048 EMERGENCY SERVICE 1 Front 2 Jack stand 3 Jacking point for onboard jack Do not use this point for a jack stand 4 Rear 5 Jacking point for onboard jack 6 Front suspension frame 7 Rear suspension frame 8 Differential carrier 9 Jacking point for garage jack 10 Application point for two column lift and jack stand CAUTION Never apply a garage jack to the exhaust pipe or engine undercover NOTE For more details please contact an autho rized SUZUKI dealer EMERGENCY SERVICE Changing Wheels To change a wheel use the following pro cedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 Remove the jack tools and spare wheel from the vehicle Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts Jack up the vehicle follow the jacking instructions in this section A WARNING Be sure to shift into Park in CVT or shift into R Reverse in manual transaxle when you jack up the vehicle Never jack up the vehicle with the transaxle in N Neutral Other wise unstable jack may cause an accident Remove the wheel nuts and wheel Before installing the new wheel clean any mud or dirt off from the surface of the nuts wheel and hub with a clean cloth Clean the hub carefully it may be hot from driving Install the new wheel and replace the wheel nuts with their c
44. helps to control the vehicle during corner ing if front wheels or rear wheels skid It also assists you in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces It does this by regulating the engine s output and by selectively apply ing the brakes In addition ESP helps to avoid skidding by controlling braking pres sure A WARNING The ESP cannot enhance the vehi cle s driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicle s entire braking system The ESP can not prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be used as a substitute for careful driving 3 31 The ESP has the following three systems Stability Control System The vehicle stability control system helps provide integrated control of systems such as anti lock brakes traction control engine control etc This system automatically controls the brakes and engine to help pre vent the vehicle from skidding when cor nering on a slippery road surface or when turning the steering wheel abruptly Traction Control System The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of wheels when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces The system oper ates only if it senses that some of the wheels are spinning or begi
45. motor automatically stops after a certain period of time After the starter motor has automatically stopped or there is anything abnormal in the engine starting system the starter motor runs only while the engine switch is held pressed If the Engine Overheats The engine could overheat temporarily under severe driving conditions If the engine coolant temperature gauge indi cates overheating during driving 1 Turn off the air conditioner if equipped 2 Take the vehicle to a safe place and park 3 Let the engine run at normal idle speed for a few minutes until the indicator is within the normal acceptable tempera ture range shown by the white band between H and C A WARNING If you see or hear escaping steam stop the vehicle in a safe place and immediately turn off the engine to let it cool Do not open the hood when steam is present When the steam can no longer be seen or heard open the hood to see if the coolant is still boiling If it is you must wait until it stops boiling before you proceed Also be careful not to touch hot engine parts radiator water hoses engine etc EMERGENCY SERVICE If the temperature indication does not come down to within the normal accept able range 1 Turn off the engine and check that the water pump belt and pulleys are not damaged or slipping If any abnormality is found correct it 2 Check the coolant level in the reservoir If it is found to be lower t
46. source Refer to Audio Systems in the OTHER CONTROL AND EQUIPMENT section CAUTION If you close the lid of the lidded instrument panel box with a device still connected to the USB socket the equipment and the socket may be damaged 5 81 57L51068 The cigarette lighter will work when you press the engine switch to change the igni tion mode to ACC or ON To use the cigarette lighter push it all the way into the receptacle and release it It will automatically heat up and will pop out to its normal position when it is ready for use CAUTION Holding the cigarette lighter in can overheat and damage the lighter Release the lighter after you push it in CAUTION To avoid damage to the cigarette lighter socket do not use it as an accessory power source Some accessories power plug can damage the inner mechanism of the cigarette lighter socket Ashiray if equipped OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Assist Grips aa 795047 You can fit the ashtray into any of the cup holders on the center console A WARNING Make sure tobacco is fully extin guished before closing the ashtrays Never throw waste in the ashtrays it could create a fire hazard 57L51065 54G249 Assist grips are provided for convenience CAUTION To avoid damaging the assist grip CAUTION When fitting the ashtray into a cup holder on the center console orie
47. such as data related to airbag readiness airbag performance safety belt usage and the severity of the collision These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur and lead to the designing of safer vehicles The SDM in your vehicle does not collect or store personal information Also the EDRs in your vehicle do not have the ability to transmit information to a cen tral communications system or any other external devices To read the stored information special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or storage device is required SUZUKI will not access infor mation about a crash event or share it with others other than with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee in response to an official request from the police or similar government office as part of SUZUKI s defense of litiga tion through the discovery process or as required by law In addition once SUZUKI collects or receives data SUZUKI may use the data for research conducted by SUZUKI make the data available for outside research if need is shown and confidentiality is assured or make summary data which does not identify specific vehicles available for outside research Others such as law enforcement per sonnel may have access to the spe cial equipment that can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or storage device Reporting Safety Defects If you believe that yo
48. tag name Dial Dialing the number of Dial Dialing the corresponding number Lm Store Adding the corresponding number to Phonebook en Delete Deleting the corresponding number from the record Previous Back the previous number Dial Dialing the corresponding number Store Adding the corresponding number to Phonebook ae Delete Deleting the corresponding number from the record Previous Back to the previous number Dial Dialing the number of phone number Dial by number iue Delete Canceling the number pronounced a moment ago Press e On Dialing the number of phone number Hook button Dial Dialing the number of tag name Dial by name Dialing the number of tag name List names Dialing the number of the telephone that is read at that moment 1 Subsequently pronounce Confirm to implement the operation 5 57 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone book OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1st word 2nd word Function Adding the number to Phonebook with voice 1 Pronounce phone number and pronounce Confirm to confirm the operation By voice 2 Pronounce tag name and pronounce Confirm to confirm the operation 3 If the number is added to the speed dialing list pronounce Set speed dial and hold down one of the preset buttons 1 to 6
49. the seat belt reminder can be activated as if there were a passenger present The front pas senger s seat belt reminder works in the same manner as the drivers seat belt reminder except that it is not activated until 10 seconds after the ignition mode is changed to ON by pressing the engine switch 2 43 Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster Seat Belt Inspection EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 57L21045 Adjust the shoulder anchor height so that the shoulder belt rides on the center of the outside shoulder To upward slide the anchor up To downward slide the anchor down while down the lock lever After adjustment make sure that the anchor is securely locked A WARNING Be sure that the shoulder belt is posi tioned on the center of the outside shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not fall ing off your shoulder Misadjustment of the belt could reduce the effective ness of the safety belt in a crash 65D209S Periodically inspect the seat belts to make sure they work properly and are not dam aged Check the webbing buckles latch plates retractors anchorages and guide loops Replace any seat belts which do not work properly or are damaged A WARNING Be sure to inspect all seat belt assemblies after any collision Any seat belt assembly which was in use during a collision other than a very minor one should be replaced even if damage to the assemb
50. vehicle has been broken into while you were away from it Enabling and disabling the theft deter rent alarm system The theft deterrent alarm system can be either enabled or disabled When enabled factory setting When the system is enabled it causes the hazard warning lights to flash for about 40 seconds if any of the alarm trigger condi tions is met The system also causes the interior buzzer to beep intermittently for about 10 seconds which is followed by intermittent sounding of the horn for about 30 seconds The theft deterrent light continues to flash during this time When disabled When the system is disabled it stays dis armed even if you perform any system arming operation BEFORE DRIVING How to switch the state of the theft deterrent alarm system You can switch the theft deterrent alarm system from the enabled state to the dis abled state and vice versa using the fol lowing method EXAMPLE 57L21020 2 UNLOCK 3 LOCK 5 4 C 4 57L21021 2 16 BEFORE DRIVING 1 With the ignition mode changed to ON by pressing the engine switch close all the doors as well as the engine hood and the trunk lid and push the unlock end backward end of the power door locking switch 1 of the driver s door Turn the knob control on the lighting control lever to the OFF position 4 NOTE All operations included in the following steps 2 and 3
51. we recommend you visit your local SUZUKI dealership Their fac tory trained technicians will provide the best possible service and use only genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION SERVICE STATION GUIDE Fuel see section 1 Engine hood see section 5 Tire changing tools see section 8 Engine oil dipstick lt Yellow gt see section 7 CVT fluid dipstick lt Red or Orange gt see section 7 Engine coolant see section 7 Windshield washer fluid see section 7 Battery see section 7 Tire pressure see Tire Information Label on driver s door lock pillar Spare tire see section 7 o NO RON 57L1F002 TABLE OF CONTENTS California Proposition 65 Warning A WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constitu ents and certain product compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm FUEL RECOMMENDATION ENS BEFORE DRIVING OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE DRIVING TIPS OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY SERVICE APPEARANCE CARE GENERAL INFORMATION FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS SPECIFICATIONS INDEX ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS E
52. 2 57L51003 Turn the temperature selector 1 2 to adjust the temperature The display 11 shows the selected temperature NOTE If you turn the temperature selector 1 until HI or LO appears on the display the climate control system will operate at the maximum heating or cooling and the blower will run at full speed The tempera ture of the air from the outlets may change suddenly while LO or HI is displayed but this is normal OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT DUAL switch 3 Every time you press the DUAL switch 3 the temperature control mode switches between the following Individual control mode indicatior ON The driver and passenger can make temperature adjustments indepen dently from their own temperature selectors Combined control mode indicatior OFF If a temperature adjustment is made from the drivers temperature selector 1 the same adjustment is made auto matically on the passenger side NOTE If the passenger s temperature selector 2 is turned while in the combined control mode the individual control mode is auto matically set Blower speed selector 4 4 AUTO lt a gt 9 57L51004 Air flows out at a higher rate when you press the right switch and at a lower rate when you press the left switch If the AUTO switch 9 is pushed the blower speed will vary automatically as the climate control
53. 2 Check that the depth of the tread groove is more than 1 6 mm 0 06 To help you check this the tires have molded in tread wear indica tors in the grooves When the indi cators appear on the tread surface the remaining depth of the tread is 1 6 mm 0 06 in or less and the tire should be replaced 3 Check for abnormal wear cracks and damage Any tires with cracks or other damage should be replaced If any tires show abnor mal wear have them inspected by your SUZUKI dealer A WARNING Hitting curbs and running over rocks can damage tires and affect wheel alignment Be sure to have tires wheel alignment checked periodically by your SUZUKI dealer 4 Check for loose wheel nuts 5 Check that there are nails stones or other objects sticking into the tires A WARNING Your SUZUKI is equipped with tires which are all the same type and size This is important to ensure proper steering and han dling of the vehicle Never mix tires of different size or type on the four wheels of your vehicle The size and type of tires used should be only those approved by SUZUKI Motor Corporation as standard or optional equipment for your vehicle CAUTION For intelligent All Wheel Drive i AWD models replacing a tire with one of a different size or using different brands among the four tires can result in damage to the drive train INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE A WARNING Replacing the wheels
54. 2 until the AVC adjust ment mode is selected 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select the desired AVC adjustment level Initial setting LEVEL 2 5 18 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Listening to the Radio TRACKICAT Lom gt J MENU 1 3 2 Display 1 FM AM button 2 Up button 3 Down button 4 TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 5 Preset buttons 1 to 6 6 AS button 7 DISP button A Band B Frequency Selecting the reception band Press the FM AM button 1 Each time the button is pressed the reception band is switched as follows FM1 gt FM2 AM Seek tuning Press the seek Up button 2 or the seek Down button 3 The unit stops searching for a station at a frequency where a broadcast station is available Manual tuning Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 4 The frequency being played received is dis OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Preset memory 1 Select the desired station 2 Select the Preset button 5 to which you want to store the station and press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer Auto store Press and hold the AS button 6 for 2 sec onds or longer Six stations in good reception are auto matically stored to the
55. 27 US pt for CVT to raise the level from LOW to FULL CAUTION After checking or adding oil be sure to insert the dipstick securely Deterioration Checking or Chang ing Fluid Since special procedures materials and tools are required to check the deteriora tion of CVT fluid or change it is recom mended that you trust this job to your authorized SUZUKI dealer 7 25 Brakes Brake Fluid EXAMPLE 57L71010 Check the brake fluid level by looking at the reservoir in the engine compartment Check that the fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines If the brake fluid level is near the MIN line fill it up to the MAX line with SAE J1703 or brake fluid BRAKE 65D477 A WARNING Failure to follow the guidelines below can result in personal injury or seri ous damage to the brake system If the brake fluid in the reservoir drops below a certain level the brake warning light on the instru ment panel will come on the engine must be running with the parking brake fully disengaged Should the light come on immedi ately ask your SUZUKI dealer to inspect the brake system A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in the brake system which should be inspected by your SUZUKI dealer immediately Brake fluid can harm your eyes and damage painted surfaces Use cau tion when refilling the reservoir Continued A WARNING Continue
56. 28 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE The letters ZR may be used on tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph and will always be used on tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph J M S Marking This marking indicates the tire has some mud and snow capabili ties and is designed for all season use 7 29 67D028 A Tire Type This letter code indicates the pri mary intended use of the tire The letter identifies a tire primarily intended for use on a passenger vehicle B Tire Width This three digit number indicates the tire section width in millime ters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio This two digit number represents the tire section height divided by the tire section width U 124 mph Tire Size D Construction Code The following illustration shows an This letter code is used to indicate H 130 mph example of a typical passenger car tire the type of ply construction in the size tire The letter R means radial V 149 mph ply tire construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply con ui TOS mph struction and the letter B means Y 186 mph belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter This two digit number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches A WARNING Your SUZUKI is equipped with tires which are all the same type and size This is important to ensure proper steering and han dling of the vehicle Never mix tires of differen
57. Anti Lock Brake System ABS in the OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section ESP warning Light ESP is a registered trademark of Daimler AG This light blinks 5 5 times per second when one of the ESP systems other than ABS is activated If this light blinks drive care fully When you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON the light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working If the light stays on or comes on when driving and remains on there may be something wrong with the systems other than ABS You should have the system inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer NOTE When you disconnect and re connect the battery system functions other than ABS will be deactivated For details on how to reactive the ESP systems refer to ESP Warning Light in the OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section For details of the ESP systems refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in the OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE sec tion A WARNING The ESP systems cannot prevent accidents Always drive carefully ESP OFF Indicator Light BEFORE DRIVING Oil Pressure Light ee OF F 57L30045 When you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON this light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working When the ESP OFF switch is pushed to turn off the ESP sys
58. For vehicles with front side air bags do not place seat covers on the front seats because seat cov ers could restrict the air bag s infla tion Also do not place any cup holders or other objects on the door as these objects could be propelled by the air bag in the event of a crash Either of these condi tions may cause severe injury Note that even though your vehicle may be moderately damaged in a collision the col lision may not have been severe enough to trigger the front side rear side or side curtain air bags to inflate If your car sus tains ANY front end or side damage have the air bag system inspected by an autho rized SUZUKI dealer to ensure it is in proper working order Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module which records information about the air bag system if the air bags deploy in a crash The module records information about overall system status which sensors activated the deployment and whether the front seat belts were in use Servicing the Air Bag System If the air bags inflate have the air bags and related components replaced by an autho rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and the driver s floor is submerged the air bag controller could be damaged If this hap pens have the air bag system inspected by the SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible Special procedures are required for servic ing or replacing an air bag For that reaso
59. GREEN 1V may damage the CVT of your vehicle NOTE Do not check the fluid level if you have just driven the vehicle for a long time at high speed or if you have driven in city traffic in hot weather Wait until the fluid cools down about 30 minutes or the fluid level indica tion will not be correct 3 Park your vehicle on level ground 4 Apply the parking brake and then start the engine in P Park Let it idle for two minutes and keep it running during the fluid level check 5 With your foot on the brake pedal move the gearshift lever through each gear pausing for about three seconds in each range Then move it back to the P Park position A WARNING Be sure to depress the brake pedal when moving the gearshift lever or the vehicle can move suddenly EXAMPLE 75F086 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE 80J2071 EXAMPLE 80J2072 1 FULL 2 LOW 3 The lowest point Fluid level 7 24 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 6 The handle of the CVT fluid dipstick is colored red or orange for easy identifi cation Remove the dipstick clean it and push it back in until the cap seats Pull out the dipstick and read the fluid level The fluid level should be between the two marks in the HOT range on the dipstick 7 Add just enough specified fluid through the dipstick hole to fill the transaxle to the proper level It takes only 0 6 liters 1
60. Preset buttons 5 in sequential order starting from the lower frequencies NOTE Auto store can be released by pressing AS button 6 while auto store is under Way When the auto store is performed the station previously stored in the memory at the position is overwritten e When there are fewer than 6 stations that can be stored even if 1 round of auto store operation is performed no station will be stored at the remaining Preset buttons 5 6 stations can be preset for FM1 and FM2 in common and 6 stations for AM in auto store mode Auto store mode on off Press the AS button 6 Each time the button is pressed the mode is switched as follows AS mode gt AS mode off Preset station calling Press the Preset button 5 The corresponding station preset can be received NOTE If the button for a station not preset is pressed the unit displays 5 20 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display change Press the DISP button 7 Each time it is pressed display is changed as follows Frequency display Y Station name display Y Radio text display NOTE e Station name display is not selectable when no station name data is received e NO MESSAGE is displayed when radio text data is received If all the text data cannot be displayed the gt mark appears at the right end Holding down the DISP button 7 f
61. Suzuki recommends that you have an authorized SUZUKI dealer mount a new tire on the wheel that had the flat tire and reinstall this tire on the vehicle in place of the spare The TPMS is already set up to recognize the ID code of the original wheel and normal TPMS oper ation will be restored TPMS ID NOT REGISTERED 50 F 491 57L31027 NOTE The above message will be indicated on the information display if the ID code is not registered If you need to replace original wheels on your vehicle your dealer must make sure that TPMS sensors are installed in the new wheels and must set up the TPMS to rec ognize the new sensors 3 38 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE A TPMS sensor is not installed in the spare tire You should use the spare tire only in an emergency situation should replace the spare tire as soon as possible to restore normal TPMS operation A WARNING Only use tires and wheels recom mended by SUZUKI as standard or optional equipment for your vehicle Use of tires or wheels not recom mended by SUZUKI can result in TPMS failure Refer to Tires in the INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE section for additional information For Vehicles Sold in U S A This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received inc
62. The gearshift lever has a lock mechanism to help prevent accidental shifting To shift the gearshift lever Shift with the lock button 1 3 hed in and the brake pedal ee eee nema 57L21008 e Always shift the gearshift lever without hift F ushing in the lock button 1 except Gearshift lever gt s pd the lock button 1 NOCH jon shift from P to Ses Ht pushed in to or from to P If you always push in the lock button 1 when shifting zx Shift without the lock button 1 the gearshift lever you could shift into pushed in P or by mistake If drivers or passenger s knee hits the gearshift lever while driving the lever could move and the gear could be changed unexpectedly 51 um DA 9 U 57L31009 3 15 Use the gearshift lever positions as follows P Park Use this position to lock the transaxle when the vehicle is parked or when start ing the engine Shift into Park only when the vehicle is completely stationary R Reverse Use this position to reverse the vehicle from stop Make sure that vehicle is com pletely stationary before shifting into Reverse CAUTION Do not shift the gearshift lever into R while moving forward or the transaxle may be damaged If you shift into R when the vehicle speed is over 6mph 10km h the transaxle will not shift into r
63. Tighten the plug with a wrench to the specified torque 6 Reinstall the engine under cover Tightening torque specification 35 Nm 25 3 lb ft 3 5 kg m 7 17 Replace the Oil Filter EXAMPLE 60A198 1 Remove the engine under cover 2 Using an oil filter wrench turn the oil fil ter counterclockwise and remove it 3 Using a clean rag wipe off the mount ing surface on the engine where the new filter will be seated 4 Smear a little engine oil around the rub ber gasket of the new oil filter 5 Screw on the new filter by hand until the filter gasket contacts the mounting sur face CAUTION To tighten the oil filter properly it is important to accurately identify the position at which the filter gasket first contacts the mounting surface 54G093 1 Oil filter 2 3 4 turn 6 Tighten the filter 3 4 turn from the point of contact with the mounting surface or to the specified torque using an oil filter wrench 7 Reinstall the engine under cover Tightening torque specification 14 Nm 10 0 Ib ft 1 4 kg m CAUTION To prevent oil leakage make sure that the oil filter is tight but do not overtighten it NOTE When it is difficult to remove the oil filter we recommend you take your vehicle to your SUZUKI dealer for oil filter replace ment Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks 1 Pour oil through the filler hole and install the fi
64. a load carrying capacity less than the original tires on your vehicle Tire load carrying capacity information is molded into the tire sidewall typically shown as Max Load Use of replace ment tires with a lower load carrying capacity than the original tires or fail ure to keep the tires inflated to recom mended tire pressure may reduce the GVWR or GAWR limit of your vehicle NOTE Use of replacement tires with a higher load carrying capacity than the origi nal tires or using a tire inflation pres sure higher than the recommended tire inflation pressure will not increase the GVWR or GAWR limit of your vehi cle 7 39 Battery EXAMPLE 60A269 A WARNING Batteries produce flammable hydro gen gas Keep flames and sparks away from the battery or an explosion may occur Never smoke when work ing near the battery A WARNING When checking or servicing the bat tery disconnect the negative cable Be careful not to cause a short circuit by allowing metal objects to contact the battery posts and the vehicle at the same time A WARNING To avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery follow the jump starting instructions in the EMERGENCY SERVICE section of this manual if it is necessary to jump start your vehicle A WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after han dling Your vehicle is equ
65. and allow A ELR type belt it to retract to a certain length the retractor EXAMPLE will automatically revert back to the normal ELR mode Pull to tighten 65D235 5 Try moving the child restraint system in all directions to make sure it is securely installed If you need to tighten the belt pull more webbing toward the retractor 2 48 BEFORE DRIVING Installation with the LATCH System Rigid lower connecting bar type Flexible lower connecting strap type 65D337 2 49 EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 57L21046 Your vehicle is equipped with lower anchors for securing up to one or two stan dard LATCH type child restraint s in the rear seats LATCH stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children The anchors are located where the rear of the seat cushion meets the bottom of the seatback 57L21047 The covers marked with the child restraint symbol as shown in the illustration indicate the presence of lower anchors Remove the covers before installing the child restraint system Cover the lower anchors when not in use NOTE Stow the removed covers in the glove box or other appropriate stowage so they will not inconvenience the occupants Install the LATCH type child restraint sys tem according to the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer After installing try moving the child restraint system in all directions especially forward to make su
66. and tires equipped on your vehicle with certain combinations of aftermar ket wheels and tires can signifi cantly change the steering and handling characteristics of your vehicle Oversized tires may also rub against the fender over bumps causing vehicle damage or tire failure Therefore use only those wheel and tire combina tions approved by SUZUKI Motor Corporation as standard optional equipment for your vehi cle For information regarding the specified tires refer to the Tire Information Label located on the driver s side door pillar or the SPECIFICATIONS section CAUTION Replacing the original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer or odometer readings Check with your SUZUKI dealer before purchas ing replacement tires that differ in size from the original tires 7 32 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Uniform Tire Quality Grading The U S National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has developed a grading system for evaluating the per formance of passenger car tires The following information will help you understand the grading system which applies to vehicles sold in the U S Consult your SUZUKI dealer or tire retailer for help in choosing the correct replacement tires for your vehicle Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera ture A DOT Qual
67. before you start the engine However as Do not ride the brakes by applying them continuously or resting your foot on the pedal This will result in the heating time varies depending on the ambient temperature and other factors adjust the time by observing the engine cranking condition A WARNING To avoid serious personal injury caused by electrical shock or fire Do not plug the cord into a non grounded outlet Only use a prop erly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet Do not use a 2 wire non grounded extension cord The engine block heater will help you start e riduce Rari the engine more easily in very cold amps weather 18 C 0 F or below To use the engine block heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the engine hood 3 Untie the block heater cord and remove the block heater plug cap When the engine block heater is not in use ensure the heater cord is secured to prevent contact with any moving parts 4 Using heavy duty three prong grounded extension cord plug the female end into the block heater socket and the male end into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet overheating of the brakes which could cause unpredictable braking action longer stopping distances or permanent brake damage Accelerator Pedal 3 This pedal controls the speed of the engine Depressing the accelerator pedal increases power output and speed 57L31034
68. by telephone at 1 905 889 2677 extension 2254 or in writing at Suzuki Canada Inc Customer Relations 100 East Beaver Creek Road Richmond Hill On L4B 106 2 67 Instrument Cluster 1 Speedometer 2 Tachometer 3 Fuel gauge 4 Temperature gauge 5 Information display 6 Brightness control knob BEFORE DRIVING EXAMPLE 8 s s 9 um TI NS 3D EA 200 ZOR E OFF A SS X ww yw 02 CRUISE SET eg UN TH 90 E o 4 6 57L21056 2 68 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Lights Low Tire Pressure Warning Light if equipped 52D305 As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that uses a low tire pressure warning light to inform you when one or more of your tires is signifi cantly under inflated When you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON this light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working When the low tire pressure warning light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle s tire information placard Driving on a significantly under inflated tire ca
69. coming on This could be due to surface temperature increases after long distance driving or traveling to a high temperature area Even if the tire pressure warning light turns off after coming on make sure to check the inflation pressure of all tires To reduce the chance that the low tire pressure warning light will come on due to normal changes in temperature and atmospheric pressure it is important to check and adjust the tire pressures when the tires are cold Tires that appear to be at the specified pressure when checked after driving when the tires are warm could have pressure below the specification when the tires cool down Also tires that are inflated to the specified pressure in a warm garage may have pressure below the specifica tion when the vehicle is driven outside in very cold temperature If you adjust the tire pressure in a garage that is warmer than the outside temperature you 3 36 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE should add 1 psi to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure for every 10 F difference between garage temperature and outside temperature For tire inflation pressure information refer to Tire Inflation Pressure in the INSPEC TION AND MAINTENANCE section To make the low tire pressure warning light turn off the vehicle must be driven for longer and faster than the specified thresh olds after adjusting the tire pressure Please ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer for details 3 37 T
70. driver and passengers wear their seat belts at all times Persons who are not wearing seat belts have a much greater risk of injury if an accident occurs Make a regular habit of buck ling your seat belt before starting the engine The seat belt reminder functions as shown in the figure below There are some differ ences between the drivers seat belt reminder and the front passengers seat belt reminder For more details refer to the following explanation 2 41 Flow chart Engine Switch ON v Y v Seat belt is Seat belt is No reminder unbuckled _ buckled eg 2 1 1 eae i 30 sec v Vehicle speed Vehicle speed v v below 8 km h over 8 km h Vehicle speed Vehicle speed below 8 km h over 8 km h 1 Vehicle speed i increase to 8 km h v i 1 e eme e ee Cee eee eS ees eL cm 3 min 1 Y Reminder 1 3 For each reminder 1 3 the reminder light comes on for about 20 seconds then blinks for about 55 seconds When the reminder light first comes on a buzzer sounds intermittently for about 6 seconds 57L21044 BEFORE DRIVING Driver s seat belt reminder If the drivers seat belt remains unbuckled after changing the ignition mode to ON by pressing the engine switch the driver s seat bel
71. for 2 sec or more If the number is not added to the speed dialing list pronounce Confirm to confirm the operation Adding the number from the cell phone to Phonebook 1 Make the cell phone ready for this operation and pronounce Confirm to confirm the operation 2 Pronounce Previous or Next to select a number and pronounce Confirm to By phone confirm the selection 5 3 Pronounce tag name and pronounce Confirm to confirm the operation Phonebook add entry 4 If the number is added to the speed dialing list pronounce Set speed dial and hold down one of the preset buttons 1 to 6 for 2 sec or more If the number is not added to the speed dialing list pronounce Confirm to confirm the operation Adding the number from the record to Phonebook 1 Pronounce Incoming to add the number from the incoming call record and pro nounce Outgoing to add the number from the outgoing call record 2 Pronounce Previous or Next to select a number and pronounce Confirm to Call history confirm the selection 3 Pronounce tag name and pronounce Confirm to confirm the operation 4 If the number is added to the speed dialing list pronounce Set speed dial and hold down one of the preset buttons 1 to 6 for 2 sec or more If the number is not added to the speed dialing list pronounce Confirm to confirm the operation 5 58 OTHER CONTROLS AN
72. for manual transaxle vehicles is in 1st gear or R Reverse and the gearshift lever for CVT vehicles is in P Park Remember even though the transaxle is in gear or in Park you must set the parking brake fully Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer If you start the vehicle without releasing the parking brake the interior buzzer warns you by repeated triple beeps 3 11 Pedals Manual transaxle EXAMPLE CVT 57L31028 EXAMPLE 57L31029 Clutch Pedal 1 For manual transaxle The clutch pedal is used to disengage the drive to the wheels when starting the engine stopping or shifting the gearshift lever Depressing the pedal disengages the clutch CAUTION Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal It could result in excessive clutch wear clutch dam age or unexpected loss of engine braking Brake Pedal 2 Your SUZUKI vehicle is equipped with either front and rear disc brakes Depress ing the brake pedal applies both sets of brakes You may hear occasional brake squeal when you apply the brakes This is a nor mal condition caused by environmental factors such as cold wet snow etc A WARNING If brake squeal is excessive and occurs each time the brakes are applied you should have the brakes checked by your SUZUKI dealer OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Block Heater NOTE WARNING if d Activate the heater at least four hours i equippe
73. glass type 1 and Glass metal type 2 To remove and install a full glass type bulb 1 simply pull out or push in the bulb To remove a glass metal type bulb 2 from a bulb holder push in the bulb and turn it counterclockwise To install a new bulb push it in and turn it clockwise You can access the individual bulb or bulb holders as follows 7 49 Front parking lights 1 Open the engine hood 57L70036 2 To create the space necessary for per forming the steps that follow discon nect the coupler 1 by pressing the claw 3 Turn the cover 2 counterclockwise to remove it 57L70037 4 Disconnect the coupler 3 57L71027 5 Pull on the cable 4 toward the rear of the vehicle to remove the bulb socket 5 from the parking light body NOTE You can remove the parking light s bulb socket only by pulling on the cable but this method must never be used to remove the bulb sockets of any other lights 6 Replace the bulb then follow the above steps in reverse to restore the original state Side turn signal lights 57L71028 1 Pull out the rear end of the side turn signal light 1 while pushing it toward the front of the vehicle as shown in the illustration 57L71029 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2 Disconnect the coupler while pushing the lock release 2 on it 3 Replace the side turn signal light 1 then fo
74. hood is fully closed and latched 5 Check the headlights turn signal lights brake lights and horn for proper opera tion 6 Lock all doors 7 Adjust the seat and adjustable head restraints if equipped 8 Check the brake pedal 9 Adjust the mirrors 10 Make sure that you and all passengers have properly fastened your seat belts 11 Make sure that all warning lights come on as the ignition mode is changed to ON by pressing the engine switch 12 Check all gauges 13 Make sure that the BRAKE light turns off when the parking brake is released Once a week or each time you fill your fuel tank perform the following under hood checks 1 Engine oil level 2 Coolant level 3 Brake fluid level 4 Windshield washer fluid level 5 Hood latch operation Pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle Make sure that you cannot open the hood all the way without releasing the secondary latch Be sure to close the hood securely after check ing for proper latch operation See the item All latches hinges and locks of CHASSIS AND BODY in the Periodic Maintenance Schedule section in the INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE section for lubrication schedule A WARNING Make sure the hood is fully closed and latched before driving If it is not it can fly up unexpectedly during driving obstructing your view and resulting in an accident Once a month or each time you fill your fuel tank check th
75. hydrogen gas Keep flames and sparks away from the battery or an explosion may occur Never smoke when working near the battery If the booster battery you use for jump starting is installed in another vehicle make sure the two vehicles are not touching each other If your battery discharges repeat edly for no apparent reason have your vehicle inspected by an autho rized SUZUKI dealer To avoid harm to yourself or dam age to your vehicle or battery fol low the jump starting instructions below precisely and in order If you are in doubt call for qualified road service CAUTION Your vehicle should not be started by pushing or towing This starting method could result in permanent damage to the catalytic converter Use jumper cables to start a vehicle with a weak or run down battery When jump starting your vehicle use the following procedure 12V BATTERY 60A269 1 Use only a 12 volt battery to jump start your vehicle Position the good 12 volt battery close to your vehicle so that the jumper cables will reach both batteries When using a battery installed on another vehicle DO NOT LET THE VEHICLES TOUCH Set the parking brakes fully on both vehicles EMERGENCY SERVICE 2 Turn off all vehicle accessories except those necessary for safety reasons for example headlights or hazard lights EXAMPLE 57L81004 3 Make jumper cable connections as fol lows 1
76. inches 3 Open end of extender buckle If a seat belt cannot be fastened securely because it is not long enough see an authorized SUZUKI dealer for a seat belt extender Seat belt extenders are available for each seating position except for the rear center position After inspecting the relationship between the seat belt length the occupant s body size and the seat adjustment the driver s seat should always be adjusted as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle and other adjustable seats should be adjusted as far back as possible your dealer can select the appropriate seat belt extender A seat belt extender should only be used for the person vehicle and seating loca tion it was provided for When using the extender ensure that both ends are latched securely Do not use the extender if the open end of the extenders buckle is within 152 mm 6 inches of the center of the occupants body See diagram Use of the extender when the buckle is too close to the cen ter of the body could increase the risk of abdominal injury in the event of an acci dent and could cause the shoulder belt to be positioned incorrectly Make sure to use the correct buckle cor responding to your seating position Seat belt extenders are not intended for use by pregnant women and should only be used upon approval by their medical advisors Remove and stow the extender when it is not being used A WARN
77. inspected by an autohorized SUZUKI dealer after doing the following Lock the doors using the key to pre vent theft The request switches and the keyless start system remote con troller cannot be used to lock them Disconnect the negative cable from the battery to prevent discharge LOCK OFF mode reminder buzzer If the drivers door is opened without returning the ignition mode to LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch a buzzer sounds to warn you of this state f you open the driver s door after press ing the engine switch to change the igni tion mode to ACC the interior buzzer beeps intermittently The buzzer will stop sounding if you then push the engine switch twice thus bring ing it back the ignition mode to LOCK OFF NOTE Whenever you leave the vehicle make sure you have returned the ignition mode to LOCK OFF using the engine switch and then lock the doors Without returning the ignition mode to LOCK OFF you cannot use a request switch or keyless start system remote controller to lock the doors Steering lock warning buzzer If the steering lock fails to engage due to a fault in the system even when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to LOCK OFF the interior buzzer will warn you of this condition with repeated short beeps If this happens have the vehicle inspected by an autho rized SUZUKI dealer Parking Brake Lever
78. is for emergency use so that if a per son such as a child gets trapped in the trunk compartment he can exit the vehicle The lever glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light so it can be found easily It is operated by pulling it in the direction of the arrow A WARNING To help avoid situations where some one might get trapped in the trunk keep your vehicle locked when unat tended and do not allow anyone to play in the trunk BEFORE DRIVING Keyless Start System Remote Controller Keyless Start System Remote Controller The remote controller enables the following operations You can lock or unlock the doors by operating the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the remote controller Refer to the explanation in this section You can lock or unlock the doors by pushing the request switch on the door handle For details refer to the explana tion in this section You can unlatch and let the trunk lid slightly open by pushing and holding the TRUNK LID UNLOCK button on the remote controller Refer to the explana tion in this section 2 6 BEFORE DRIVING EXAMPLE 57L21013 1 LOCK button 2 UNLOCK button 3 TRUNK LID UNLOCK button 4 PANIC button LOCK button 1 UNLOCK button 2 function You can lock or unlock all doors simulta neously by operating the remote controller near the vehicle To lock the doors push the
79. left win dow and the rear right window respec tively Passenger s door Rear doors EXAMPLE JW 3 WW 57L21025 The passenger s door has a switch 3 to operate the passenger s window CLOSE R OPEN 81A009 To open a window push the top part of the switch and to close the window lift up the top part of the switch The drivers and passengers windows have auto down and auto up features for added convenience at tall booths or drive through restaurants for example This means the driver or passenger can open or close the window without holding the window switch in the Down or Up position Press down or lift up the drivers or passengers window switch completely and release it To stop the window before it reaches the full down or full up position pull up or push down the switch briefly BEFORE DRIVING Lock switch EXAMPLE 57L21026 7 UNLOCK 8 LOCK The driver s door also has a lock switch 6 for the passenger s window s When you push in the lock switch the passenger s window s cannot be raised or lowered by operating any of the switches 2 3 4 or 5 To restore normal operation release the lock switch by pushing the switch again 2 18 BEFORE DRIVING A WARNING You should always lock the passen ger s window operation when there are children in the vehicle Children can be seriously injured if t
80. mes sages Refer to Information Display in the Before Driving section for details If the master warning indicator light flashes and the power supply modes cannot be selected Your keyless start system remote controller may not be sensed as being within the interior workable area Refer to the related explanation in this section Try again after making sure you have the remote controller with you If the power supply modes still cannot be selected the battery of the remote controller may be dis charged To be able to select a power sup ply mode you must then use the following method 57L21124 1 Without depressing the brake pedal push the engine switch 1 2 Within about 10 seconds during which the master warning indicator light in the instrument cluster is flashing and the PLACE KEY FOB START SWITCH message appears on the information display touch the engine switch with the lock switch end of the remote controller 2 for about 2 sec onds NOTE e If you still cannot select the power supply modes there may be some problem with the keyless start system Contact an authorized SUZUKI dealer for an inspec tion of the system e The immobilizer keyless start system warning light will light for about 5 sec onds while the master warning indicator light is flashing In addition the informa tion display in the instrument cluster will show a message during this time Refer to Inf
81. miles or 45 months 6 Exhaust pipes and mountings 1 7 EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 180 months 8 Emission related hoses amp tubes E I E 9 Spark plugs m m m R ES 10 Ignition coil plug cap m 11 Fuel tank amp cap m l RE EE 12 Air cleaner filter element paved road l l R l l 13 Fuel filter Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 150 months 14 Fuel lines and connections l E m 1 15 Canister air suction filter m R 1 Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC Super Blue follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC Standard Green 7 12 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE R Replace or change 1 Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary miles x 1000 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 Interval This interval should be judged by odometer km x 1000 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 reading or months whichever comes first months 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 CHASSIS AND BODY 1 Clutch for manual transaxle Pedal and fluid level 2 Brake discs and pads 3 Brake hoses and pipes 4 Brake fluid
82. not corrected 2 93 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Master Warning Message indicator Sound Cause and Remedy EXAMPLE Off Off The road may be icy Drive very carefully 1 ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE 57L21084 Off Off The remote controller battery is about to KEY FOB LOW BATTERY 57L21103 become flat Replace the battery 1 1 This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected 2 94 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Master Warning UNEVEN TIRE SIZE AWD IS OFF 57L21122 Message indicator Sound Cause and Remedy i AWD Blinks Ping one time from interior There may be a problem with the AWD sys T buzzer tem tor A Have your vehicle inspected by an autho AD rized SUZUKI dealer KH SERVICE AWD SYTEM 57L21121 i AWD Blinks Ping one time from interior Tires of different sizes may be fitted or tires buzzer may be insufficiently inflated tor A Have your vehicle inspected by an autho AWD TIS rized SUZUKI dealer KH 2 95 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Message Master Warning Indicator Sound Cause and Remedy i AWD Blinks Ping one time from interior buzzer Drive train components may be overheated y Stop in a safe place and allow the engine to idle for AA AWD Pier KH AWD SYST
83. on the reser voir tank line up the mark on the cap and the mark on the tank Failure to follow this can result in coolant leak age Coolant Replacement Since special procedures are required we recommend you take your vehicle to your SUZUKI dealer for coolant replacement Air Cleaner 57L71003 If the air cleaner is clogged with dust there will be greater intake resistance resulting in decreased power output and increased fuel consumption Unclamp the side clamps 1 and remove the element from the air cleaner case If it appears to be dirty replace it with a new one CAUTION The air cleaner element should be replaced every 50000 km 30000 miles More frequent replacement is necessary when you drive under dusty conditions INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Spark Plugs You should inspect spark plugs periodically for carbon deposits When carbon accu mulates on a spark plug a strong spark may not be produced Remove carbon deposits with a wire or pin and adjust the spark plug gap To access the spark plugs 57L71004 1 Remove the front part 1 then remove the rear part 2 of the engine cover CAUTION When remove the engine cover make sure the cover does not interfere the vehicle to avoid damage to the cover 7 20 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE 57L71005 2 Disconnect the coupler 3 while push ing the release lever 3
84. pinching prevention function may oper ate accidentally because the window reacts to vehicle jolting CAUTION The pinching prevention function will not be activated until the initialization is complete Do not strike or otherwise give shock to the window during initial ization Initialization is impossible while the vehicle is in motion If the auto up feature would not work after initialization there might be something wrong with the pinching prevention function Have your vehi cle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer Mirrors Inside Rearview Mirror if equipped 65D410 65D409 2 Day driving 3 Night driving You can adjust the inside rearview mirror by hand so as to see the rear of your vehi cle in the mirror To adjust the mirror set the selector tab 1 to the day position then move the mirror up down or sideways by hand to obtain the best view When driving at night you can move the selector tab to the night position to reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you BEFORE DRIVING A WARNING Always adjust the mirror with the selector set to the day position Only use the night position if it is necessary to reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you Be aware that in this position you may not be able to see some objects that could be seen in the day position CAUTION Never spray any liquid directly on the anti glare r
85. press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Delete Audio and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select an audio device to be deleted and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 3 4 5 6 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu 5 54 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Voice command for Bluetooth Hands Free Bluetooth Audio Voice commands are also available for Bluetooth Hands Free functions and Bluetooth Audio functions Press the Talk button and then pronounce a word The usable commands are as follows NOTE Only Pair phone and Set are available before the Registration of cell phones Only Pair audio player and Set are available before the Registration of audio devices When no cell phone is registered 1st word Function Telephone connection Pair phone 1 Pronounce phone name and Confirm to confirm the operation 2 Pronounce Phone only or Internal audio and subsequently Confirm to confirm the operation Passkey setting Pronounce 4 t
86. pressed display is changed as follows Play time display Folder name display File name display Album name display MP3 only Track title display Artist name display NOTE NO TITLE is displayed when there is no information on the disc If all the text data cannot be displayed the gt mark appears at the right end Holding down the DISP button 6 for 1 sec or more calls the next page 5 29 Notes on MP3 WMA What is MP3 WMA MPEG1 2 Audio Layer lll WMA Windows Media Audio are the com pression formats of digital audio The former is developed by MPEG Motion Pic ture Experts Group and the latter is developed by Microsoft Corporation Using these compression formats you can record the contents of about 10 music CDs on a single CD media This figures refer to data recorded on a 650 MB CD R or CD RW at a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz Points to remember when making MP3 WMA files Common High bit rate and high sampling fre quency are recommended for high qual ity sounds Selecting VBR Variable Bit Rate is not recommended because playing time is not displayed properly and sound may be skipped The playback sound quality differs depending on the encoding circum stances For details refer to the user manual of your own encoding software and writing software OTHER CONTROLS AND E
87. pushing the lock release 3 Remove the cover 5 4 Replace the bulb 6 then perform the operations in 1 in the reverse order to restore the original state NOTE Make sure that the bulb is fitted correctly in the holder The right side cover is marked while the left side cover is marked 17 Trunk room light 57L71033 1 Open the trunk lid and remove the lens by turning it counterclockwise 2 Replace the bulb then perform the operations in 1 in the reverse order to restore the original state INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Wiper Blades 80G083 If the wiper blades become brittle or dam aged or make streaks when wiping replace the wiper blades To install new wiper blades follow the pro cedures below CAUTION To avoid scratching or breaking the window do not let the wiper arm strike the window while replacing the wiper blade NOTE Some wiper blades may be different from the ones described here depending on vehicle specifications If so consult your SUZUKI dealer for proper replacement method 7 54 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE For windshield wipers EXAMPLE 70G119 1 Hold the wiper arm away from the win dow NOTE When raising both of the front wiper arms pull the driver s side wiper arm up first When returning the wiper arms lower the passenger s side wiper arm first Other wise the wiper arms may interfer
88. reduced power or at full power accord ing to crash severity Whether the air bags should deploy at reduced power or at full power according to crash severity Whether the front passenger s front air bag should deploy or not based on clas sification of the occupant of the front passenger s seat Since your vehicle is equipped with front side air bags rear side air bags and side curtain air bags crash sensors will detect a side collision and if the controller judges that the side collision is severe enough it will trigger the front side air bag rear side air bags and side curtain air bag inflators The inflators inflate the appropriate air bags with nitrogen or argon gas The inflated air bags provide a cushion for your head front air bags and side curtain air bags only and upper body The air bag inflates and deflates so quickly that you may not even realize that it has activated The air bag will neither hinder your view nor make it harder to exit the vehicle 2 64 BEFORE DRIVING Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully in order to reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries However an unavoidable consequence of the quick inflation is that the air bag may irritate bare skin such as the facial area against a front air bag Also upon inflation a loud noise will occur and some powder and smoke will be released These conditions are not harmful and do not indicate a fire in the car Be aware however tha
89. scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Compact Spare Tire if equipped 54G115 1 Wear indicator 2 Indicator location mark Your vehicle comes equipped with the compact spare tire The compact spare is designed to save space in your storage area and its lighter weight makes it easier to install if a flat tire occurs It is only intended for tem porary emergency use until the con ventional tire can be repaired or replaced The inflation pressure of the compact spare tire should be checked at least monthly Use a quality pocket type inflation pressure gauge and set at 420 kPa 60 psi At the same time check that the tire is stored securely If it is not tighten it 7 34 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Snow Tires Note that two or more compact spare Your vehicle is equipped with all sea tires should not be used on one vehi WARNING cle simultaneously A WARNING The compact spare tire and wheel are intended for temporary emer gency use only Continuous use of this spare can result in tire fail ure and loss of control Always observe these precautions when using this spare Your vehicle will handle differ ently with this temporary spare Do not exceed 80 km h 50 mph speed Replace this spare with a stan dard tire and wheel as soon as possible Use of this spare will reduce ground clearance Recommended air pre
90. selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Speed Dial and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a number to be registered and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 5 Press one of the Preset buttons 3 to which the selected number is regis tered If a number is already registered to the selected button a confirmation mes sage is displayed Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu Deletion of speed dial Del Spd Dial The numbers registered to the speed dial is deleted 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone book and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Del Spd Dial and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Press one of the Preset buttons 3 to which the selected number is regis tered 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu Secur
91. system maintains the selected temperature 5 4 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Air intake selector 5 57L51005 Push the air intake selector 5 to change between the following modes If the AUTO switch 9 is pushed the air intake will vary automatically as the climate control system maintains the selected tem perature RECIRCULATED AIR a When this mode is selected outside air is shut off and inside air is recirculated This mode is suitable when driving through an area with polluted air such as a tunnel or when attempting to quickly cool down the vehicle 5 5 FRESH AIR b When this mode is selected outside air is introduced FRESH AIR and RECIRCULATED AIR are selected alternately each time the air intake selector is pushed NOTE If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an extended period of time the air in the vehi cle can become contaminated Therefore you should occasionally select FRESH AIR MODE switch 6 A MODE 0 ed 6 Ti v f 57L51006 Push the MODE switch 6 to change among the following functions The indica tion of the selected mode appears on the display If the AUTO switch 9 is pushed the air flow will vary automatically as the climate control system maintains the selected tem perature Ventilation c 57L51007 Temperature controlled air comes out of
92. the FUSE 5 BROWN 7 5 IG2 SIG IG2 SIG E BOX 6 BLUE 15 IG COIL Ignition coil seat side 7 BLUE 15 ACC2 Accessory 2 8 BLUE 15 ACC Accessory 9 RED 10 ABS ESP ESP control module 10 BROWN 7 5 CRUISE Cruise control FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS USE THE DESIGNATED 1 FUSES ONLY VIVE iH E iH ls E g l iH aa Z 57L70034 COLORISIZE AMPS FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT BROWN 7 5 IG1 SIG IG1 SIG BROWN 7 5 BPIM Blank BROWN 7 5 MTR Meter RED 10 BACK Back up light Under the FUSE RED 10 AB Air bag nat BOX BLUE 15 STL Steering lock seat side BROWN 7 5 BCM BCM YELLOW 20 S R Sunroof BROWN 7 5 RR FOG Blank RED 10 TAIL Tail light 11 7 FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS MA Teele 57L70034 COLOR SIZE AMPS FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT 21 RED 10 STOP Brake light 22 RED 10 HAZ Hazard Under the FUSE 23 YELLOW 20 DOOR FL Front power window Left BOX 24 BLUE 15 RADIO Radio seat side 25 RED 10 DOME Dome light 26 YELLOW 20 D L Door lock FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS ici 57L70016 COLOR SIZE AMPS FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT 1 YELLOW 20 DOOR RR Rear power window Right 2 YELLOW 20 DOOR RL Rear power window Left 3
93. the tire pres sure monitoring system Refer to Tires in the INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE section for information on maintaining proper tire pressure BEFORE DRIVING Brake System Warning Light BRAKE This light comes on briefly when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON The light also comes on under the following conditions 1 when the parking brake is engaged and 2 when the fluid in the brake fluid reservoir falls below the specified level The light should go out after fully releasing the parking brake if the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir is adequate If this light and the ABS warning light stay on or come on simultaneously when driv ing then there may be something wrong with both the rear brake proportioning valve function and anti lock function of the ABS If the brake system warning light comes on while you are driving the vehicle it may mean that there is something wrong with the vehicle s brake system If this happens you should 2 70 BEFORE DRIVING 1 Pull off the road and stop carefully A WARNING Remember that stopping distance may be longer you may have to push harder on the pedal and the pedal may go down farther than normal 2 Test the brakes by carefully starting and stopping on the shoulder of the road 3 If you determine that it is safe drive cautiously at low speed to the nearest dealer for repairs or 4 Have the v
94. to ON by pressing the engine switch and the vehicle is stationary you can enter the setting mode of the information display by pulling and holding the DISP switch 2 for more than 3 seconds To select the setting that you want to change pull the TRIP switch 3 To change the setting pull the DISP switch 2 To exit the setting mode select Back and pull the DISP switch 2 Distance unit Fuel economy Language Fuel reset 57L21085 NOTE Current settings appear with reversed text and background colors 2 85 NOTE If you pull and hold the DISP switch 2 to enter the setting mode when the dis play B shows average fuel consump tion or average speed the value will be reset simultaneously If you do not want to reset the value pull the DISP switch quickly to switch the indication of the dis play If you press the engine switch or start to move the vehicle when the display is in the setting mode the setting mode will be canceled automatically Distance units You can change the units odo trip meter distance is displayed in NOTE When you change the units odo trip meter distance is displayed in the trip meter will be reset automatically Fuel economy units You can change the units that fuel con sumption is displayed in Language You can change the language of the infor mation display Avg fuel economy reset You can change when the value of aver
95. very close to the trunk with a soft cloth in the slot of the remote 4 Make sure the door locks can be oper controller and pry it open ated with the remote controller 5 Dispose of the used battery properly according to applicable rules or regula tions Do not dispose of lithium batter ies with ordinary household trash 2 13 A WARNING Swallowing a lithium battery may cause serious internal injury Do not allow anyone to swallow a lithium battery Keep lithium batteries away from children and pets If swallowed contact a physician immediately CAUTION The remote controller is a sensitive electronic instrument To avoid dam aging it do not expose it to dust or moisture or tamper with internal parts 1 For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 2 For Canada This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence including interference that may cause und
96. warranty or service of your vehicle please take the following action Consult the Service Manager and the Owner of the Suzuki Automotive Dealer ship Explain your problem and ask for their assistance in resolving your problem The Owner of the dealership is in the very best position to assist you as he or she is vitally concerned with your continued satis faction If after doing so you still require further assistance and you purchased your SUZUKI in the continental United States please contact the American Suzuki Cus tomer Relations Department by telephone at 1 800 934 0934 or in writing at American Suzuki Motor Corporation Automotive Customer Relations 3251 East Imperial Highway Brea CA 92821 6795 If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canada please contact the Suzuki Canada Cus tomer Relations Department by telephone at 1 905 889 2677 extension 2254 or in writing at Suzuki Canada Inc Customer Relations 100 East Beaver Creek Road Richmond Hill On L4B 1J6 In the event you require assistance related to your SUZUKI while temporarily travel ling in either the United States or Canada you may wish to contact the Suzuki Cus tomer Relations Department directly of the country in which you are temporarily oper ating your vehicle Please be certain to provide us with the fol lowing information the model Vehicle Identification Number mileage accesso ries involved event dates your concern and any other comm
97. with your vehicle s ignition sys tem resulting in vehicle performance problems Consult your SUZUKI dealer or qualified service technician for advice on installing such mobile communication equipment LEAK DETECTION PUMP NOTE Your vehicle has a pump to regularly check the vehicle s evaporative emission control system for leaks This check is performed approximately five hours after the engine is turned off During this leak check you may hear a sound coming from the vehicle for several minutes This sound is normal and does not indicate a malfunction INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing SUZUKI and welcome to our growing family Your choice was a wise one SUZUKI products are a great value that will give you years of driving pleasure This Owner s Manual was prepared to help you have a safe enjoyable and trouble free experience with your SUZUKI In it you will learn about the vehicle s operation its safety features and maintenance requirements Please read it carefully before operating your vehicle Afterwards keep this Manual in the glove box for future reference Should you resell the vehicle please leave this Manual with it for the next owner In addition to the Owner s Manual the other booklets provided with your SUZUKI explain the vehicle s warranties We recommend you read them as well to familiarize yourself with this important information When planning the regular scheduled maintenance of your SUZUKI
98. 0 C 176 F on plastic parts To avoid damaging engine compo nents do not use pressurized water in the engine compartment Rinse the body to loosen the dirt Remove dirt and mud from the body exterior with running water You may use a soft sponge or brush Do not use hard materials which can scratch the paint or plastic Remember that the headlight covers or lenses are made of plastic in many cases CAUTION To avoid damage to the paint or plas tic surface do not wipe the dirt off without ample water Be sure to fol low above procedure CAUTION When using a commercial car wash product observe the cautions speci fied by the manufacturer Never use strong household detergents soaps 4 Once the dirt has been completely removed rinse off the detergent with running water 5 After rinsing wipe off the vehicle body with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it to dry in the shade 6 Check carefully for damage to painted surfaces If there is any damage touch up the damage following the piu below Clean all damaged spots and allow them to dry 2 Stir the paint and touch up the damaged spots lightly using a small brush 3 Allow the paint to dry completely When washing the vehicle instructions below 1 Flush the underside of body and wheel housings with pressurized water to remove mud and debris Use plenty of water CAUTION If you use an automatic car wash make sure tha
99. 013 You can let the climate control system work automatically To set the system for fully auto matic operation follow the procedure below 1 Start the engine 2 Push the AUTO switch 9 3 Set the desired temperature by turning the driver s temperature selector 1 The blower speed air intake and air flow are controlled automatically to maintain the set temperature If the individual control mode is selected with the DUAL switch 3 the driver and passenger can make different temperature adjustments from their own temperature selectors The individual control mode is also selected automatically when the pas senger s temperature selector 2 is turned To turn the climate control system off push the OFF switch 10 NOTE If the AUTO on the display blinks there is a problem in the heating system and or air conditioning system You should have the system inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer NOTE To find the temperature at which you are most comfortable start with the 72 F 25 C setting for example e If you turn the temperature selector 1 until HI or LO appears on the display the climate control system will operate at the maximum heating or cooling and the blower will run at full speed To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather or hot air in hot weather the system will delay turning on the blower until warmed or chilled air is available e If your vehicle ha
100. 1 Secure the child restraint on the rear seat using the procedure described above for securing a restraint system that does not require a top strap 2 Open the cover that is marked with the securely latched in a fairly upright h ket I t t position when any type er child seat Bacher ait is installed An unlatched or reclined not using the anchor bracket seatback will reduce the intended 3 Hook the top strap to the anchor effectiveness of the child restraint system bracket and tighten the top strap according to the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac turer Be sure to attach the top strap to the corresponding anchor located 2 52 BEFORE DRIVING directly behind the child restraint Do not attach the top strap to the luggage restraint loops if equipped 4 When routing the top strap be sure to pass the top strap as shown in the illus tration Refer to Adjustable Head Restraints section for details on how to raise or lower the head restraint 5 Make sure that cargo does not interfere with routing of the top strap A WARNING Do not attach the child restraint top strap to the luggage restraint loops if equipped Incorrectly attached top strap will reduce the intended effec tiveness of the child restraint system Type 1 gt 57121049 2 53 Seat Belt Extender 65D613 1 Center of body 2 Less than 152 mm 6
101. 10 7 27 Parking Sensors rennen tni 3 23 H 3 11 Periodic Maintenance Schedule 7 3 Power Door Locking System 2 4 Power Mirror Control cerent 2 22 Power Window Controls 2 17 Power Assisted Brakes 3 28 R Radio Antenna 5 9 Rain sensing Wipers 2 108 Rain sensing Wipers and Washer Lever 2 107 Rear Center Seat Belt eene 2 38 Hear eere d nee 2 29 Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks 7 18 tete ied 7 16 Replace the Oil Filter eere 7 17 Replacing Tires and or Wheels 3 38 Reporting Safety Defects 10 4 13 4 Roof Rack 5 92 S Safety Certification Label 10 2 Seat Belt Extender eere 2 53 Seat Belt Inspection eene 2 43 Seat Belt Pretensioner System
102. 15 Canister air suction filter Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 180 months 1 Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC Super Blue follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC Standard Green 7 3 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE R Replace or change 1 Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary Interval This interval should be judged by miles x 1000 82 5 90 97 5 105 112 5 120 127 5 135 142 5 150 odometer reading or months whichever comes km x 1000 137 5 150 162 5 175 187 5 200 212 5 225 237 5 250 first months 82 5 90 97 5 105 112 5 120 127 5 135 142 5 150 ENGINE amp EMISSION CONTROL 1 Drive belt Inspect for damage 2 Valve lash clearance 3 Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R R R R 4 Cooling system hoses and connections 5 Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC Standard Green R R R SUZUKI LLC Super Blue 1 First time only Replace at 150000 km 90000 miles or 90 months Second time and after Replace every 75000 km 45000 miles or 45 months 6 Exhaust pipes and mountings l 7 EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 180 months 8 Emission r
103. 2 1 57L31007 1 To set 2 To release 3 To release The parking brake lever is located between the seats To set the parking brake hold the brake pedal down and pull the parking brake lever all the way up To release the parking brake hold the brake pedal down pull up slightly on the parking brake lever push the button on the end of the lever with your thumb and lower the lever to its origi nal position OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE For CVT vehicles always set the parking brake before moving the gearshift lever to the P Park position If you park on an incline and shift into P before you set the parking brake the weight of the vehicle may make it difficult to shift out of P when you are ready to drive the vehicle When preparing to drive the vehicle move the gearshift lever out of the P position before releasing the parking brake A WARNING Never drive your vehicle with the parking brake set rear brake effec tiveness can be reduced from over heating brake life may shortened or permanent brake damage may result If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle securely or does not fully release have your vehicle inspected immediately by an autho rized SUZUKI dealer 3 10 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE A WARNING Always set the parking brake fully before leaving your vehicle or it may roll causing injury or damage When parking make sure the gearshift lever
104. 46 BEFORE DRIVING A ELR type belt A ELR type belt A ELR type belt EXAMPLE NN 83E035 EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 2 Pull all of the remaining webbing out of the retractor You will hear a click which means that the emergency locking retractor ELR has converted to func tion as an automatic locking retractor ALR 2 47 83E032 3 Allow the extra webbing to retract and pull the webbing toward the retractor to take up any slack Make sure that the lap portion of the belt is tight around the child restraint system and the shoulder portion of the belt is positioned so that it cannot interfere with the child s head or neck 83E036 4 Make sure that the retractor has con verted to the ALR mode by trying to pull webbing out of the retractor If the retractor is in the ALR mode the belt will be locked A WARNING If the retractor is not in the ALR mode the child restraint system can move or tip over when your vehicle turns or stops abruptly BEFORE DRIVING A ELR type belt To revert from ALR to ELR EXAMPLE EXAMPLE A WARNING Before installing a child restraint in the rear center seat follow these steps for secure installation Make sure the detachable connec tor is securely latched and the web bing is not twisted Make sure the seat belt is passed through the seat belt guide 65D234 65D267 When you unbuckle the seat belt
105. 49 If the driver s seat belt is unbuckled when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON this light will come on and then blink When the light comes on a buzzer will also sound intermittently for about 6 seconds The reminder will repeat several times under certain condi tions until the driver s seat belt is buckled After repeating several times the reminder will be canceled even if the drivers seat belt remains unbuckled For details about the seat belt reminder refer to Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems in this section A WARNING It is absolutely essential that the driver and passengers wear their seat belts at all times Persons who are not wearing seat belts have a much greater risk of injury if an accident occurs Make a regular habit of buck ling your seat belt before starting the engine Y This light monitors inflators crash sensors seat belt pretensioners the front passen ger sensing system and corresponding electrical circuits This light blinks or comes on for several seconds when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON so you can check if the light is working The light will come on and stay on if there is a problem in the air bag system or the seat belt pretensioner system A WARNING If the AIR BAG light does not blink or come on when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to or stays on or comes on w
106. ANDOM The random indicator D RDM lights The albums in the iPod that are played at random NOTE To cancel repeat play press the RPT but ton 5 again SONG REPEAT The repeat indicator RPT lights The track currently being played is played repeatedly 5 36 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display change Press the DISP button 7 Each time it is pressed display is changed as follows Playlist name amp Track title display lt Playlist mode only Y Artist name amp Track title display Y Album name amp Track title display Y Track title amp Play time display NOTE If all the text data cannot be displayed the mark appears at the right end Holding down the DISP button 7 for 1 sec or more calls the next page 5 37 Playing Mode selection 1 Press and hold the USB button 1 for 1 second or longer 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 Each time it is turned mode is changed as follows PLAYLIST lt _ ARTIST ALBUM SONGS GENRE 3 Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select an item NOTE When the USB button 1 is pressed the previous screen appears e When the DISP button 7 is pressed the regular screen appears e NO SONGS will appear if no song exists Notes on iPod Controllable iPod software version iPod touch iPod classic iPod nano 4th generation iPod
107. ATING YOUR VEHICLE as an ordinary ABS with no additional ESP functions 3 32 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE ESP OFF Indicator Light ee You should turn the ESP on during your ordinary driving so that you have the ben efits of all of the ESP systems It may be required to turn the ESP sys tems other than ABS off if your vehicle is stuck in sand mud or snow where wheel spin is necessary 3 33 ESP OFF switch 57L31022 When the ESP OFF switch 1 located at the center console i is pushed and held to turn off the ESP systems other than ABS the ESP OFF indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on When you have turned the ESP systems other than ABS off make sure to turn them back on before resuming ordinary driving When you push the ESP OFF switch again the ESP OFF indicator light will go out and all of the ESP systems will be activated SERVICE ESP SYSTEM 57L31024 If the message shown in the above illustra tion appears on the information display there may be a problem with the ESP system Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer NOTE The ESP system will not activate while this message is displayed ABS Warning Light Brake System Warning Light See Braking in the OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section Hill Hold Control System if equipped The hill hold contro
108. AUTO position operation of the rain sensing wiper function can be customized to your preference by reprogramming its setting as follows Please contact an authorized SUZUKI dealer for this customi zation Rain sensing Semi automatic wiping The system automatically selects the most appropriate of the following wiping modes intermittent wiping low speed wiping or high speed wiping The wipers do not stop automatically Intermittent wiping The wipers operate only in the intermittent wiping mode The wiping interval can be changed with the ring control 3 Full automatic wiping factory setting The system automatically selects the most appropriate of the following wiping modes no wiping intermittent wiping low speed wiping and high speed wiping Windshield Washer EXAMPLE 57L21073 To spray windshield washer fluid pull the lever toward you The windshield wipers will automatically turn on at low speed A WARNING To prevent windshield icing in cold weather turn on the defroster to heat the windshield before and dur ing windshield washer use Do not use radiator antifreeze in the windshield washer reservoir It can severely impair visibility when sprayed on the windshield and can also damage your vehicle s paint CAUTION To help prevent damage to the wind shield wiper and washer system components you should take the fol lowing precautions Do not continue to hold in th
109. CJ932C5ZZZ035 IC ID 216J C5ZZZ038 MADE IN JAPAN This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS Gen of IC Rules Opera tion is subject to the following two condi tions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of this device FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 5 15 NOTE This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interfer ence to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interfer ence to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equip ment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Heorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This trans mitter must not be co located or oper ated in conjunction with any other
110. D EQUIPMENT 1st word 2nd word Function Phonebook change name Changing the tag name of the number assigned to tag name 2 tag name Phonebook delete entry Deleting the number of tag name from Phonebook 2 Phonebook list names Press the Talk button Dialing the number of the telephone that is read at that moment Registering the number in Phonebook on the speed dialing list 1 Pronounce tag name and Confirm to confirm the operation 2 Hold down one of the preset buttons 1 to 6 for 2 sec or more and pro nounce Confirm to confirm the operation Phonebook set speed dial Press one of the H preset buttons 1 to 6 Deleting the speed dial registered on the corresponding preset button Phonebook delete speed dial 1 When List phones is pronounced telephone names are read in sequence When the corresponding telephone is read press the Talk button 2 Subsequently pronounce Confirm to implement the operation 8 When List names is pronounced tag names are read in sequence When the corresponding tag name is read press the Talk button 5 59 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1st word 2nd word Function wt Phonebook is locked To implement Phonebook locking pronounce the PIN number and Phonebook lock tei subsequently Confirm to implement the locking Phonebook un
111. EM HIGH TEMP AWD IS OFF 57121123 Blinks Ping one time from interior There may be a problem with the TV buzzer system A Have your vehicle inspected by an autho SERVICE PTT rized SUZUKI dealer SYSTEM 57L31024 2 96 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Message Master Warning Indicator Sound Cause and Remedy Blinks Ping one time from interior There may be a problem with the hill hold buzzer control system A Have your vehicle inspected by an autho rized SUZUKI dealer HILL HOLD DISABLE 57L31023 Blinks Ping one time from interior One of the tires is insufficiently inflated buzzer Inflate it correctly 7 1 LOW TIRE PRESSURE Miles 57L31025 2 97 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Master Warning Message Indicator Sound Cause and Remedy Blinks Ping one time from interior buzzer There may be a problem with the TPMS T system A Have your vehicle inspected by an autho DS rized SUZUKI dealer SERVICE 57L31026 Blinks Ping one time from interior Wheel ID codes are not registered in the TF buzzer TPMS system A Have your vehicle inspected by an autho eA rized SUZUKI dealer TPMS ID Tu NOT REGISTERED 57L31027 2 98 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Master Warning Message Indicator Sound Cause and Remedy Blinks Ping
112. Go Back displays the previ ous menu 5 51 Selecting the bluetooth audio mode Press the CD button 1 Each time the button is pressed the source is switched as follows Display change Press the DISP button 5 Each time it is pressed display is changed as follows CD gt Bluetooth audio Selecting a group only for supported models Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select a group Selecting a track Press the Up button 3 to listen to the next track Press the Down button 4 twice to listen to the previous track When the Down button 4 is pressed once the track currently being played will start again at the beginning Fast forwarding Rewinding a track Hold in the Up button 3 to advance a track rapidly Hold in the Down button 4 to rewind a track Play time display Y Track name display Y Artist name display Y Album name display NOTE If all the text data cannot be displayed the gt mark appears at the right end Holding down the DISP button 5 for 1 sec or more calls the next page Selection of audio device Select Audio The audio device to be used can be selected 1 Press the Off Hook button 6 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE F
113. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and the total load capacity the seating capacity and the cargo load capacity The GVWR and GAWR front and rear are listed on the Safety Certification Label which is located below the driver s side door latch striker The total load capacity and seating capacity are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label which is located below the Safety Cer tification Label The cargo load capac ity can be determined as described below Cargo Load Capacity Maximum weight of cargo and luggage that the vehicle can safely carry Cargo load capacity is the difference between the total load capacity of the vehicle and the total combined weight of all vehicle occupants Refer to Steps for Deter mining Correct Load Limit for details on how to determine cargo load capacity 7 37 GVWR Maximum permissible overall weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all the occupants accesso ries and cargo plus the trailer tongue weight if towing a trailer GAWR Front and Rear Maximum permissible weight on an individual axle Seating Capacity Maximum number of occupants the vehicle is designed to carry NOTE Even though the number of occupants is within the seating capacity you still must make sure that you do not exceed the total load capacity of the vehicle Total Load Capacity Maximum per missible weight a vehicle can carr
114. H SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Set Pass key and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a number for ones digit and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Determine the tens hundreds and thousands digits in the same manner NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu Deletion of telephone data Delete Phone The registered information of phone is deleted 1 2 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Delete Phone and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a phone to be deleted and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selec tion Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previous menu OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
115. ING Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash Only use an extender for the per son vehicle and seating position it was provided for Do not use if open end of extender s buckle is within 152 mm 6 inches of center of occupant s body See diagram Remove and stow the extender when it is not being used Seat Belt Pretensioner System for front seat belt only EXAMPLE 57L21125 BEFORE DRIVING A WARNING This section of the owner s manual describes your SUZUKI s SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER SYSTEM Please read and follow ALL these instruc tions carefully to minimize your risk of severe injury or death Your vehicle is equipped with a seat belt pretensioner system at the front seating positions You can use the pretensioner seat belts in the same manner as ordinary seat belts The seat belt pretensioner system works with the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM advanced air bags The crash sensors and the electronic controller of the air bag system also control the seat belt pretensioners The pretensioners are trig gered only when there is a frontal or side crash severe enough to trigger the air bags and the seat belts are fastened If the seat belts are not fastened the respective pre tensioner system will not be activated For precautions general information including servicing the pretensioner sys tem refer to the Supplemental Restrain
116. Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary Interval This interval should be judged by miles x 1000 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 odometer reading or months whichever km x 1000 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 comes first months 42 45 48 51 54 57 6 63 66 69 7 75 ENGINE amp EMISSION CONTROL 1 Drive belt Inspect for damage 2 Valve lash clearance m m E 3 Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R 4 Cooling system hoses and connections E l 2 5 Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC Standard Green R SUZUKI LLC Super Blue 1 First time only Replace at 150000 km 90000 miles or 90 months Second time and after Replace every 75000 km 45000 miles or 45 months 6 Exhaust pipes and mountings B l a 7 EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 180 months 8 Emission related hoses amp tubes ES ES EN 9 Spark plugs R 10 Ignition coil plug cap l z m 11 Fuel tank amp cap s es e RE 12 Air cleaner filter element paved road l R l 1 13 Fuel filter Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 150 months 14 Fuel lines and connections EN 15 Canister air suction filter Em a R 1 Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the dai
117. OLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select BT A Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Select Audio and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select an audio device to be paired and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 6 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 7 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select From Car or From Audio and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection From Car Makes a pairing from the unit From Audio Makes a pairing from the audio device 8 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection NOTE e Selection of Go Back displays the pre vious menu The phone will be disconnected when the Bluetooth ready audio device is selected Change of audio device name Change Name The registered name of audio devices are changed 1 Press the Off Hook button 6 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determ
118. On L4B 1J6 GENERAL INFORMATION 10 4 GENERAL INFORMATION FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS ole s o o eo wl S e Y 8 57L71037 COLOR SIZE AMPS FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT 1 RED 50 IGN Ignition switch 2 PINK 30 RDTR2 Radiator fan sub 3 PINK 30 RDTR Radiator fan main FUSE 4 PINK 30 ST Starting motor Sni BOX 5 GREEN 40 BTRY Light 6 GREEN 40 ABS MOT ESP control module 7 RED 50 IGN2 Keyless start control module 8 RED 50 BTRY2 Power window Power seat FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS 28 34 10 36 24 31 If 25 14 19 26 o o s olo s o w S 57L71037 COLOR SIZE AMPS FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT 9 RED 50 BLW Blower fan 10 RED 10 A C Air conditioning compressor 11 BLUE 15 MRR HTR Door mirror heater MAIN 12 BLUE 15 THR MOT Throttle motor In engine FUSE 13 GREEN 30 RR DEF Rear defogger compartment eer 14
119. PMS Malfunction Indicator A WARNING Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not oper ating properly A WARNING The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists The TPMS malfunction indicator is not reset even after the engine is turned off it remains in the on state until the normal conditions are restored A WARNING When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pres sure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replace ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The tire pressure sensors can be damaged by the installation or removal of tires When tires must be repaired or replaced we highly recommend that you have them repaired or replaced by an autho rized SUZUKI dealer Do not use liquid se
120. QUIPMENT MP3 t is recommended to set the bit rate to 128 kbps or more and fixed WMA t is recommended to set the bit rate to 64 kbps or more and fixed Do not set the copy protect attribute on the WMA file to enable this unit to play back NOTE Never assign the mp3 or wma file name extension to a file that is not in the MP3 WMA format This may not only pro duce noise from the speaker damage but also damage your hearing Recording MP3 WMA files on a CD media You are recommended to minimize the chances of making a disc that contains both CD DA files and MP3 WMA files f CD DA files are on the same disc as MP3 or WMA files the songs may not play in the intended order or some songs may not play at all When storing MP3 data and WMA data on the same disc use different folders for each data Do not record files other than MP3 WMA files and unnecessary folder on a disc The name of an MP3 WMA file should be added by rules as shown in the fol lowing descriptions and also comply with the rules of each file system The file extension mp3 or wma should be assigned to each file depend ing on the file format You may encounter trouble in playing MP3 WMA files or displaying the infor mation of MP3 WMA files recorded with certain writing software or CD record ers This unit does not have a play list func tion Although Multi session recording is sup ported th
121. RE DRIVING 2 86 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and indicator messages Warning and Indicator Master Warning 57L30073 Message indicator Sound Cause and Remedy Blinks Ping one time from interior A door or the engine hood is not properly only while vehicle buzzer only while vehicle is closed Stop in a safe place and close the is in motion in motion door or engine hood properly 1 ALL NOTE After disconnecting and reconnecting the FUN battery cable the display image may show that the passenger door is open even though it is the driver s door that is open The display will show the correct image when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION 57L21087 Off Off This message is displayed when the ACC position is selected as the power supply position 1 1 This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected 2 87 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Master Warning Message Indicator Sound Cause and Remedy Off Off The brake pedal is depressed Press the engine switch to start the engine PUSH START SVVITC 57L21088 CVT Off Off PRESS BRAKE SHIFT TO P TO START 57L21089 The engine switch is pressed with the gear shift lever in a position other than P or N and or without depressing the brake
122. Remove the bolt and 4 Pull the ignition coil out 7 21 CAUTION e When servicing the _iridium plati num spark plugs slender center electrode type plugs do not touch the center electrode as it is easy to damage When installing the spark plugs screw them in with your fingers to avoid stripping the threads Tighten with a torque wrench to 25 Nm 2 5 kg m 18 0 Ib ft Do not allow con taminants to enter the engine through the spark plug holes when the plugs are removed Never use spark plugs with the wrong thread size CAUTION When replacing spark plugs you should use the brand and type speci fied for your vehicle For the speci fied plugs refer to the SPECIFICATIONS section at the end of this book If you wish to use a brand of spark plug other than the specified plugs consult your SUZUKI dealer 1 0 1 1 mm 0 039 0 043 in N 80G093 Gear Oil Specified Gear Oil When replacing gear oil use gear oil with the appropriate viscosity and grade as shown in the charts below We highly recommend you use SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 for manual transaxle gear oil Manual transaxle API GL 4 lt 75W 80 75W 85 75W 90 gt 30 20 10 10 20 30 40 22 4 14 32 50 68 86 104 57L71007 We highly recommend you use API GL 5 hypoid gear oil SAE 80W 90 for rear differential oil i AWD and transfer oil of CVT model i AWD Rear d
123. Switch if equipped P 3 21 Audio P 5 10 Heating and Air Conditioning System 5 1 Fuse Box P 7 40 Information display switches P 2 80 Parking Brake Lever P 3 10 Center Console Box P 5 89 Accessory Socket P 5 80 Glove Box P 5 85 NS Bil wo A E N 57L1F005 ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 Front Fog Light Switch if equipped P 2 105 Lighting Control Lever P 2 100 1 Turn Signal Control Lever P 2 105 Shift Paddles if equipped P 3 17 Instrument Cluster P 2 68 Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever P 2 107 Front Seat Heater Switch if equipped P 2 28 Hazard Warning Switch P 2 106 ESP OFF Switch P 3 33 Parking Sensor Switch if equipped P 3 26 10 2WD i AWD intelligent All Wheel Drive Switch if equipped P 3 19 11 Trunk lid unlatch switch P 2 5 12 Engine Hood Release Handle P 5 75 13 Tilt Telescoping Steering Lock Lever P 2 110 14 Engine Switch P 3 2 15 Universal Serial Bus USB Socket P 5 81 8 9 16 Accessory Socket P 5 80 Cigarette Lighter if equipped 5 81 17 Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors Switch if equipped P 2 111 A 6 ON
124. UKI t 32 pressor relay To remove a fuse use the fuse puller pro vided in the fuse box The amperage of 33 Rear defogger relay each fuse is shown in the back of the fuse box cover 34 Blank Windshield wiper relay 35 2 36 Blank Windshield wiper relay 37 38 Starting motor relay 60A243 A WARNING If the main fuse or a primary fuse blows be sure to have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer Always use a genuine SUZUKI replacement Never use a substitute such as a wire even for a temporary fix or extensive electrical damage and a fire can result NOTE Make sure that the fuse box always carries spare fuses INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Fuses under the Dash Board 3 Clips 11 7 5A IG1 SIG Drivers side 12 75 Blank USE THE DESIGNATED 1 EXAMPLE FUSES ONLY 13 7 5 Meter 14 10A Back up light 15 10A Airbag 16 15A Steering lock 17 7 54 BCM 18 20A Sunroof Has 19 7 5A Blank 20 10A Tail light 57071012 NO AMPS FUSE NAME 1 Driver s side fuse box 1 30A ind 21 ee 1 ower window 22 10 Hazard Windshield washer 2 15A metor 23 20A Len power window 3 20 Seat heater 24 15A Radio 4 25A Windshield wiper motor 25
125. XTERIOR k 12 13 14 Oom o0 ociom High mount Stop Light P 12 3 Rear Combination Light P 7 53 Radio Antenna P 5 9 Engine Hood P 5 75 Headlight P 2 100 P 7 46 Windshield Wiper P 2 107 Outside Rearview Mirror P 2 22 Fuel Filler Cap P 5 74 License Plate Light P 7 53 Trunk Lid P 2 5 Front Fog Light if equipped P 2 105 P 7 50 Side Marker Light P 7 51 Side Turn Signal Light P 7 50 Door Locks P 2 3 10 PN 57L1F003 INTERIOR Seat Belts 2 34 Side Curtain Air Bags P 2 59 Assist Grip P 5 82 Interior Light P 5 78 P 7 45 Sun Visor P 5 77 Spot Light P 5 80 P 7 46 Sunroof switch if equipped P 5 83 Overhead Console P 5 86 Inside Rearview Mirror if equipped P 2 20 Armrest P 5 90 Cup Holder P 5 87 Rear Side Air Bags P 2 59 Rear Seat P 2 29 Front Side Air Bags P 2 59 Cup Holder P 5 87 Front Seats P 2 23 Gearshift Lever P 3 13 ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 4 6 7 8 9 57L1F004 ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 NO oR WP Power Window Controls P 2 17 Lock switch P 2 18 Power Mirror Control P 2 22 Remote Audio Controls P 5 64 Front Air Bags P 2 57 Cruise Control
126. a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tempera ture can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corre sponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of per formance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law A WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not over loaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading either separately or in combina tion can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Tire Rotation 54G114 To avoid uneven wear of your tires and to prolong their life rotate the tires as illustrated Tires should be rotated as recommended in the periodic mainte nance schedule After rotation adjust front and rear tire pressures to the specification listed on your vehicle s Tire and Loading Information Label A WARNING Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a_ wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a
127. ace with the head restraint removed or in the stowed position When there is a passenger in the central seating place pull up the head restraint by hand and make sure it is securely locked before starting to drive 57L30060 When there is no occupant in the central seating place push down the head restraint fully while holding the release knob 1 pressed When the head restraints must be removed use the following methods Pull the head restraint up and out of the seat while holding the release knob pressed A WARNING Do not leave the removed head restraints unfixed in the cabin They may hit against you and passengers in the event of hard braking or other similar instances increasing the risk of an accident To reinstall the head restraints do the fol lowing With the correct side facing forward insert the head restraint into the seat until it is locked at a height Then adjust the height as desired A WARNING Always check that the head restraint is firmly in position after installing it Avoid installing it with the backside facing forward A wrongly facing head restraint does not provide the intended protection and also its height cannot be adjusted Folding Rear Seats The rear seats of your vehicle can be folded forward to provide additional cargo space To fold the rear seats forward 57L30037 1 Stow the seatbelt for the rear center seat in the retra
128. age fuel consumption is reset Temperature units You can change the units that temperature is displayed in NOTE When you change the units that tempera ture is displayed in the air conditioning system temperature display units will be changed automatically Foot lights The foot lights can be programmed for interlocked operation with either lighting control or door operation and for no light ing Default setting If you select YES and pull the DISP switch 2 all settings will be reinitialized Warning and Indicator Messages The display shows warning and indicator messages to let you know about certain vehicle problems A tone may also sound to alert you If warning and indicator messages appear on the display follow the messages Master warning indicator 78K049 When the display shows warning and indi cator messages the master warning indi cator may also come on or blink NOTE e When the problem that causes a mes sage to appear is corrected the mes sage will disappear If a message is displayed and other problems requiring a message occur the message for each of the problems will be alternately displayed about every 5 sec onds e When you pull and hold the DISP switch 2 for about 2 seconds while a message is displayed the message will disappear temporarily If the problem that caused the message is not corrected the mes sage will appear again after 5 seconds BEFO
129. age during this time Refer to Information Display in the Before Driving section for details You may customize the system to cause the interior buzzer to sound once for the remote controller out of sensing range warning Please contact an authorized SUZUKI dealer for the customization If the battery of the remote controller is about to be completely discharged a message warning this will appear on the information display when the ignition mode is changed to ON by pressing 3 9 the engine switch For details on replac ing the battery refer to the Keyless Start System Remote Controller section in the Before Driving chapter Returning the ignition mode to LOCK OFF CVT To ensure safety the ignition mode can be returned to LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch only when the gearshift lever is placed in the P position NOTE Messages may appear on the informa tion display in the instrument cluster when you attempt to return the ignition mode to LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch Refer to Information dis play in the Before Driving section for details e In the case of a CVT model the engine cannot be returned to the LOCK OFF position if the gearshift lever is in any other position than P Certain problems like a fault in engine system may prevent the engine switch from going back to the LOCK OFF mode If this happens have the vehicle
130. ain the system and its operation to the person or disable the system before hand Mistakenly triggering the alarm may cause a nuisance to others Even if the theft deterrent alarm system is armed you should still be careful to guard against theft Do not leave money or things of value in your vehicle 2 15 How to arm the theft deterrent alarm system when enabled Lock the doors using the keyless start sys tem remote controller or by pushing the request switch The theft deterrent light 1 will start flashing and the theft deterrent alarm system will be armed in about 20 seconds While the system is being armed the indi cator continues to flash at approximately 2 second intervals 222 A 4 57130094 To prevent the alarm from being acciden tally triggered avoid arming it while any one remains inside the vehicle The alarm will be triggered if any person inside unlocks a door by operating the lock lever or power door locking switch The theft deterrent alarm system is not armed when all doors are locked using the key from outside or using the door lock levers or the power door locking switch from inside f the timer locking function is activated the system will be automatically armed at the preset time unless the theft deter rent alarm system has been disabled How to disarm the theft deterrent alarm system Simply unlock the doors using the keyless start sy
131. al brake system skid ding tires are able to plow the gravel or snow layer shortening the stopping distance ABS mini mizes this resistance effect Allow for extra stopping distance when driving on loose surfaces On regular paved roads some driv ers may be able to obtain slightly shorter stopping distances with conventional brake systems than with ABS In both of the above conditions ABS will still offer the advantage of helping you maintain directional control However remember that ABS will not compensate for bad road or weather conditions or poor driver judgment Use good judg ment and do not drive faster than conditions will safely allow 1 2 1 ABS warning light 2 Brake system warning light 650451 A WARNING If the ABS warning light 1 on the instrument panel comes on and stays on while driving there may be a prob lem with the ABS system If this happens 1 Pull off the road and stop care fully 2 Press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to LOCK OFF and then start the engine again If the warning light comes on briefly then turns off the system is normal If the warning light still stays on have the system inspected by your SUZUKI dealer immediately If the ABS system becomes inoperative the brake system will function as an ordinary brake system that has no ABS A WARNING If the ABS warning light 1 and the Brake system w
132. alants for a flat tire as air pressure sensors can be damaged If the low tire pressure warning light comes on frequently there may be something wrong with one of the tires or with the monitoring system your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer SERVICE TPMS 57L31026 NOTE The information display shows the above warning and indicator message when this light comes on TPMS Limitations The tire pressure monitoring system may not function properly under certain circum stances In the following situations the low tire pressure warning light may come on and remain on or may blink When you replace a flat tire with the spare tire When you include the spare tire during a tire rotation When the TPMS sensor is damaged dur ing a tire replacement or liquid sealants are used to repair a flat tire When the TPMS sensors electronic sig nal is disturbed in one of the following ways Electric devices or facilities using simi lar radio wave frequencies are nearby A lot of snow or ice covers the vehicle in particular around the wheels or wheel housings Snow tires or tire chains are used When you use non genuine SUZUKI wheels or tires When the pressure of any tire is too high When there is a problem with the receiver of the keyless entry start remote controller OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Replacing Tires and or Wheels If you get a flat tire
133. aler ERROR 3 The USB device is disconnected Check the connection of the USB device ERROR 4 The current consumption of the USB Check the USB device device exceeds 500 mA 5 71 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display Possible cause Possible solution Bluetooth Disconnect the Bluetooth ready device and connect it The player developed an error of an uni ERROR dentified cause again If ERROR 1 does not go out consult your dealer Failed Failed to establish pairing Try to establish the pairing again Reaching the upper limit of the register Delete the registered data of unnecessary devices and Memory Full NE able device count try to establish the pairing again Not Avail Inoperable during driving Operate the system after pulling over your car Pardon Failed voice recognition Press the Talk button and say what you said again Not Linked Telephone disconnected Try to establish the pairing again 5 72 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Fuel Filler Door 57L51054 2 Unlock 57L51058 The fuel filler door 3 is located on the left rear side of the vehicle To access the fuel filler cap the fuel filler door must be opened by unlocking it using the power door locking switch 1 keyless start sys tem remote controller request switch or key and then pushing the fuel filler door 3 at the location indicated by the arrow If the fuel filler doo
134. and held radio frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators garage door openers entry door locks security systems even home lighting Additional HomeLink infor mation can be found on the Internet at www homelink com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside of the garage Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener position manufac tured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming It is also sug gested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes Refer to Programming HomeLink step 1 only or for assistance contact HomeLink at www homelink com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 Programming HomeLink NOTE S
135. and the side curtain air bag are not controlled by the front passenger sensing system PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 1 57L21055 When you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator comes on for several seconds to let you know the system is working When the front passen ger sensing system has turned off the front passengers front air bag including the seat belt pretensioner the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator will come on and stay on to remind you that the front passenger s front air bag is off The front passenger sensing system uses front seat pressure measurements and pressure locations to determine whether to activate or deactivate the front passenger s front air bag The front passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the front air bag depending on the front passengers seating posture and body build The air bag should be turned off in the following situations There is no occupant in the front pas senger seat The occupant of the front passenger seat lifts his or her weight off of the seat for a period of time The occupant of the front passenger seat is an infant or small child in a child restraint system or a small child in a booster seat A smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints or a very small adolescent is seated in the front passenger seat BEFORE DRIVING NOTE If the front passen
136. ank gets nearly empty the malfunc tion indicator light may come on If so the light will go off after driving a few times after the fuel filler cap is installed fully the electrical system dries out or the fuel tank is filled BEFORE DRIVING Low Fuel Warning Light 54G343 If this light comes on fill the fuel tank immediately When this light comes on a ding sounds once to remind you to fill the fuel If you do not fill the fuel a ding sounds every time you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON NOTE The activation point of this light varies depending on road conditions for exam ple slope or curve and driving conditions because of fuel moving in the tank 2 74 BEFORE DRIVING Open Door Warning Light SET Indicator Light if equipped Turn Signal Indicators SET 54G391 This light remains on until all doors and the engine hood are completely closed If any of the doors or the engine hood becomes open while the vehicle is moving a warning sound will remind you to close all the doors and the engine hood com pletely CRUISE Indicator Light if equipped CRUISE 520113 When the cruise control system is on this light will be on 2 75 65D474 When the vehicle s speed is controlled by the cruise control system this light will be on Illumination Indicator Light Sep am D Q
137. antenna or transmitter OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Basic Operations 1 VOL PUSH POWER knob 2 TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 3 MUTE button 4 5 3 4 H button 5 M button TUNE FOLDER CH SOUND SEEK TRACKICAT Lo XM J MENU OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Turning power on off Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob 1 The unit starts in the function mode it was in when the power was turned off last Adjusting the clock 1 Press and hold the H button 4 for 1 second or longer 2 Press the H button 4 to adjust the hours Press and hold H button 4 to successive change 3 Press the M button 5 4 Press the M button 5 to adjust the minutes Press and hold M button 5 to successive change NOTE e If no operation takes place for more than 3 seconds the displayed time is fixed e Pressing the H button 4 and M button 5 simultaneously allows users to set the clock on the hour If the minute of the clock is between 31 and 59 the hour of the clock advances 1 hour 5 17 Adjusting the volume Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob 1 Turning it clockwise increases the volume turning it counterclockwise decreases the volume NOTE While driving adjust the volume to an extent that sound and or noise coming from outside the car can b
138. arning light 2 on the instrument panel simultaneously stay on or come on when driving both anti lock function and rear brake force control function proportioning valve function of the ABS system may have failed This could cause the rear wheels to skid or the vehicle to spin during braking on a slippery road or hard braking on a dry paved road If both warning lights come on drive carefully avoiding hard braking as much as possible and ask your SUZUKI dealer to inspect the ABS system immediately OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE How the ABS Works A computer continuously monitors wheel speed The computer compares the changes in wheel speed when braking If the wheels slow suddenly indicating a skidding situation the computer will change braking pressure several times each second to prevent the wheels from locking When you start your vehicle or when you accelerate after a hard stop you may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise as the system resets or checks itself A WARNING The ABS may not work properly if tires or wheels other than those specified in the owner s manual are used This is because the ABS works by comparing changes in wheel speed When replacing tires or wheels use only the size and type specified in this owner s manual 3 30 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped ESP is a registered trademark of Daimler AG The Electronic Stability Program ESP
139. arview mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the mirrors The passengers side mirror is a convex curved surface mirror Objects seen in this mirror will look smaller and appear far ther away than when seen in a flat mirror A WARNING Be careful when judging the size or distance of a vehicle or other object seen in the side convex mirror Be aware that objects look smaller and appear farther away than when seen in a flat mirror 57L21029 The switch to control the power rearview mirrors is located on the driver s door panel You can adjust the mirrors after pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ACC or ON To adjust the mirrors 1 Move the selector switch to the left or right to select the mirror you wish to adjust 2 Press the outer part of the switch that corresponds to the direction you wish to move the mirror 3 Return the selector switch to the center position to help prevent unintended adjustment 2 22 BEFORE DRIVING NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with the heated outside rearview mirrors refer to Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rear view Mirrors if equipped Switch in this section 2 23 Front Seats Standard Seat if equipped Adjusting seat position A WARNING Never attempt to adjust the driver s seat or seatback while driving The seat or seatback could move unex pectedly causing loss of control Make sure that
140. as during winter it may not give the best performance when you start using it again To help maintain opti mum performance and durability of your air conditioner it needs to be run periodically Operate the air conditioner at least once a month for one minute with the engine idling This circulates the refrigerant and oil and helps protect the internal components Your air conditioner is equipped with air fil ters Clean or replace them as specified in the Maintenance Schedule in the INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE sec tion Have this job done by your SUZUKI dealer as the lower glove box must be low ered for this job NOTE Your vehicle uses the air conditioning refrigerant HFC 134a commonly called H 134a R 134a replaced R 12 around 1993 for automotive applications Other refrigerants are available including recy cled R 12 but only R 134a should be used in your vehicle CAUTION Using the wrong refrigerant may damage your air conditioning sys tem Use R 134a only Do not mix or replace the R 134a with other refrig erants 5 9 Radio Antenna Printed antenna if equipped 57L51071 The radio antenna 1 wire is printed inside the rear window CAUTION Do not attach any metal objects to the rear window glass or place metallic film near it Either of these conditions may cause poor recep tion or noise When cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to scratc
141. assistance 7 2 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Periodic Maintenance Schedule except CANADA R Replace or change Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary Interval This interval should be judged by miles x 1000 7 5 15 22 5 30 37 5 45 52 5 60 67 5 75 odometer reading or months whichever comes km x 1000 12 5 25 37 5 50 62 5 75 87 5 100 112 5 125 first months 7 5 15 25 30 375 45 525 60 675 75 ENGINE amp EMISSION CONTROL 1 Drive belt Inspect for damage a m 2 Valve lash clearance 2 ie m p D 2 2 3 Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R 4 Cooling system hoses and connections 5 Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC Standard Green R SUZUKI LLC Super Blue 1 First time only Replace at 150000 km 90000 miles or 90 months Second time and after Replace every 75000 km 45000 miles or 45 months 6 Exhaust pipes and mountings 7 EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 180 months 8 Emission related hoses amp tubes l 9 Spark plugs m E m R 25 10 Ignition coil plug m 11 Fuel tank amp cap l 12 Air cleaner filter element paved road R m Em R 13 Fuel filter E 14 Fuel lines and connections m EN
142. ately 80 cm 2 1 2 feet from the trunk lid request switch you can open the trunk lid by pushing and holding the trunk lid request switch 1 NOTE e f the remote controller is outside the trunk lid request switch operating range described above you will not be able to operate the switch e f the battery of the remote controller runs down or there are strong radio waves or noise the trunk lid request switch operating range may be reduced or the remote controller may be inopera tive f the remote controller is too close to the trunk lid the trunk lid request switch may not operate If a spare remote controller is in the trunk the trunk lid request switch may not operate normally CAUTION The remote controller is a sensitive electronic instrument To avoid dam aging the remote controller Do not expose impacts mois ture or high temperature such as by leaving it on the dashboard under direct sunlight Keep the remote controller away from magnetic objects such as a television NOTE The keyless start system may not function correctly in certain environments or under certain operating conditions such as the following When there are strong signals coming from a television power station or a cel lular phone When the remote controller is in contact with or covered by a metal object When a radio wave type remote keyless entry is used nearby When the remote controll
143. atic Heating and Air Conditioning System 1 Windshield defroster outlet 2 Side defroster outlet Climate Control 3 Side outlet z 4 Center outlet Air Outlet 5 Floor outlet 6 Rear floor outlet EXAMPLE 1 7 Rear outlet 57L51001 Side outlet OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Center outlet 8 57L50002 Move the knob 8 vertically or horizontally to adjust the direction of airflow as desired The side outlet opens when you turn the dial 9 to the right and closes when you turn it to the left 57L51060 Rear outlet 57L51059 Move the knob 8 vertically or horizontally to adjust the direction of airflow as desired The center outlet rear outlet opens when you turn the dial 10 upward and closes when you turn it downward OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Description of Controls EXAMPLE 1 9 11 6 e AUTO AIC AUTO 48e MODE oo OFF DUAL 5 3 57151002 1 Driver s temperature selector 2 Passenger s temperature selector 3 DUAL switch 4 Blower speed selector 5 Air intake selector 6 MODE switch 7 Defrost switch 8 Air conditioning switch 9 AUTO switch 10 OFF switch 1 10 Display 9 0 11 Driver s temperature selector 1 Pas senger s temperature selector 2 1
144. ation The position lights are on The illumination will fade out when it is not required 82K253 NOTE To save the battery the illumination will be automatically turned off when both of the following conditions are simultaneously met battery saver function The headlights and position lights are turned off A period of 15 minutes has elapsed after opening the driver s door OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Selection of Power Supply Modes Press the engine switch to select the ACC or ON mode as follows when you use an electric accessory or check the operation of instruments without running the engine 1 Bring the keyless start system remote controller with you and sit in the driver s seat 2 Without depressing the brake pedal press the engine switch 1 ENGINE STA ST 82K254 Every time you push the engine switch without the brake pedal depressed the power supply mode changes as follows 3 4 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE CVT LOCK 4 ACC Audio equipment Gearshift lever in a P position other than 57L31006 Manual transaxle Audio equipment 57131033 CVT If the gearshift lever is in any posi tion other than P the ignition mode cannot be returned to LOCK OFF 3 5 e When selecting the power supply modes the information display in the instrument cluster shows certain
145. ator Canadian Programming section 4 After the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink ing light release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons NOTE If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to_a rapidly blinking light contact HomeLink at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 for assistance 5 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on con stantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons begin with Programming HomeLink step 2 Do not repeat step 1 f the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a con stant light continue with Programming 5 94 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT HomeLink steps 6 8 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 66J051 0000 66J052 5 95 6 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the learn or
146. attery will dis charge 5 79 Spot Light 57L51048 Push the switch 1 to turn on the light and push it again to turn off the light OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Accessory Socket Lidded Instrument Panel Box 57L51062 The accessory socket will work when the ignition mode is changed to ACC or ON by pressing the engine switch 12 volt accessory sockets are located both on the center console and on the lidded instrument panel box Each socket can be used to provide 12 volt 120 watt power for electrical accesso ries when used alone Make sure that the cap remains on the socket when the socket is not in use CAUTION To prevent the fuse from being blown when using sockets at the same time do not exceed the total combined power capacity of 120 watts Use of inappropriate electrical accessories can cause damage to your vehicle s electrical system Make sure that any electrical acces sories you use are designed to plug into this type of socket When an electric device is con nected to the accessory socket close the lid carefully so as not to damage the device or lid 5 80 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Universal Serial Bus USB Socket Cigarette Lighter if equipped 57L51061 Connect your portable digital music player etc to this socket to enjoy music through the vehicle s audio system using it as a
147. b 1 to determine the selection 6 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone Only or Int Audio and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Phone Only shall be selected for using only as the telephone and Int Audio shall be selected for using as the built in audio equipment as well as the telephone 7 Select CAR M MEDIA from the Bluetooth menu of the cell phone and make a connection Refer to the manual of your cell phone for further information 8 Enter the Passkey displayed on the system into the cell phone 9 Press the On Hook button 8 NOTE e Selection of Go Back displays the pre vious menu f you select Pair Phone at step 8 you can register the other phones continu ously Receiving a call Press the Off Hook button 7 to receive a call Ending a call Press the On Hook button 8 to end a call Rejecting a call only for supported models Press the On Hook button 8 to reject a incoming call OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Adjusting the listening volume Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob 2 during a call Turning it clockwise increases the vol ume turning it counterclockwise decreases the volume Lean the VOL switch 9 during a call Leaning to the upper side increases the volume leaning the lower side decreases the volume Adjusting the ring volume Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob 2 while a call com
148. be scalded If a drink is spilled over the audio system if equipped or electric switches or if a spilled drink reaches the under floor wiring or electric components it could cause the sys tem to malfunction or even a fire and impair normal operation of the SRS air bag system 5 88 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Front Seat Back Pocket if equipped LL SE WS Gay 57L50043 1 Front seat back pocket This pocket is provided for holding light and soft things such as gloves newspa pers or magazines A WARNING Do not put hard or breakable objects in the pocket If an accident occurs objects such as bottles cans etc can injure the occupants in the rear seat 5 89 Footrest V E 57151033 Use the footrest 1 as a support for your left foot Center Console Box Use this stowage for keeping small arti cles The box consists of upper and lower com partments The upper compartment forms a tray which also serves as a lid of the lower compartment Upper compartment Open the upper compartment by raising the top lid 2 while keeping the lever 1 up 57L50045 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Lower compartment Armrest The armrest 1 is stowed in the center of Open the lower compartment by raising Front the seatback Tilt it down forward to use the top lid and tray 4 together while keep ing the lever 3 up A WARNING T
149. cannot be started Your keyless start system remote controller may not be sensed as being within the interior workable area Try again after making sure that you have the remote con troller with you If the engine still cannot be started the battery of the remote controller may be discharged You must then use the following method to be able to start the engine 57L21124 1 Make sure the parking brake is set fully 2 Manual Transaxle Shift to N Neu tral and fully depress the clutch pedal Hold the clutch and brake pedals fully depressed 3 8 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE CVT If the gearshift lever is not in the P Park position shift it to P Hold the brake pedal fully depressed 3 The PUSH START SWITCH message will appear on the information display in the instrument cluster Press the engine switch 1 4 Within about 10 seconds of flashing of the master warning light in the instru ment cluster touch the engine switch with the lock switch end of the remote controller 2 for about 2 seconds NOTE e If you still cannot start the engine after several attempts using the above method there may be a problem else where such as a low battery Contact your SUZUKI dealer for inspection e The immobilizer keyless start system warning light will light for about 5 sec onds while the master warning light is flashing In addition the information dis play will show a certain mess
150. cedure is for emergency use only If repeated use of this procedure is neces sary or the procedure does not work as described take the vehicle to your dealer for repair 3 19 Using the 2WD i AWD intelligent All Wheel Drive Switch if equipped 57L31016 This i AWD system enables you to select the driving mode according to driving con ditions by operating the 2WD i AWD switch Driving Modes 2WD If you drive on a dry paved road select this mode to save fuel In this mode the engine torque transmitted to the rear wheels is limited to the mini mum As a result the vehicle runs in a quasi front wheel drive condition i AWD This mode is for all normal driving In almost all road surface conditions the system keeps distributing engine torque to the rear wheels in the most suitable pro portion for varying conditions under auto matic control In the i AWD mode the i AWD controller monitors the driver s vehicle control opera tions and conditions of the vehicle Based on the sensed conditions the controller electronically controls the power coupling so that optimum torque is distributed to the rear wheels This function improves driving stability and driving performance on rough roads and stabilizes driving performance even on snow covered up hill roads or the like During constant speed driving torque dis tribution to the rear wheels is reduced almost to the front wheel drive condition t
151. child restraint could be killed or seriously injured The back of a rear facing child restraint would be too close to the inflating air bag 65D608 65D609 A WARNING Children could be endangered in a crash if their child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle When installing a child restraint sys tem be sure to follow the instruc tions below Be sure to secure the child in the restraint system accord ing to the manufacturer s instruc tions A WARNING In an accident or sudden stop the rear seat armrest if equipped could fall forward If there is a child in a rear facing child restraint in the cen ter seating position the falling arm rest could injure the child Make sure the armrest is back in the seat and locked when not in use Installation with Lap Shoulder Seat Belts child restraint with no top strap A ELR type belt EXAMPLE 83E031 Install your child restraint system accord ing to the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer If you install the child restraint system in the front seat be sure to slide the seat to the rearmost position After making sure that the seat belt is securely latched BEFORE DRIVING 57L31032 1 If you install the child restraint system in the rear right or left seat remove the head restraint 1 or raise the head restraint upright and make it lock at the highest position 2
152. ck is folded for ward be sure to unlatch the connec tor of rear center belt Otherwise the seat belt webbing can be damaged BEFORE DRIVING Latching To latch the connector 1 Pull the belt out from the holder 57L21187 2 Insert the connector latch plate C into the connector D so as to align the tri angle marks until you hear a click A WARNING Make sure the detachable connector is securely latched and the webbing is not twisted Stowing Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Be sure to stow the belt after the belt is retracted completely 57L21188 To stow the belt insert the latch plate A into the slot of the holder To pull the belt out simply pull the latch plate A WARNING Stow the belt end properly or the belt end may hit passengers in case of vehicle bumps Seat Belt Reminder Driver s seat belt reminder light EXAMPLE 57L21042 Front passenger s seat belt reminder light if equipped 57L21043 2 40 BEFORE DRIVING When the driver and front passenger don t buckle their seat belts the driver s seat belt reminder light in the instrument cluster and the front passengers seat belt reminder light in the information display will come on and a buzzer will sound as a reminder to the driver and front passenger to buckle their seat belts A WARNING It is absolutely essential that the
153. comes first months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 ENGINE amp EMISSION CONTROL 1 Drive belt Inspect for damage m m m 2 Valve lash clearance m Rm 3 Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R R R 4 Cooling system hoses and connections u 5 Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC Standard Green SUZUKI LLC Super Blue 1 First time Replace al at 150000 km 90000 or 90 months Second time and after Replace every 75000 km 45000 miles or 45 months 6 Exhaust pipes and mountings Z 7 EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 180 months 8 Emission related hoses amp tubes pa B 2 9 Spark plugs 10 Ignition coil plug cap s 11 Fuel tank amp m m T 12 Air cleaner filter element paved road R 13 Fuel filter Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 150 months 14 Fuel lines and connections 15 Canister air suction filter z Em ED 1 1 1 Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC Super Blue follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC Standard Green 7 7 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE R Replace or change 1
154. ctedly during driving obstructing your view and resulting in an accident 5 76 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Sun Visor 57L50032 1 Hook 2 Vanity mirror cover 3 Ticket holder 4 Extension The sun visors can be pulled down to block glare coming through the windshield or they can be unhooked and turned to the side to block glare coming through the side window The extension 4 can be drawn out to block glare widely 5 77 CAUTION When unhooking and hooking a sun visor be sure to handle it by the hard plastic parts or the sun visor can be damaged Both the drivers and passengers sun visors have a ticket holder on the side fac ing the interior when they are pulled down The ticket holder is on the vanity mirror cover CAUTION Do not leave cards or similar plastic objects in the ticket holder when parking under the sun The cabin temperature may rise high enough to cause the plastic objects to crack or deform Interior Light Switch Front 57L51021 Rear 57L51022 The interior light switch has three posi tions which functions as described below OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ON 1 The light comes on and stays on regard less of whether the door is open or closed DOOR 2 The light comes on when the door is opened After closing all doors the light will remain on for about 15 seconds and then fade out If you press t
155. ctor behind the head restraint and retain its end in the holder so that the seatback for the left seating place can be folded 2 Adjust all the head restraints to the low est positions In addition tip forward the head restraints for the right and left seats 3 Detach the seat belts for the right and left seats from the seatbacks as shown in the illustration so the belts are not caught when the seatbacks are moved BEFORE DRIVING 57L30038 4 Pull the release lever 1 on the top of each split seat and fold the seatbacks forward CAUTION After folding the rear seatback for ward do not allow any foreign mate rial to enter the lock opening This may cause damage to the inside of the lock and prevent the seatback from being locked securely 2 32 BEFORE DRIVING A WARNING Luggage or other cargo should be stowed in the luggage compartment with the rear seat in an upright posi tion whenever possible If you need to carry cargo in the passenger com partment with the rear seat back folded forward be sure to secure the cargo or it may be thrown about causing injury Never pile cargo higher than the seatbacks To return the seat to the normal position follow the procedure below A WARNING When returning the rear seatback to the normal position be careful that your finger is not caught between the lock and the striker CAUTION When returning the rear seatback to the normal po
156. d Do not use any fluid other than SAE J1703 or DOT3 brake fluid Do not use reclaimed fluid or fluid that has been stored in old or open contain ers It is essential that foreign parti cles and other liquids are kept out of the brake fluid reservoir A WARNING Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal lowed and harmful if it comes in con tact with skin or eyes If swallowed do not induce vomiting Immediately contact a poison control center or a physician If brake fluid gets in eyes flush eyes with water and seek medi cal attention Wash thoroughly after handling Solution can be poisonous to animals Keep out of the reach of children and animals CAUTION The brake fluid should be replaced according to the maintenance sched ule Have the brake fluid replaced by your SUZUKI dealer NOTE With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to gradually fall as the brake pads wear Brake Pedal Floor carpet 65D345 Pedal to floor carpet minimum distance a 73 mm 2 9 in With the engine running and the parking brake set measure the distance between the brake pedal and floor carpet when the pedal is depressed with approximately 300 N 66 Ibs 30 kg of force The minimum distance required is as specified Since your vehicle s brake system is self adjust ing there is no need for pedal adjustment If the pedal to floor carpet distance as INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE measu
157. d Wipe it clean with a soft cloth 3 27 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Braking 60G165 The distance needed to bring any vehicle to a halt increases with the speed of the vehicle The braking distance needed for example at 60 km h 37 mph will be approximately 4 times greater than the braking distance needed at 30 km h 19 mph Start to brake the vehicle when there is plenty of distance between your vehicle and the stopping point and slow down gradually A WARNING If water gets into the brake drums brake performance may become poor and unpredictable After driving through water or wash ing the underside of the vehicle test the brakes while driving at a slow speed to see if they have maintained their normal effectiveness If the brakes are less effective than normal dry them by repeatedly applying the brakes while driving slowly until the brakes have regained their normal effectiveness Power Assisted Brakes Your vehicle has power assisted brakes If power assistance is lost due to a stalled engine or other failures the system is still fully operational on reserve power and you can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by pressing the brake pedal once and holding it down The reserve power is partly used up when you depress the brake pedal and reduces each time the pedal is pressed Apply smooth and even pressure to the pedal Do not pump the pedal A WARNING Even witho
158. diator fan sub 3 30A Radiator fan main 4 30A Starting motor 5 40A Light 6 40A ESP control module 7 50A MEE start control 8 50A window Power 9 50A Blower fan 10 10A ee com 11 15A Door mirror heater 12 15A Throttle motor 13 30A Rear defogger 14 30A Blank 15 7 5A Head light 16 20A Fuel injection 17 25A ESP control module 18 25A Back up 19 15A Head light low Left 7 40 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 20 15A Head light low Right 39 Fuel pump relay 21 15A Head light high Left 40 Radiator fan relay 3 22 15A Head light high Right 41 Radiator fan relay 1 23 15A CVT 42 Door mirror heater 7 relay 24 20A Front fog light 25 15A O2 sensor heater 43 _ PAGADI 26 15A Horn 44 Main relay 26 T E Head light low relay 45 Throttle motor relay Left The main fuse primary fuses and some of 28 5 Head light low relay the individual fuses are located in the 28 Right engine compartment If the main fuse g blows no electrical component will func 29 7 Blank tion If a primary fuse blows no electrical 30 E Blank component in the corresponding load 81 Blank group will function When replacing the an main fuse a primary fuse or an individual tioni use use a genuine replacement Air conditioning com f ine SUZ
159. dicator in the switch comes on If you then place the gearshift lever in the R position the parking sen Sor system is activated Push the switch again and it stays in this is the OFF position The indicator in the switch goes out and the parking sensor is deactivated Switch posi tion State ON The indicator lights up and when all necessary condi JL tions are met system becomes ready for opera tion OFF The system does not operate Place the switch in this position if you do not wish to use the park ing sensor NOTE If you push the parking sensor switch from the OFF to ON position when the ignition mode has been changed to ON by press ing the engine switch the inside buzzer sounds once OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Obstacle Indication by Parking Sen sor 57L31020 1 Obstacle detected by rear center sen sors 2 Obstacle detected by rear corner sen sors Upon detecting an obstacle the parking sensor causes an interior buzzer to sound and a symbol representing the obstacle appears an the information display in the instrument cluster A different symbol is displayed depend ing on the direction and distance of the obstacle A buzzer located behind the rear seat sounds when a sensor at the rear detects an obstacle 3 26 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Warnings when obstacles are detected Warnings when obstacles are detected Warning and Indicato
160. dio service CD Sound skipping or noise The disc is dirty Wipe the disc with a soft cloth The disc has a major flaw or is warped Replace the disc with another without flaws 5 68 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Problem Possible cause Possible solution MP3 WMA No playback The disc has unplayable formatted data Check the file format Sound skipping or noise Playing VBR Variable Bit Rate files may cause sound skipping Play Non VBR files USB Music is not played back even if the USB device is connected There is no music stored in a format that is supported on this unit Check the file format The current consumption of the USB device exceeds 500 mA Use a USB device with a current con sumption lower than 500 mA Bluetooth The distance between this unit and the Bluetooth ready device is too long or Change the location of the Bluetooth the Bluetooth ready device is hidden ready device behind a metallic object from this unit Pairing failed The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth ready device is deactivated Refer to the Operating Instructions of the Bluetooth ready device With regard to some devices the power saving mode is activated after a certain time Cannot receive a call Your mobile phone is out of service area Drive your car to the service area of your mobile phone The voice
161. dios and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection The names of registered phones are displayed in sequence NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu Passkey setting Set Passkey The security number Passkey is speci fied 1 Press the Off Hook button 6 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select BT A Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Set Pass key and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select a number for ones digit and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection Determine the tens hundreds and thousands digits in the same manner NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu Deletion of connection data Delete Audio The registered information of audio device is deleted 1 Press the Off Hook button 6 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select BT A Setup and
162. duces the available cargo and lug gage load capacity of your vehicle g INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Vehicle Loading Example As an example suppose that the Tire and Loading Information label on your vehicle indicates that your vehicle s total load capacity is 950 Ibs If you were to drive your vehicle with one passenger and the total combined weight of you and your passenger was 350 Ibs then the cargo and luggage capacity of your vehicle would be 600 Ibs 950 350 600 Ibs If you later added 2 more passengers having a combined weight of 325 Ibs the cargo and luggage capacity of your vehicle would be reduced from 600 Ibs to 275 Ibs 600 325 275 Ibs As you can see as the number and combined weight of vehicle occu pants increase the vehicle s cargo and luggage capacity decreases Suppose again that you were to take a trip in your vehicle with the same three passengers described above and you decided to tow a trailer having a trailer tongue weight of 75 lbs The cargo and luggage capacity would be reduced again to 200 Ibs 275 75 200 Ibs 7 38 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle Load Limits The tires on your vehicle when they are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure have a load carry ing capacity that is greater than the load that will be on the tires when the vehicle is at its GVWR or GAWR limit Never use replacement tires that have
163. e Towing Your Vehicle recreational towing sec tion CAUTION If vehicle damage such as steering them 8 7 or drivetrain damage etc prevents normal use of the towing procedures for your vehicle described in the Towing Your Vehicle recreational towing section have your vehicle towed with two wheels lifted by the tow truck and the other two wheels on a towing dolly If the Starter Does Not Operate 1 While bringing the remote controller with you place the gearshift lever in the P position and depress the brake pedal Try pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to START with the headlights turned on to deter mine the battery condition If the head lights go excessively dim or go off it usually means that either the battery has run down or battery terminal con tact is poor Recharge the battery or correct battery terminal contact if nec essary If the headlights remain bright check the fuses If the reason for failure of the starter is not obvious there may be a major electrical problem Have the vehi cle inspected by your authorized SUZUKI dealer If the Engine is Flooded If the engine is flooded with gasoline it may be hard to start If this happens press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine Do not operate the starter motor for more than 12 seconds NOTE If the engine refuses to start the starter
164. e tain conditions for about 2 vehicle or its battery may have become dis N1 A seconds from exterior and or charged Locate the remote controller or lt ES interior buzzers touch the engine switch with the remote controller If the message still appears replace the remote controller battery 2 91 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Master Warning Message indicator Sound Cause and Remedy Blinks Continuous beep from inte The headlights and position lights are left y rior buzzer on Turn them off 1 LIGHTS ON 57L21095 ON GNITION ITCH ITION 57L21096 Off Off This message is displayed when the ON position is selected as the power supply position 1 1 This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected 2 92 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Master Warning STEERING WHEEL TO RELEASE LO 57L21101 Message indicator Sound Cause and Remedy Off Ping one time from interior Fuel is low Refill immediately 1 buzzer LOW FUEL 57L21097 Blinks Ping one time from interior The steering lock is not disengaged While 7 buzzer lightly turning the steering wheel in both 4 directions press the engine switch again 7 1 V 1 This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is
165. e 12 and under should ride properly restrained in the rear seat if equipped Continued A WARNING Continued Infants and small children should never be transported unless they are properly restrained Restraint systems for infants and small chil dren can be purchased commer cially and should be used Make sure that the system you purchase meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Read and follow all the directions provided by the manu facturer Avoid contamination of seat belt webbing by polishes oils chemi cals and particularly battery acid Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water For children if the shoulder belt irritates the neck or face move the child closer to the center of the vehicle All seatbacks should always be in an upright position when driving or seat belt effectiveness may be reduced Seat belts are designed to offer maximum protection when seatbacks are in the upright posi tion Lap Shoulder Belt Emergency Locking Retractor ELR The seat belt has an emergency locking retractor ELR which is designed to lock the seat belt only during a sudden stop or impact It also may lock if you pull the belt across your body very quickly If this hap pens let the belt go back to unlock it then pull the belt across your body more slowly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR The front passenger s seat belt and the rear seat belts have emergency locking retractors
166. e TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Select Phone and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selec tion 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a phone to be paired and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selec tion 6 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE e Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu e The Bluetooth ready audio device will be disconnected when the phone is selected Name change Change Name The registered name of phones are changed 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Change Name and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a phone to be changed and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 6 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Record Name and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine
167. e and start it again later When warming up a cold engine allow the engine to idle until the temperature gauge pointer comes up to the C position In this position the engine is sufficiently warm for starting off Avoid jackrabbit starts Fast starts away from lights or stop signs will consume fuel unnecessarily and shorten engine life Start off slowly Avoid unnecessary stops Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stop ping Try to maintain a slow steady speed whenever possible Slowing down and then accelerating again uses more fuel Keep a steady cruising speed Keep as constant a speed as road and traf fic conditions will permit 4 2 DRIVING TIPS EXAMPLE 60A183S Keep the air cleaner clean If the air cleaner is clogged with dust there will be greater intake resistance resulting in decreased power output and increased fuel consumption Keep weight to a minimum The heavier the load the more fuel the vehicle consumes Take out any luggage or cargo when it is not necessary Keep tire pressure correct Underinflation of the tires can waste fuel due to increased running resistance of the tires Keep your tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the label located below the driver s side door latch striker 4 3 Highway Driving When driving at highway speeds pay attention to the following Stopping distance progressively increases with vehicle speed Apply the brakes
168. e desired position button A buzzer will sound both when the system starts and completes the process for restoring the memorized position The seat is now automatically set to the selected position NOTE f you press any of the following buttons during the process of restoring a memo rized position the system stops the pro cess Memory button Position button of any other number Any of the seat position adjusting switches Restoring the seat to a memorized posi tion is possible only when all of the fol lowing conditions are met The ignition mode has been changed io ACC or ON by pressing the engine switch CVT The gearshift lever is in the P position Manual Transaxle The parking brake is applied Vehicle speed is 2 mph 3 km h or lower 2 26 BEFORE DRIVING Head Restraints A WARNING All head restraints must be rein stalled to properly protect vehicle occupants A WARNING Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed Do not attempt to adjust the head restraint while driving Front 80J001 Head restraints are designed to help reduce the risk of neck injuries in case of an accident Adjust the head restraint to the position which places the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears If this is not possible for very tall passengers adjust the head restraint as high as possi ble A WARNING A
169. e dis play C shows one of the following three indications trip meter A trip meter B and thermometer Also the display D shows the odometer reading EXAMPLE 57L21083 f Trip meter A g Trip meter B h Thermometer i Odometer To switch the display indication C pull the TRIP switch 3 quickly Odometer The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven CAUTION Keep track of your odometer reading and check the maintenance schedule regularly for required services Increased wear or damage to certain parts can result from failure to per form required services at the proper mileage intervals Trip meter The trip meter can be used to measure the distance traveled on short trips or between fuel stops You can use the trip meter A and trip meter B independently To reset the trip meter to zero pull and hold the TRIP switch 3 for about 2 sec onds when the display shows the trip meter BEFORE DRIVING Thermometer The thermometer indicates the outside temperature EXAMPLE DRIVE WITH CARE xiu 491 Miles 57L21084 If the outside temperature nears freezing the message shown in the above illustra tion will appear on the display NOTE The outside temperature indication is not the actual outside temperature when driv ing at low speed or when stopped 2 84 BEFORE DRIVING Setting Mode When the ignition mode is changed
170. e heard Mute Press the MUTE button 3 Press the MUTE button 3 again it returns to the original volume Adjusting bass middle treble balance fader 1 Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 Each time it is pressed sound adjust ment is changed as follows For standard specifications Bass adjustment BASS 0 Treble adjustment TRE 0 Balance adjustment BAL 0 Fader adjustment FADE 0 AVC adjustment LEVEL 2 For Rockford specifications Bass adjustment PUNCH BASS 0 Middle adjustment MID 0 Treble adjustment TRE 0 Balance adjustment BAL 0 Fader adjustment FADE 0 AVC adjustment LEVEL 2 The PUNCH Bass adjustment enables greater control of the Rockford Fosgate sonic signature by increasing decreasing the system s low frequency and sub woofer levels to tailor the dynamics of the sound system without the muddied bass and vocals typical of bass controls 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to adjust the sound OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Adjusting the AVC Auto volume con trol The Auto Volume Control AVC function automatically adjusts increases decreases the sound volume in accor dance with vehicle speed The AVC control is provided with three selectable levels LEVEL OFF 1 2 3 The range of volume adjustment increases together with the LEVEL number 1 Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
171. e installing the chains or the wheel caps can be damaged by the chain bands 4 5 Do not drive through deep or rushing water Driving in deep or rushing water can be hazardous You could lose control of the vehicle and the occupants could drown Also your vehicle could be seriously dam aged To avoid these risks observe the fol lowing instructions and precautions Do not drive through deep or rushing water Deep or rushing water such as fast moving streams or floodwaters could carry your vehicle away from your intended path The water is too deep if it covers your wheel hubs axles exhaust tailpipe Know the depth of the water before you attempt to drive through it If water blocks the tailpipe the engine may not start or run If the water is deep enough to get drawn into the engine intake system the engine will be badly damaged Submerged brakes will have poor brak ing performance Drive slowly and care fully Driving slowly will also help avoid water splashing onto the ignition system which could cause the engine to stall Even when driving through shallow or still waters drive carefully since the water may be hiding ground hazards such as holes ditches or bumps 54G638S A WARNING In addition to following the driving tips in this section it is important to observe the following precautions Make sure your tires are in good condition and always maintain the specified ti
172. e is a risk of leaving the remote controller inside the closed trunk lid BEFORE DRIVING Trunk Inside Area Where Remote Con troller Reminder Function for Trunk Works 57L21019 2 12 BEFORE DRIVING NOTE Replacement of the battery e Even with the remote controller within the remote controller becomes unreli EXAMPLE the trunk inside sensing area 1 the able replace the battery remote controller reminder function for trunk may not work under any of the fol lowing conditions as the presence of the remote controller may not be sensed The battery of the remote controller is EXAMPLE 1 low The remote controller is influenced by strong radio waves or noise The remote controller is in contact with or covered by a metallic object The remote controller is in a corner of the trunk The remote controller may be sensed under the following condition even when the controller is not within the trunk To replace the battery of the remote con troller 57L21023 1 Lithium disc type battery CR2032 or equivalent inside sensing area The remote con 2 Replace the battery 1 so its terminal ee function for trunk will 57121022 faces the bottom of the case as shown g in the illustration The remote controller is outside the 1 Insert a flat blade screwdriver covered 3 Close the remote controller firmly vehicle but
173. e is too high slowly release the air by pressing on the tire valve stem with the edge of the tire gauge until you reach the cor rect pressure If the air pressure is too low fill the tire with air at a service station until it reaches the recommended pres sure 6 Make sure all tires have the same air pressure unless the owners manual indicates otherwise Je 7 31 A WARNING e Air pressures should be checked when the tires are cold or you may get inaccurate read ings Check the inflation pressure from time to time while inflating the tire gradually until the spec ified pressure is obtained Never underinflate or overin flate the tires Underinflation can cause unusual handling characteristics or can cause the rim to slip on the tire bead resulting in an acci dent or damage to the tire or rim Underinflation can also cause tires to overheat leading to tire failure Overinflation can cause the tire to burst resulting in personal injury Overinflation can also cause unusual handling characteristics which may result in an accident Tire Inspection Inspect your vehicle s tires at least once a month by performing the fol lowing checks 1 Measure the air pressure with a tire gauge Adjust the pressure if nec essary Remember to check the spare tire too Refer to the Mea suring Air Pressure section 54G136 1 Tread wear indicator 2 Indicator location mark
174. e lever when there is no windshield washer fluid being sprayed or the washer motor can be damaged Do not attempt to remove dirt from a dry windshield with the wipers or you can damage the windshield and the wiper blades Always wet the windshield with washer fluid before operating the wipers Clear ice or packed snow from the wiper blades before using the wip ers Check the washer fluid level regu larly Check it often when the weather is bad Only fill the washer fluid reservoir 3 4 full during cold weather to allow room for expansion if the tempera ture falls low enough to freeze the solution Tilt Telescoping Steering Lock Lever if equipped EXAMPLE 57L21074 1 LOCK 2 UNLOCK The lock lever is located under the steering column To adjust the steering wheel height and fore aft position 1 Push down the lock lever to unlock the steering column 2 Adjust the steering wheel to the desired height and fore aft position and lock the steering column by pulling up the lock lever 3 Try moving the steering wheel up and down and back and forth to make sure it is securely locked in position BEFORE DRIVING A WARNING Never attempt to adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving or you could lose control of the vehicle 2 110 BEFORE DRIVING Horn EXAMPLE 57L21119 Press the horn pad on the steering wheel to sound the horn The horn will sound wit
175. e parking brake J 80J2053 CAUTION Towing the 2WD or i AWD CVT vehi cles with four wheels on the ground can result in damage to the CVT 80J2052 6 3 VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING TOWING METHOD B FROM THE FRONT FOUR WHEELS ON THE GROUND B 2WD VEHICLES WITH MANUAL TRANSAXLE 1 Shift the manual transaxle lever or shift lever into neutral 2 Press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ACC to unlock the steering wheel 3 Release the parking brake CAUTION The steering column is not strong enough to withstand shocks trans mitted from the front wheels during towing Always unlock the steering wheel before towing 80J2054 CAUTION 57L61002 Towing the 2WD or i AWD CVT vehi cles with four wheels on the ground can result in damage to the CVT 6 4 VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 60G410 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Maintenance Schedule 7 2 Periodic Maintenance Schedule except CANADA 7 8 Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions except CANADA 7 7 Periodic Maintenance Schedule for CANADA 7 11 Drive Belt 7 15 Engine Oil and Filter eren 7 15 Engine Coolant 7 18 Air Gl
176. e pre tensioners can be activated only once If the pretensioners are activated that is if the air bags are activated have the pre 2 55 tensioner system serviced by an autho rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible If the AIR BAG light on the instrument clus ter does not blink or come on briefly when the ignition mode is changed to ON by pressing the engine switch stays on for more than 10 seconds or comes on while driving the pretensioner system or the air bag system may not work properly Have both systems inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible Service on or around the pretensioner sys tem components or wiring must be formed only by an authorized SUZUKI dealer who is specially trained Improper service could result in unintended activa tion of pretensioners or could render the pretensioner inoperative Either of these two conditions may result in personal injury To prevent damage or unintended activa tion of the pretensioners be sure the bat tery is disconnected and the engine switch has been in the LOCK OFF mode for at least 90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on your SUZUKI Do not touch pretensioner system compo nents or wiring The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or yellow tubing and the couplers are yellow When scrapping your SUZUKI ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer body repair shop or scrap yard for assistance Supplemental Restrai
177. e switch the switch will return to the original position NOTE To shift gears continuously remove your finger from the shift paddle then pull the shift paddle again You cannot shift gears continuously while holding the shift paddle toward you When you pull the both and shift paddle simultaneously the gear may not shift 1 491 2 Miles 57L31012 1 Manual mode indicator 2 Gear position The temporary manual mode will be can celed automatically in the following situa tions When you press and hold the accelera tor pedal for a certain period of time with out shifting gears When driving speed becomes slow OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE If You Cannot Shift CVT Gearshift Lever Out of PARK 57L31015 Vehicles with a CVT have an electrically operated park lock feature If the vehicle s battery is discharged or there is some other electrical failure the CVT cannot be shifted out of Park in the normal way Jump starting may correct the condition If not follow the procedure described below This procedure will permit changing the tran saxle out of Park 1 Be sure the parking brake is firmly applied 2 If the engine is running stop the engine 3 Remove the cover 1 over the button 4 With pushing the release button by the key or the flat end rod shift the gear shift lever to the desired position 3 18 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE This pro
178. e system emits an ultrasonic wave and the relevant sensor detects the return of the wave reflected by an obsta cle The system measures the time OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Sensor Locations On rear bumper taken by the ultrasonic wave to reach the obstacle and return from it from which it determines the obstacle s position The parking sensor function can be used when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON the gearshift lever is in the R position and the parking sensor switch is in the ON position This function is helpful when parallel parking the vehicle steering the vehicle into the garage or moving slowly in a place with obstacles A WARNING The parking sensor warns you of obstacles with buzzers and by showing you the location of the obstacles on the information dis play However you must still pay full attention yourself while driving The sensors can detect obstacles only within a limited area and only Approximate Areas Where Obstacles Can Be Detected acm IMEEM uua d 2 1 1 2 57L31019 An obstacle within about 20 cm 8 in from a sensor or just below a sensor is not detectable The sensors can detect an obstacle up to about 1 5 m 5 ft from the rear of 57L31018 1 Rear center sensors 2 places 2 Rear corner sensors 2 places CAUTION when the vehicle is moving within a limited speed range So in tricky areas you mu
179. e system to prevent being pinched by the sunroof may not work if the battery is not suffi ciently charged 57L51026 To tilt the sunroof up slide the sun shade rearward by hand and push the TILT UP part 1 of the sunroof switch To tilt the sunroof down push the SLIDE OPEN part 2 of the sunroof switch If you push the switch for more than a sec ond the sunroof will automatically tilt up or down fully To stop the sunroof halfway push the switch briefly OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 57L51027 To slide the sunroof rearward push the SLIDE OPEN part 2 of the sunroof switch To slide the sunroof forward push the TILT UP part 1 of the sunroof switch If you push the switch for more than a sec ond the sunroof will automatically slide fully rearward or forward To stop the sun roof halfway push the switch briefly 57L51028 The sun shade will open manually and cannot be closed when the sunroof is slid rearward How to reactivate the system to prevent being pinched by the sunroof When you disconnect the negative ter minal from the battery or change the fuses the features below will not operate The system to prevent being pinched by the sliding sunroof The system to automatically open or close the sunroof fully In this case you must reactivate the fea tures using the following procedures 1 Press the engine switch to change t
180. e the weight and load try taking your vehicle to a highway weighing station shipping com pany or inspection station for trucks etc Compare these weights to the GVWR and GAWR front and rear listed on the Safety Certification Label If the gross vehicle weight or the load on either axle exceeds these ratings you must remove enough weight to bring the load down to the rated capacity A WARNING Never overload your vehicle The gross vehicle weight sum of the weights of the loaded vehicle driver and passengers must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR listed on the Safety Certifica tion Label In addition never distrib ute a load so that the weight on either the front or rear axle exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR listed on the Safety Certification Label A WARNING Always distribute cargo evenly To avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle always secure cargo to prevent it from shifting if the vehicle moves suddenly Place heavier objects on the floor and as far forward in the trunk or in the cargo area as possible Never pile cargo higher than the top of the seat backs Trailer Towing 54G639 Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer The vehicle is not designed or intended for such use Towing a trailer can adversely affect handling durability and fuel econ omy Towing Your Vehicle recreational towing Your vehicle may be towed behind an
181. e tire pressure using a tire pressure gauge Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Switch 57L31001 LOCK OFF This is the mode for parking When this mode is selected by pressing the engine switch and you open the deriver s door the steering will be automatically locked NOTE The steering is not automatically locked when the front passenger s door and or rear door s alone are opened ACC Press the engine switch to select this igni tion mode to use such electric equipment as the audio system outside rearview mir rors and accessory socket with the engine off When this position is selected the information display in the instrument clus ter shows the following message IGNI 3 2 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE TION SWITCH POSITION ACC Refer to Information Display in the Before Driv ing section for details ON With the engine off You can use such electric equipment as the power windows and wipers with the engine off When this ignition mode is selected by pressing the engine switch the information display in the instrument cluster shows the following message IGNITION SWITCH POSITION ON With the engine on All electric equipment is operational The vehicle can be driven when you have selected this ignition mode by pressing the engine switch START CVT Provided you have the keyless start system remote controller with
182. e use of Disc at Once is rec ommended Compression formats MP3 Bit rate MPEG1 Audio Layer III 64 320 kbps MPEG2 Audio Layer III 64 160 kbps Sampling frequency MPEG Audio Layer III 32 k 44 1 48 kHz MPEG2 Audio Layer IIl 16 k 22 05 k 24 kHz WMA Ver 7 Ver 8 Bit rate CBR 48 k 192 kbps Sampling frequency 32 k 44 1 k 48 kHz 5 30 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT WMA Ver 9 Bit rate CBR 48 k 320 kbps Sampling frequency 32 k 44 1 k 48 kHz WMA 9 Professional LossLess Voice are not supported Supported file systems ISO 9660 Level 1 Level 2 Joliet Romeo Maximum number of files folders Maximum number of files 512 files folders Maximum number of files in one folder 512 Maximum depth of trees 8 Maximum number of folders 255 Root folder is included 5 31 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Listening to the file stored in the USB device Display Bluetooth 1 USB button a 2 TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 3 Up button TUNE FOLDER CH VOL rusu POWER SOUND 7 bisp 4 Down button a aa 5 5 RPT button I 1 a 6 6 RDM button 219 7 DISP button Lom Pow foo J po A Folder number ni B Track number C Play time D MP3 WMA indicato
183. e vehicle is at a steep angle Continued 3 25 CAUTION Continued Sensors have intercepted ultra sonic noise from another vehi cle s horn engine air braking system large vehicles or park ing sensor Obstacles are too close to the sensors Sensors are at an angle to a highly reflective object such as glass Ultrasonic waves are not reflected back from the obstacle Sensors may not be able to cor rectly detect the following types of obstacles Objects made of a thin material like wire netting and ropes Square shaped curbstones or other objects with sharp edges Tall objects with a large upper part like a road sign Low profile objects such as curb stones Sound absorbing objects such as cotton and snow NOTE e Thin poles or obstacles lower than the sensors may become undetectable as the vehicle moves closer to them even if they have been detected from longer dis tances The system may calculate the distance to a road sign or similar obstacle to be shorter than the actual distance Certification Canada only This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES 001 nterference Causing Equipment Stan dards How to Use the Parking Sensor Parking Sensor Switch 57L31021 1 Parking sensor switch 2 Indicator When you push the parking sensor switch with the engine switch in the ON mode the switch releases to the ON position and the in
184. e with each other 7 55 57L71038 2 Squeeze lock lever 1 towards wiper arm 2 and remove the wiper frame from the arm as shown 60A260 3 Pull the locked end of the wiper blade firmly to unlock the blade and slide the blade out as shown 52D124 3 Retainer 4 If the new blade is provided without the two metal retainers move them from the old blade to the new one Installation 52D125 4 Locked end 5 Install the new blade in the reverse order of removal with the locked end positioned toward the wiper arm Make sure the blade is properly retained by all the hooks Grasp the blade near the locked end and pull in the direction of the arrows to lock the end into place Reinstall wiper frame to arm making sure that the lock lever is snapped securely into the arm INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Windshield Washer Fluid or opposite side 80JM078 Ces ME 57L71034 7 56 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Check that there is washer fluid in the tank by looking at the washer fluid level gauge which is attached to the cap of the washer fluid tank If the fluid level is near LOW mark refill it Use a good quality windshield washer fluid diluted with water as necessary A WARNING Do not use anti freeze solution in the windshield washer reservoir This can severely impair visibility when sprayed
185. eaner gee Spark Plugs Gear OW Clutch Pedal Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT Fluid 7 24 m 7 25 Steering Wheel eese 7 27 m S 7 28 Battery R HRK RENE ULTRA ERE A 7 39 diLll 7 40 Headlight Aiming eere enn 7 44 Bulb Replacement 7 45 Wiper Blades 7 54 Windshield Washer Fluid 7 56 Air Conditioning System 7 57 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7 1 60A187S A WARNING You should take extreme care when working on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury Here are a few pre cautions that you should be espe cially careful to observe To prevent damage or unintended inflation of the air bag system be sure the battery is disconnected and the engine switch has been pressed to change the ignition mode to LOCK OFF and this mode is kept unchanged for at least 90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on your SUZUKI Do not touch air bag sys tem componen
186. earview mirror as this may damage the internal electronic components Always clean the mirror with a soft towel Dampen with clean water 2 20 BEFORE DRIVING Auto dimming rearview mirror if equipped With HomeLink Wireless Control Sys tem j Om C3 OC GOGH 1 2 3 57L21027 You can adjust the auto dimming rearview mirror by hand so you can see to the rear of your vehicle in the mirror This rearview mirror has a function of automatically reducing glare from the lights of vehicles behind you The function works when the ignition mode has been changed to ON by pressing the engine switch The mirror is always set to the automatic dimming mode when the engine switch is in the ON mode When the ON switch 2 is pushed the green indicator 1 is lit indicating that the mirror is set to the automatic dim ming mode To cancel the automatic dimming mode push the OFF switch 3 the indicator 1 then goes out 2 21 The auto dimming rearview mirror is automatically deactivated while the gear shift lever is in the R position 57L21028 CAUTION Do not touch or cover the sensor 4 since this may impair normal operation of the system Blocking glare from the sensor with an object such as a shade sticker accessory or baggage may also impair proper operation of the sys tem Do not hook anything
187. eat or seatback while driving The seat or seatback could move unex pectedly causing loss of control Make sure that the driver s seat and seatback are properly adjusted before you start driving A WARNING To avoid excessive seat belt slack which reduces the effectiveness of the seat belts as a safety device make sure that the seats are adjusted before the seat belts are fastened CAUTION Do not place any object under the seat The object may cause damage to the seat if caught under it 2 24 BEFORE DRIVING Adjusting seatbacks A WARNING All seatbacks should always be in an upright position when driving or seat belt effectiveness may be reduced Seat belts are designed to offer maxi mum protection when seatbacks are in the upright position 57L21030 57L21031 Sliding the multi function control switch 1 Lifting up the front end of the multi func located on the outside of the driver s seat tion control switch causes the front part forward or backward changes the fore and of the seat to rise aft position of the seat Pushing down the front end of the switch causes the front part of the seat to lower Lifting up the rear end of the switch causes the whole seat to rise and the whole seat to move forward at the same time Pushing down the rear end of the switch 57121032 causes the whole seat to lower and the the reclining switch 2 forward or rear whole seat to mo
188. ection offered by seat belts The driver and all passengers must be properly restrained by wear ing seat belts at all times whether or not air bags are mounted at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash Your vehicle has dual stage front air bags which adjust the air bag inflation force according to crash severity Also your vehicle has a front passenger sensing system which turns off the front passen gers front air bag and seat belt preten sioner under certain conditions 2 58 BEFORE DRIVING Front Side Air Bags Rear Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air Bags EXAMPLE EXAMPLE SRS AIRBAG 57L21052 2 59 57L21053 Front side air bags are located in the part of the front seatbacks closest to the doors The words SRS AIRBAG are indicated on the tag to identify the location of the front side air bags 57L21054 The rear side air bags are stowed in the covers at both door side ends of the rear seatback The words SRS AIRBAG are molded into each of the seatback ends BEFORE DRIVING Side collision range Front side air bags rear side air bags EXAMPLE and side curtain air bags will not inflate 80JM146 Side curtain air bags are located in the roof lining The words SRS AIRBAG are molded into the pillar to identify the loca tion of the side curtain air bags
189. ed engine may cause overheating of the cat alyst This may result in permanent heat damage to the catalyst and other vehicle components CAUTION To minimize the possibility of catalyst or other vehicle damage Maintain the engine in the proper operating condition In the event of an engine malfunc tion particularly one involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have the vehi cle serviced promptly Do not shut off the engine or inter rupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle or coasting down a hill Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as during diagnos tic testing Do not idle the vehicle for pro longed periods if idling seems rough or there are other malfunc tions Do not allow the fuel tank to get near the empty level 54G584S A WARNING Be careful where you park and drive the catalytic converter and other exhaust components can get very hot As with any vehicle do not park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust system DRIVING TIPS Improving Fuel Economy The following instructions will help you improve fuel economy Avoid excessive idling If you are to wait for more than a minute while you are parked stop the engin
190. ed repeat play mode changes as follows Display change Press the DISP button 8 Each time it is pressed display is changed as follows Play time display Y Disc title display Y Track title display OFF gt TRACK REPEAT OFF gt TRACK RANDOM NOTE To cancel repeat play press the RPT but ton 6 to change the repeat play mode to OFF TRACK REPEAT The repeat indicator RPT lights The track being currently played is played repeatedly NOTE NO TITLE is displayed when there is no information on the disc If all the text data cannot be displayed the gt mark appears at the right end Holding down the DISP button 8 for 1 sec or more calls the next page 5 26 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Listening to an MP3 WMA Disc Display VOL rusu POWER Gs ECE 5 27 TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob Up button Down button RPT button RDM button DISP button 1 2 3 4 5 6 A SS SE SS A Folder number B Track number C Play time D MP3 WMA indicator Selecting a folder Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a folder Selecting a track Press the Up button 2 to listen to the next track Press the Down but
191. ed on it If the wiring is dam aged the courtesy lights will not work OK BLOWN 81A283 A WARNING Always be sure to replace a blown fuse with a fuse of the correct amper age Never use a substitute such as aluminum foil or wire to replace a blown fuse If you replace a fuse and the new one blows in a short period of time you may have a major electri cal problem Have your vehicle inspected immediately by your SUZUKI dealer INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Headlight Aiming Since special procedures are required we recommend you take your vehicle to your SUZUKI dealer for headlight alignment 7 44 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Bulb Replacement A WARNING Light bulbs can be hot enough to burn your finger right after being turned off This is true especially for halogen headlight bulbs Replace the bulbs after they become cool enough The headlight bulbs are filled with pressurized halogen gas They can burst and injure you if they are hit or dropped Handle them carefully CAUTION The oils from your skin may cause a halogen bulb to overheat and burst when the lights are on Grasp a new bulb with a clean cloth CAUTION Frequent replacement of a bulb indi cates the need for an inspection of the electrical system This should be carried out by your SUZUKI dealer NOTE If it is difficult to replace headlight bulbs or position light bulbs due to under hood components
192. eese nnns Cleaning Cleaning the Exterior eee Clutch Pedal pininana nenioo ninpis Compact Spare Tire eese Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT Fluid Coolant Level Check eene Coolant Replacement eese Corrosion Prevention eese INDEX Courtesy Lights esee 5 79 Cruise 3 21 Cup Holder and Storage 5 87 CVT Selector Position for continuously variable transaxle 2 2 81 D Daily Inspection Checklist 3 1 Daytime Running Light D R L Indicator Light 2 76 Daytime Running Light D R L System 2 104 Door Locks 2 3 Drive 7 15 Driver s Seat Belt Reminder Light 2 73 Driving on Hills 4 3 Driving on Slippery 4 4 Driving Range 2 81 E Electric Power Steerin
193. ehicle towed to the nearest dealer for repairs A WARNING If any of the following conditions occur you should immediately ask an SUZUKI dealer to inspect the Drake system If the brake system warning light does not go out after the parking brake has been fully released If the brake system warning light does not come on when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON If the brake system warning light comes on at any time during vehi cle operation 2 71 NOTE Because the disc brake system is self adjusting the fluid level will drop as the brake pads become worn Replenishing the brake fluid reservoir is considered normal periodic maintenance Anti Lock Brake System ABS Warning Light When you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON the light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working If the light stays on or comes on when driving there may be something wrong with the ABS If the ABS light and the brake system warning light stay on or come on simulta neously when driving then there may be something wrong with both the rear brake proportioning valve function and anti lock function of the ABS If one of these happens have the system inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer If the ABS becomes inoperative the brake system will function as an ordi nary brake system that has no ABS For details of the ABS refer to
194. el low enough to be aware of road and traffic con ditions while driving 5 11 and the player is used soon after switch ing on the heater moisture may form on the disc or the optical parts of the player and proper playback may not be possi ble If moisture forms on the disc wipe it off with a soft cloth If moisture forms on the optical parts of the player do not use the player for about one hour this will allow the condensation to disappear normally Driving on extremely bumpy roads which cause severe vibrations may cause sound to skip This unit uses a precision mechanism Even in the event that trouble arises never open the case disassemble the unit or lubricate the rotating parts Please bring the unit to an authorized SUZUKI dealer COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO A This unit has been designed specifically for playback of compact discs bearing the mark A No other discs can be played OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Removing the disc Proper way to hold the compact disc To remove the compact disc from its stor age case press down on the center of the case and lift the disc out holding it care fully by the edges Always handle the compact disc by the edges Never touch the surface To remove fingermarks and dust use a soft cloth and wipe in a straight line from the center of the compact disc to the cir cumference New discs may have some ro
195. elated hoses amp tubes 9 Spark plugs R 10 Ignition coil plug cap 11 Fuel tank amp cap l l 2 12 Air cleaner filter element paved road R R R 13 Fuel filter R 14 Fuel lines and connections 2 15 Canister air suction filter Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 180 months 1 Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC Super Blue follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC Standard Green 2 Inspect at 250000 km 150000 miles or 180 months NOTE The maintenance services enclosed with rectangle are recommended maintenance items The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform recom mended maintenance items enclosed with a rectangle will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life SUZUKI however urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated inter vals and the maintenance recorded 7 4 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE R Replace or change 1 Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary This i m
196. element if equipped linkage Fluid deterioration check 4 7 9 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE R Replace or change 1 Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary miles x 1000 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 Interval This interval should be judged by odometer km x 1000 reading or months whichever comes first 70 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 months 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 CHASSIS AND BODY 1 2 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ftt 2 14 15 16 17 18 19 Continuously variable transaxle CVT Clutch for manual transaxle Pedal and fluid level Brake discs and pads Brake hoses and pipes front rear Brake fluid level check replacement Brake pedal stroke check adjustment Parking brake lever and cable Lever movement check adjustment Tires including tire rotation Wheel discs Wheel bearings Suspension system Propeller shafts i AWD Drive axle boots Manual transaxle oil Level check amp replacement Genuine SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 Other than SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 Fluid level Fluid deterioration check Fluid hose Transfer oil i AWD Rear differential oil i AWD Steering system Steering wheel movement Power steering if equipped All latches hinges and locks Air conditioner filter element if equipped
197. entage of oxygenate and whether important additives are present Such labels may provide enough informa tion for you to determine if a particular blend of fuel meets the requirements listed above In other areas pumps may not be clearly labeled as to the content or type of oxygenate and additives If you are not sure that the fuel you intend to use meets these requirements check with the service station operator or the fuel supplier NOTE To help clean the air SUZUKI recom mends you use the oxygenated fuels However if you are not satisfied with the driveability or fuel economy of your vehicle when you are using an oxygenated fuel switch back to the regular unleaded gaso line CAUTION Be careful not to spill fuel containing alcohol while refueling If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body wipe it up immediately Fuels containing alco hol can cause paint damage which is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 60G404 BEFORE DRIVING BEFORE DRIVING E T 2 1 Immobilizer System 2 2 Door LOCKS 2 3 Keyless Start System Remote Controller 2 6 Theft Deterrent Alarm System 2 14 WINKOWS l Iupcu Front Seats Front Seat Heater if equipped
198. enter seat belt buckle and the connector are designed so as not to allow a wrong latch plate to be inserted When the rear seatback is in upright posi tion keep the detachable connector latched Only when the rear seatback will be folded down unlatch the detachable connector To latch and unlatch the con nector see Unlatching and Latching Detachable Connector later in this sec tion 57L21184 Before fastening the rear center belt make sure the detachable connector 1 is securely latched and the webbing is not twisted To fasten the belt sit up straight and well back in the seat pull the latch plate A across your body and press it into the buckle B until you hear a click 57L21185 To unfasten the belt push the red PRESS button on the buckle B and allow the belt to retract 2 38 BEFORE DRIVING 57L30107 GS 2 39 57L21108 A WARNING To minimize risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash always wear seat belt with both latches buck led Unlatching and Latching Detachable Connector Unlatching Sy 57L21186 To unlatch the connector 1 Insert the key into the slot on the con nector D and allow the belt to retract 2 Once the belt has completely retracted stow the belt in the holder Refer to Stowing Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt for details later in this section CAUTION When the rear seatba
199. ential oil i AWD 15 Steering system Steering wheel movement linkage l l 16 Power steering if equipped l l l l 17 All latches hinges and locks 1 18 Air conditioner filter element if equipped R l R NOTE This table shows the service schedule up to 250000 km 150000 miles Beyond 250000 km 150000 miles perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart Beyond 250000 km 150000 miles the maintenance services enclosed with a rectangle are required 7 6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions except CANADA Follow this schedule if your car is mainly operated under one or more of the following conditions When most trips are less than 6 kilometers 4 miles When most trips are less than 16 kilometers 10 miles and outside temperature remain below freezing Idling and or low speed operation in stop and go traffic Operating in dusty areas Schedule should also be followed if the car is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial applications R Replace or change 1 Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary Interval This interval should be judged by miles x 1000 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 odometer reading or months whichever km x 1000 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 a o a
200. ents which you may have When we receive your correspon dence we will be pleased to contact the Owner of your dealership and assist in resolving your concern For owners outside the continental United States please refer to the distributor s address listed in your Warranty Information booklet SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION IMPORTANT AWARNING CAUTION NOTE Please read this manual and follow its instructions carefully To emphasize spe cial information the symbol A and the words WARNING CAUTION and NOTE have special meanings Pay special atten tion to the messages highlighted by these signal words A WARNING Indicates a potential hazard that could result in death or injury CAUTION hazard that Indicates a potential could result in vehicle damage NOTE Indicates special information to make maintenance easier or instructions clearer 75F135 The circle with a slash in this manual means Don t do this or Don t let this hap pen MODIFICATION WARNING A WARNING Do not modify this vehicle Modifica tion could adversely affect safety handling performance or durability and may violate governmental regula tions In addition damage or perfor mance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under warranty CAUTION Improper installation of mobile com munication equipment such as cellu lar telephones or CB Citizen s Band radios may cause electronic interfer ence
201. enu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Security and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phbk Lock and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection If Phonebook is already set to Lock Phbk Lock is displayed 5 Enter a PIN number NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu 5 44 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Phonebook unlock 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Security and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phbk Unlock and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection If Phonebook is already set to Unlock Phbk Unlock is displayed 5 Enter a PIN number NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu 5 45 Adjusting the guidance volume You can adjust the guidance volume 1 2 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetoot
202. er and turn the key clockwise Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the seatback NOTE When a red sign is visible behind the release lever the seatback cannot be locked because it is not completely in the raised position Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems BEFORE DRIVING Above the pelvis 65D231 A WARNING An air bag supplements or adds to the frontal crash protection offered by seat belts The driver and all pas sengers must be properly restrained by wearing seat belts at all times whether or not an air bag is mounted at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash 65D606 A WARNING Never allow persons to ride in the cargo area of a vehicle In the event of an accident there is a much greater risk of injury for persons who are not riding in a seat with their seat belt securely fastened Seat belts should always be adjusted as follows the lap portion of the belt should be worn low across the pelvis not across the waist the shoulder straps should be worn on the outside shoulder only and never under the arm the shoulder straps should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Continued 2 34 BEFORE DRIVING Across the pelvis as low as possible across the hips 65D201 A WARNING Continued Seat belts should never be
203. er as shown in the illustration 57L71020 7 46 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3 Remove the bolts 2 to remove the 5 Disconnect the coupler 5 High beam light bracket 3 1 Open the engine hood V en 57L71023 57071021 6 Push the retainer in the direction of B7L70086 4 Tum We cour 4 counterclockwise to Mud to detach 2 To create the space necessary for per forming the steps that follow discon 7 Replace the bulb then follow the above nect the coupler 1 by pressing the steps in reverse to restore the original claw state 57L71022 7 47 3 Turn the cover 2 counterclockwise to remove it 57L70037 4 Disconnect the coupler 3 57L70038 5 Push the retainer 4 in the direction of the arrow see the illustration to detach it from the hook 5 6 Replace the bulb then follow the above steps in reverse to restore the original state INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Other General Lights Bulb holder EXAMPLE O 54G123 1 Removal 2 Installation To remove a bulb holder from a light hous ing turn the holder counterclockwise and pull it out To install the holder push the holder in and turn it clockwise 7 48 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Bulb EXAMPLE 54G124 3 Removal 4 Installation There are two types of bulb Full
204. er is placed near an electronic device such as per sonal computer Some additional precautions you should take and information you should be aware of are Make sure the key is stowed in the remote controller If the remote controller becomes unreliable you will not be able to lock or unlock the doors or start the engine Be sure that the driver always carries the remote controller If you lose one of the remote controllers ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible for a replacement Be sure to have your dealer program the new remote controller code in your vehi cles memory so that the old code is erased or perform the programming pro cedure yourself according to the instruc tions in this section e You can use up to four remote controllers and keys for your vehicle Ask an autho rized SUZUKI dealer for details The battery life of the remote controller is about two years but it can vary depending on usage conditions Remote Controller Reminder Function for Trunk This function prevents the remote control ler from being left under a locked trunk lid f you attempt to lock the trunk lid with the remote controller left inside the trunk and the vehicle in the following condition the function automatically unlocks and slightly opens the lid Vehicle is parked with all doors closed and locked CAUTION Check that you have the remote con troller whenever you close the trunk lid or ther
205. er traffic during emergency parking or when your vehicle could otherwise become a traffic hazard 2 106 BEFORE DRIVING Rain sensing Wipers and Washer Lever 65D611 A WARNING To avoid possible injury do not oper ate controls by reaching through the steering wheel 2 107 Windshield Wipers if equipped MIST OFF INT cue vt v HI 57L21069 Press the engine switch to change the igni tion mode to ON To turn the windshield wipers on move the lever down to one of the three operating positions In the INT position if equipped the wipers operate intermittently The INT position is very convenient for driving in mist or light rain In the LO position the wipers operate at a steady low speed In the position the wipers operate at a steady high speed To turn off the wipers move the lever back to the OFF position Move the lever up and hold it to the MIST position the windshield wipers will turn on continuously at low speed 57L21070 If the lever is equipped with the INT TIME control turn the control forward or rear ward to adjust the intermittent wiper opera tion to the desired interval Rain sensing Wipers if equipped MIST OFF s wi AUTO LO 57L21071 Press the engine switch to change the igni tion mode to ON To turn the rain sensing wipers on move the lever down t
206. esired operation of the device The term IC before the certification reg istration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met BEFORE DRIVING Theft Deterrent Alarm System The theft deterrent alarm system is armed in about 20 seconds after you lock the doors using the keyless start system remote controller or by pushing the request switch on the driver s or front passenger s door handle The system however is not armed when the engine hood or trunk lid is open Once the system is armed any attempt to open a door by using any other means than the keyless start system remote con troller or the request switch will cause the alarm to be triggered These means include the following The key The lock lever on a door The power door lock knob The trunk lid unlatch switch The engine hood release handle 2 14 BEFORE DRIVING NOTE The theft deterrent alarm system gener ales alarms when any of the predeter mined conditions is met However the system does not have any function of blocking unauthorized entry into your vehicle Always use the keyless start system remote controller or the request switch to unlock the doors when the theft deter rent alarm system has been armed Using a key instead will trigger the alarm e If a person who does not know the theft deterrent alarm system is going to drive your vehicle we recommend you to expl
207. everse N Neutral Use this position for starting the engine if the engine stalls and you need to restart it while the vehicle is moving You may also shift into Neutral and depress the brake pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during idling OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Manual mode The CVT can shift gears automatically When using the manual mode you can shift gears in the same manner as conven tional manual transaxle To use the manual mode shift the gearshift lever from D to M D Drive Use this position for all normal driving With the gearshift lever in D range you can get an automatic downshift by press ing the accelerator pedal The higher the vehicle speed is the more you need to press the accelerator pedal to get a down shift M manual mode Use this position for driving in the manual mode Refer to Manual mode later in this section for details on how to use the manual mode CAUTION Be sure to take the following precau tions to help avoid damage to the CVT Make sure that the vehicle is com pletely stationary before shifting into P or R Do not shift from P or N to R or M when the engine is run ning above idle speed Do not rev the engine with the tran saxle in a drive position R D or M and the front wheels not moving Do not use the accelerator to hold the vehicle on a hill Use the vehi cle s brakes 57L31011
208. evices with this unit the devices need to be registered NOTE To set up a new audio player disconnect the system from the phone The phone shall be reconnected after audio player setup is completed If connection cannot be confirmed within 120 seconds the connecting operation is canceled Please try again or refer to the audio player manual for assistance with the pairing process 1 Press the CD button 1 to select Bluetooth audio mode is displayed 2 Press the Talk button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Pair Audio and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Record and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT the selection 5 Pronounce the name to be used at voice recognition 6 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 7 Select M MEDIA from the Bluetooth menu of the audio player and make a connection Refer to the manual of your audio player for further information 8 Enter the Passkey displayed on the system into the audio player NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu Registration of audio devices Pair Audio when your cell phone is regis
209. eyless start system remote controller away from mag netic objects 1 For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 2 2 BEFORE DRIVING 2 For Canada This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device 2 3 Door Locks A WARNING Always lock all doors when driving Locking the doors helps to prevent occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of an acci dent It also helps prevent unin tended opening of the doors Side Door Locks 57L21004 1 LOCK 2 UNLOCK 3 Rear 4 Front To lock a drivers door from outside the vehicle Insert the key and turn the top of the key toward the front of the vehicle or Turn the lock knob forward then pull and hold the door handle as you close the door To lock a passengers door from outside the vehicle t
210. f the low fuel warning light comes on fill the fuel tank immediately regardless of the value of driving range shown in the display As the driving range after refueling is cal culated based on the most recent driving condition the value is different each time you refuel NOTE f you refuel when the ignition mode is changed to ON by pressing the engine switch the driving range may not indi cate the correct value e When you reconnect the negative ter minal to the battery the value of driving range will be shown after driving for a period of time Average Speed If you selected average speed the last time you drove the vehicle the display indicates the last value of average speed from previ ous driving when the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to ON Unless you reset the value of aver age speed the display indicates the value of average speed which includes average speed during previous driving To reset the value of average speed pull and hold the DISP switch 2 for about 2 seconds when the display indicates an average speed The display shows and then indicates a new average speed after driving for a short time NOTE When you reconnect the negative ter minal to the battery the value of average speed will be shown after driving for a period of time Odometer Trip meter Thermometer When the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to th
211. far enough ahead of the stopping point to allow for the extra stopping dis tance On rainy days Hydroplaning can occur Hydroplaning is the loss of direct con tact between the road surface and the vehicle s tires due to a water film forming between them Steering or braking the vehicle while Hydroplaning can be very difficult and loss of control can occur Keep speed down when the road surface is wet At high speeds the vehicle may be affected by side winds Therefore reduce speed and be prepared for unex pected buffeting which can occur at the exits of tunnels when passing by a cut of a hill or when being overtaken by large vehicles etc Driving on Hills 57L41001 When climbing steep hills the car may begin to slow down and show a lack of power If this happens you should shift to a lower gear so that the engine will again be operating in its normal power range Shift rapidly to prevent the car from losing momentum When driving down a hill the engine should be used for braking by shifting to next lower gear Do this with EITHER a CVT or manual transaxle A WARNING Try not to hold the brake pedal down too long or too often while going down a steep or long hill This could cause the brakes to overheat result ing in reduced braking efficiency Failure to take this precaution could result in loss of vehicle control CAUTION When descending a down hill NEVER press the e
212. fferential 3 Check the inside of the hole with your finger If the oil level comes up to the bottom of the plug hole the oil level is correct If so reinstall the plug 4 If the oil level is low add gear oil through the filler plug hole 1 until the oil level reaches the bottom of the filler hole Gear Oil Replacement Since special procedures materials and tools are required it is recommended that you trust this job to your authorized SUZUKI dealer Clutch Pedal 57L71010 Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera tion and clutch fluid level from time to time If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully depressed have the clutch inspected by your SUZUKI dealer If the clutch fluid level is near the MIN line fill it up to the MAX line with SAE J1703 or DOTS brake fluid Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT Fluid Specified Fluid Use a CVT fluid SUZUKI CVT FLUID GREEN 1 or Shell GREEN 1V Fluid Level Check CAUTION Driving with too much or too little fluid can damage the transaxle You must check the fluid level with the CVT fluid at normal operating temperature To check the fluid level 1 To warm up the CVT fluid drive the vehicle or idle the engine until the tem perature gauge indicates normal oper ating temperature 2 Then drive for ten more minutes CAUTION Be sure to use the specified CVT fluid Using CVT fluid other than SUZUKI CVT FLUID GREEN 1 or Shell
213. g Warning Light 2 77 Electronic Stability Program 3 31 Emergency Locking Retractor ELR 2 36 Emission Compliance Label for U S A 10 2 Engine Block 3 12 Engine Coolant 5 7 18 Engine 5 75 Engine Oil and Filter eee 7 15 Engine Serial Number 10 1 Engine Switch Engine Switch Illumination 3 4 ESP Warning Light s s sssssssssessessesssssssseessesseeseeseesseesees 2 71 Exhaust Gas Warning eese enne 3 1 F Floor 5 91 13 2 Fluid Level 7 24 Folding Rear 5 2 32 FOOlleSt 2 Re RR ENSE 5 89 Footwell Lights eese 5 79 Frame HOOKS 2 3 veacuvessdvaseesnatubecesead 5 96 Front Air Bags 2 57 Front Fog Light Switch eere 2 105 Front Seat Back
214. ge name tion Set up Bluetooth 2 Pronounce new audio device name and Confirm to confirm the audio setup operation List audio player Reading of audio device names in sequence Pressing the Talk button during reading allows users to select the audio device that is read at the moment and subsequently pronouncing Select audio player Change name or Delete audio player allows users to implement each corresponding operation Set Passkey Passkey setting Pronounce 4 to 8 digit number and Confirm to confirm the operation Delete audio player Audio device deletion Pronounce audio device name and Confirm to confirm the operation 1 When List audio players is pronounced audio device names are read in sequence When the corresponding audio device name is read press the Talk button 5 62 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Phonebook lock 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Function Change of PIN number Set PIN 1 Pronounce old PIN number 2 Pronounce new PIN number and Confirm to confirm the operation Set up Security Phonebook gt Phonebook lock Phonebook unlock Phonebook Phonebook unlock 1 If a PIN number is not assigned pronounce a 4 digit PIN number 5 63 Remote Audio Controls You can control basic functions of the audio system with the swi
215. ger seat is unoccupied the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator will not come on but the front passenger s front air bag will not deploy and the seat belt pre tensioner will not operate If you have secured a child in the front pas senger seat in a forward facing child restraint system or booster seat and the PASS AIR BAG indicator light is not on turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint or booster seat from the vehicle and reinstall it following the child restraint or booster seat manufacturer s directions Also refer to Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems in this section If after reinstalling the child restraint and restart ing the vehicle the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator is still not lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint If the PASS AIR BAG indi cator is still not on secure the child in the child restraint or booster seat in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer 2 62 BEFORE DRIVING 65D607 A WARNING Do not install a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger s seat If the passenger s front air bag inflates a child in a rear facing child re
216. ghts are on 2 102 BEFORE DRIVING EXAMPLE 57L21065 With the headlights on push the lever for ward to switch to the high beams main beams or pull the lever toward you to switch to the low beams When the high beams main beams are on a light on the instrument panel will come on To momen tarily activate the high beams main beams as a passing signal pull the lever slightly toward you and release it when you have completed the signal 2 103 Auto On Headlight System D 5 57L21118 The Auto on headlight system automati cally turns on all lights that are operated by the lighting control lever on the steering column when the following three condi tions are all met Conditions for Auto on headlight system operation 1 Itis dark around the light sensor 5 2 The lighting control lever is in the AUTO position 3 You press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON This system is operated by a signal from the light sensor 5 on the front wind shield Do not cover the sensor 5 If you do the system will not work correctly A WARNING It takes about 5 seconds for the light sensor to react to a change in light ing conditions To help avoid an acci dent due to reduced visibility turn on your headlights before driving into a tunnel parking structure or the like NOTE The light sensor reacts even to infrared rays so it may operate i
217. h i 3 2 E 7 Display 5 35 1 USB button 2 TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 3 Up button 4 Down button 5 RPT button 6 RDM button 7 DISP button A Track title B Track number C Play time Selecting an iPod mode Press the USB button 1 Selecting a track Press the Up button 3 to listen to the next track Press the Down button 4 twice to listen to the previous track When the Down button 4 is pressed once the track currently being played will start again at the beginning Fast forwarding Rewinding a track Hold in the Up button 3 to advance a track rapidly Hold in the Down button 4 to rewind a track OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Random play Press the RDM button 6 Each time the button is pressed the mode changes in the following order Repeat play Press the RPT button 5 Each time the button is pressed repeat play mode changes as follows OFF gt SONG RANDOM ALBUM RANDOM OFF gt SONG REPEAT NOTE To cancel random play press the RDM button 6 several times to change the ran dom play mode to OFF SONG RANDOM The random indicator RDM lights The tracks in the iPod are played at random ALBUM R
218. h main menu appears Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select System Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Guidance Vol and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection The current guidance volume is dis played Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select guidance volume and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu Display of device data Device Name BD address and device name is displayed 1 2 5 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select System Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Device Name and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to display the BD address and the device name NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous
219. h the engine switch in any ignition mode 2 111 Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors if equipped Switch EXAMPLE 57L21075 When the rear window is misted push this switch 1 to clear the window 57L21076 If the outside rearview mirror has the mark 2 it is also equipped with the heated out side rearview mirrors When you push the switch 1 both the heated outside rear view mirrors and the heated rear window will operate simultaneously An indicator light will be lit when the defog ger is on The defogger will work only when the engine is running To turn off the defogger push the switch 1 again CAUTION The heated rear window and the heated outside rearview mirrors if equipped use a large amount of elec tricity Be sure to turn off after the window and mirrors have become clear NOTE e The defogger will work only when the engine is running e The defogger will automatically turn off after the defogger remains on for 15 min utes to prevent discharging of the bat tery 60G408 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas Warning eene 3 1 Daily Inspection Checklist 3 1 Engine Switch Lecce eric rennes asnasan Kan 3 2 Keyless Push Start System
220. h or damage the rear window antenna Wipe the rear window lightly along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth XM antenna if equipped 57L51053 The roof antenna 2 on the roof Audio Systems There are two types of audio system as shown below Type 1 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Type 2 TUNE FOLDER CH ust SOUND Bluetooth EIE C w Bluetooth TUNE FOLDER CH SOUND SEEK TRACK CAT AM FM XM CD PLAYER AM FM XM CD PLAYER WITH Rockford Fosgate sound system OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Safety Information Notes on Discs Precautions A WARNING Cautions on Handling When the inside of the car is very cold The driver should neither watch the display nor operate the system while driving Watching the display or operating the system will distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and can cause accidents Always stop the vehicle in a safe location and use the parking brake before watching the display or operating the system It may cause trouble Keep the sound volume at an appropriate level Keep the volume lev
221. han the LOW line look for leaks at the radiator water pump and radiator and heater hoses If you locate any leaks that may have caused the overheating do not run the engine until these problems have been corrected 3 If you do not find a leak carefully add coolant to the reservoir and then the radiator if necessary Refer to Engine Coolant in the INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE section 8 8 EMERGENCY SERVICE 65D614 A WARNING It is hazardous to remove the radia tor cap when the water temperature is high because scalding fluid and steam may be blown out under pressure The cap should only be taken off when the coolant temper ature has lowered To prevent personal injury keep hands tools and clothing away from the engine cooling fan and air conditioner fan if equipped These electric fans can automatically turn on without warning 8 9 60G412 APPEARANCE CARE APPEARANCE CARE Corrosion Prevention 9 1 Vehicle Cleaning 9 3 APPEARANCE CARE Corrosion Prevention It is important to take good care of your vehicle to protect it from corrosion Listed below are instructions for how to maintain your vehicle to prevent corrosion Please read and follow these instructions carefully Important Information About Corrosion Common causes of corrosion 1 Accumulation of road salt dirt m
222. he ignition mode to ON 2 Push and hold the TILT UP part 1 of the sunroof switch the sunroof will tilt up fully and then down slightly After the movement stops completely release the switch The features are reacti vated 3 Make sure you can open or close the sunroof automatically by pushing the sunroof switch for more than about a second 5 84 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Glove Box CAUTION Do not put your body weight on the roof around the sunroof such as by sitting on it Be sure to close the sunroof when you leave the vehicle unattended Periodically inspect the guide rail for dirt and clean it if any dirt has accumulated 65D612 57L51029 A WARNING 2 Unlock Never allow any part of your body 3 Lock such as hands or head to get out of the sunroof opening while the vehi To open the glove box pull the latch lever cle is moving 1 To close it push the lid until it latches Be sure there are no hands or other securely obstructions in the path of the sun To lock the glove box insert the key roof when you close the sunroof attached to your keyless start system Always take the keyless start sys remote controller into the lock turn the key tem remote controller with you fully clockwise and pull it out of the lock in when leaving the vehicle even if this position only for a short time Also do not leave children alone in a parked vehicle Unattended childre
223. he request switch operating range described above you will not be able to operate the request switch e If the battery of the remote controller runs down or there are strong radio waves or noise the request switch oper ating range may be reduced or the remote controller may be inoperative If the remote controller is too close to the door the request switches may not oper ate e Ifa spare remote controller is in the vehi cle the request switches may not oper ate normally The remote controller will only operate a request switch if it is within the switch s operating range For example if the remote controller is within the operating range of the driver s door request switch but not the front passengers door request switch the driver s door switch can be operated but the front passen ger s door switch cannot be operated 2 9 CAUTION The remote controller is a sensitive electronic instrument To avoid dam aging the remote controller Do not expose it to impacts mois ture or high temperature such as by leaving it on the dashboard under direct sunlight Keep the remote controller away from magnetic objects such as a television NOTE The keyless start system may not function correctly in certain environments or under certain operating conditions such as the following When there are strong signals coming from a television power station or a cel lular phone When the remote control
224. he engine switch to change the ignition mode to ACC or ON during this time the light will start to fade out immediately If you change the ignition mode to LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch the light will remain on for about 15 seconds and then go out OFF 3 The light remains off even when the door is opened NOTE If the rear interior light switch is set to DOOR the light is turned on or off at the same time the front interior light is turned on or off EXAMPLE 79J075 NOTE The number of doors involved in the light ing operation of the interior light depends on the vehicle specification If there is a switch rubber projection at the door opening as shown the door is involved in the lighting operation The trunk lid is not involved in this operation 5 78 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Courtesy Lights Footwell Lights Trunk Light m N 57151023 57151024 57150019 Each front door has a courtesy light 1 A footwell light is provided the leg space When you open the trunk lid the trunk light its inside bottom It lights automatically front of each front seat When a front comes on and remains on as long as you when the door is opened door is opened the footwell light on the keep the lid open same side lights automatically CAUTION Do not leave the trunk lid open for a long time or the b
225. he lower side briefly To select the next channel in the same category lean the SEEK switch 4 to the upper side for 1 sec or longer To select the previous channel in the same category lean the SEEK switch 4 to the lower side for 1 sec or longer Selecting the track CD USB iPod Bluetooth audio mode To advance to the next track lean the SEEK switch 4 to the upper side briefly To select the previous track lean the SEEK switch 4 to the lower side briefly Fast forwarding Rewinding a track To advance a track rapidly lean the SEEK switch 4 to the upper side for 1 sec or longer To rewind a track lean the SEEK switch 4 to the lower side for 1 sec or longer OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Anti Theft Feature VOL PUSH POWER knob Preset buttons 1 to 6 Up button TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 2 3 4 ee TUNE FOLDER CH rust SOUND Bluetooth EY T SEEK TRACKICAT Lo XM J MENU 5 66 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT The anti theft feature is intended to dis courage theft or the audio system by pre venting the system from operating when it is moved to a different vehicle This feature works by allowing you to enter a Personal Identification Number PIN When the audio system is disconnected from
226. he seat belt must always be passed under the armrest It cannot provide the intended protection if it runs over the armrest In an accident or sudden stop the rear armrest could fall forward If there is a child in a rearfacing child 2 restraint in the center seating posi tion the falling armrest could injure the child Make sure the armrest is secured in the stowed position when not in use 57L50069 The lid of the center console box serves as 57151035 front armrest when it is closed NOTE e Always close the lid after you put some Rear thing into or take something out of the box The upper compartment tray and lower compartment have slots on their edges so that the cable of an appliance con 1 nected the accessory socket be led through them When the top lid or the N top lid and tray combination is raised or Is lowered to open or close the upper or lower compartment be careful not to trap a cable under it 57L50070 esc 57L51047 5 90 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT NOTE There is a lid 1 behind the armrest stow age in the seatback e When carrying a long cargo the lid 1 can be opened by folding it forward while keeping the lever 2 pressed down e When closing the lid 1 raise and push it into position 5 91 Floor Mats if equipped 57L51063 1 UNLOCK 2 LOCK Both dri
227. he spare tire cannot be held firmly without the spacer in position 57L81002 To remove the spare tire remove the lug gage under box 2 and turn the bolt 4 counterclockwise A WARNING The jack should be used only to change wheels It is important to read the jacking instructions in this sec 57181001 before attempting to use the jack 57181003 The jack wheel brace and jack handle are stowed in the luggage under box 2 under the trunk floorboard 1 The floorboard A WARNING can be kept raised using the hook 3 After using the jack jack handle and wheel brace be sure to stow them securely or they can cause injury if an accident occurs 8 1 Jacking Instructions 75F062 1 Place the vehicle on level hard ground 2 Set the parking brake firmly and shift into P Park if your vehicle has a CVT or shift into R Reverse if your vehicle has a manual transaxle A WARNING Be sure to shift into P Park for a CVT vehicle or into R Reverse for a manual transaxle vehicle when you jack up the vehicle Never jack up the vehicle with the transaxle in N Neutral Other wise an unstable jack may cause an accident 3 Turn on the hazard warning flasher if your vehicle is near traffic 4 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the w
228. he tracks in the USB device that is connected are played at random NOTE To cancel repeat play press the RPT but ton 5 several times to change the repeat play mode to OFF FILE REPEAT The repeat indicator RPT lights The track currently being played is played repeatedly FOLDER REPEAT The repeat indicator RPT F lights All the tracks in the folder currently being played are played repeatedly Display change Press the DISP button 7 Each time it is pressed display is changed as follows Play time display Folder name display File name display Album name display MP3 only Track title display Artist name display NOTE e NO TITLE is displayed when there is no information on the disc If all the text data cannot be displayed the gt mark appears at the right end Holding down the DISP button 7 for 1 sec or more calls the next page OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Notes on USB device Compatible USB devices USB Mass Storage Class For details as to whether your USB memory USB Audio is compatible with USB Mass Storage Class please con tact the USB memory USB Audio manu facturer USB Standard Compatibility 1 1 2 0 Full Speed File System FAT16 32 Maximum current less than 500 mA Capacity less than 4 GB 1 partition USB device connection When connecting a USB device make sure the connector is pushed all the
229. head restraint forward and then pull it up while holding the release knob pushed NOTE You cannot remove the head restraint with out tipping it forward in the upright posi tion the head restraint touches the cabin sealing before it can be removed A WARNING Never allow anyone to sit on the rear seat with the head restraints removed or tipped forward 2 30 BEFORE DRIVING A WARNING Do not leave the removed head restraints unfixed in the cabin They may hit against you and passengers in the event of hard braking or other similar instances increasing the risk of an accident To reinstall the head restraints do the fol lowing For the left and right seating places insert the head restraint while still in its forward tipped position do not face the backside forward into the seatback until it locks Then tilt it back to the normal position The height of the reinstalled head restraints must be adjusted properly before use A WARNING Always check that the head restraint is firmly in position after installing it Avoid installing it with the backside facing forward A wrongly facing head restraint does not provide the intended protection and also its height cannot be adjusted NOTE It is recommended 1o tilt the head restraints forward to have a better rearward view 2 31 Central seating place 57L30061 A WARNING Do not allow anyone to sit in the cen ter seating pl
230. heavy on the mirror or the mirror may break under the weight Without HomeLink Wireless Control System 57L30019 You can adjust the auto dimming rearview mirror by hand so you can see to the rear of your vehicle in the mirror This rearview mirror has a function of automatically reducing glare from the lights of vehicles behind you The function works when the ignition mode has been changed to ON by pressing the engine switch The mirror is always set to the automatic dimming mode when the engine switch is in the ON mode When the AUTO switch 2 is pushed the green indicator 1 is lit indicating that the mirror is set to the automatic dimming mode To cancel the automatic dimming mode push the AUTO switch 2 the indicator 1 then goes out The auto dimming rearview mirror is automatically deactivated while the gear shift lever is in the R position 57L30020 CAUTION Do not touch or cover the sensor 3 since this may impair normal operation of the system Blocking glare from the sensor with an object such as a shade sticker accessory or baggage may also impair proper operation of the sys tem Do not hook anything heavy on the mirror or the mirror may break under the weight Outside Rearview Mirrors BEFORE DRIVING Power Mirror Control EXAMPLE um EXAMPLE 79J033 Adjust the outside re
231. heel being lifted 5 Place the spare wheel near the wheel being lifted as shown in the illustration in case that the jack slips EMERGENCY SERVICE 57L70047 79K058 1 Jacking point 6 Position the jack as shown in the illus tration and raise the jack by turning the jack head groove fits around the jacking point beneath the vehicle body 8 2 EMERGENCY SERVICE 57L70032 2 Jack handle 3 Wheel brace 7 Continue to raise the jack slowly and smoothly until the tire clears the ground Do not raise the vehicle more than necessary 8 3 A WARNING Use the jack only to change wheels on level hard ground Never jack up the vehicle on an inclined surface Never raise the vehicle with the jack in a location other than the specified jacking point shown in the illustration near the wheel to be changed Make sure that the jack is raised at least 51 mm 2 inches before it contacts the flange Use of the jack when it is within 51 mm 2 inches of being fully collapsed may result in failure of the jack Never get under the vehicle when it is supported by the jack Never run the engine when the vehicle is supported by the jack and never allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To Raise the Vehicle with a Garage Jack Apply the garage jack to one of the points indicated below Always support the raised vehicle with jack stands commercially available
232. hen driving the air bag system or the seat belt pretensioner system may not work properly Have both systems inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer Malfunction Indicator Light 65D530 Your vehicle has a computer controlled emission control system A malfunction indicator light is provided on the instrument panel to indicate when it is necessary to have the emission control system serviced The malfunction indicator light comes on when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON to let you know the light is working and goes out when the engine is started If the malfunction indicator light comes on or blinks when the engine is running ser vice to the emission control system is nec essary Bring the vehicle to an authorized SUZUKI dealer to have the emission con trol system serviced right away and avoid hard acceleration until the service is per formed Also if the light comes on there may be something wrong with the continuously variable transaxle system Have the sys tem inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer CAUTION Continuing to drive the vehicle when the malfunction indicator light is on or blinking can cause permanent damage to the vehicle s emission control system and can affect fuel economy and driveability NOTE If the fuel filler cap is not installed fully the electrical system gets wet such as by driv ing through a deep puddle of water or the fuel t
233. her the front or rear axle exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR listed on the Safety Certification Label A WARNING Always distribute cargo evenly To avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle always secure cargo to prevent it from shifting if the vehicle moves suddenly Place heavier objects on the floor and as far forward in the cargo area as possible Never pile cargo higher than the top of the seatbacks Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The com bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX 165 on your vehicle s plac ard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug gage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passen gers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calcu lated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re
234. hey get part of their body caught by the window during operation To avoid injuring an occupant by window entrapment be sure no part of the occupant s body such as hands or head is in the path of the electric windows when closing them Always take the keyless start sys tem remote controller with you when leaving the vehicle even if only for a short time Also do not leave children alone in a parked vehicle Unattended children could use the electric window switches and get trapped by the window NOTE The driver s and passenger s windows can be operated for 30 seconds even after the ignition mode is changed from ON to ACC or LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch However if either of the front doors is opened within this 30 second period the windows cannot be operated thereafter If you drive with one of the rear windows open you may hear a loud sound caused by air vibration To reduce the sound open 2 19 the driver s or front passenger s window or narrow the rear window opening Initialization of Auto Down Up Function If the auto down up function does not work for some reason initialize the function as instructed below Note that the initialization must be performed using the switch for each window the function of the passen gers door window cannot be initialized using the switch of the drivers door win dow 1 Start the engine 2 Open the front window fully by holding the window
235. honebook is deleted 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone book and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Delete Entry and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a number to be deleted and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu 5 42 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT One touch call Speed dial One of the numbers registered to the Pre set buttons 3 is dialed 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The hands free mode is activated 2 Press one of the Preset buttons 3 The registered name is pronounced When no registered name is found Empty is pronounced 3 Press the Off Hook button 7 The selected number is dialed 5 43 Registration in speed dial A telephone number is registered to the speed dial 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone book and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the
236. ht including heavy duty brakes ride levelers roof rack heavy duty battery and special trim Recommended Inflation Pressure the cold tire inflation pressure recom mended by a manufacturer Rim metal support for a tire or tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Vehicle Capacity Weight the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilo grams 150 lbs times the vehicle s designated seating capacity Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehi cle weight and dividing by two Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire the load on an individual tire that is deter mined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight accessory weight and normal occupant weight distributed in accordance with Table 1 shown below and dividing by 2 TABLE 1 Occupant Loading and Distribution For Vehicle Normal Load For Various Designated Seat ing Capacities Designated Vehicle nor Occupant seating mal load distribution capacity number of in a nor number of occupants mallyloaded occupants vehicle 2 through 4 2 2 in front 2 in front 5 through 10 3 1 in second seat 7 36 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Vehicle Loading Your vehicle was designed for specific load capacities The load capacities of your vehicle are indicated by the
237. hus improving fuel consumption 2WD i AWD Switch Operation Operate the 2WD i AWD switch according to the appropriate procedure described below How to turn on 2WD i AWD switch 2WD i AWD switch will activate when the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to ON From 2WD to i AWD Push the 2WD i AWD switch in and the i AWD indicator will come on Fed AWD From i AWD 2WD Push the 2WD i AWD switch so that it releases and the i AWD indicator will turn off 57L30044 NOTE The 2WD i AWD switch can be operated when the vehicle is either stopped or moving Make sure that the front wheels are the straight ahead position when operat ing the 2WD i AWD switch While making turns or accelerating and decelerating operating the 2WD i AWD switch or pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ACC or LOCK in the iI AWD mode may cause a shock but this is not a system mal function When you operate your vehicle under conditions that involve wheel spin such as driving off road in the sand or water or when a wheel has run off the road the difference in the amount of revolution between front wheels and rear wheels increases wheels run idle If this state continues the oil temperature of the driving system parts increases The i AWD warning light warns of this condition by blinking At the same time the informati
238. ifferential oil i AWD Transfer oil of CVT model i AWD m S API GL 5 Hypoid lt 80W 90 75W 85 gt C 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 H F 22 4 14 32 50 68 86 104 57L71008 API GRADE Manual transaxle GL 4 Rear differential oil GL 5 Hypoid i AWD Transfer oil gear oil i AWD CVT INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Manual transaxle EXAMPLE d Transfer case i AWD 80J2083 57L71006 1 Oil filler and level plug 7 22 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Rear differential i AWD 57L71009 1 Oil filler and level plug Tightening torque Oil Filler Plug 27 Nm 19 5 lb ft 2 7 kg m Manual transaxle 23 Nm 16 6 lb ft 2 3 kg m Transfer Rear differential 7 23 Gear Oil Level Check The manual transaxle transfer gears i AWD CVT and rear differential i AWD are lubricated with gear oil To check the gear oil level in any of the above locations use the following procedure 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface Set parking brake and stop the engine 2 Remove the oil filler plug 1 For the manual transaxle 3 If gear oil flow from the plug hole the oil level is correct Reinstall the plug If gear oil do not flow from the plug hole add oil through the filler plug hole until a little oil flow from the plug hole For the transfer and rear di
239. ild restraint system 2 51 If your LATCH restraint has rigid lower con necting bars these general instructions apply 1 If possible fold the seatback rearward for easier installation EXAMPLE 78F114 2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat inserting the connecting bars through the slots in the seat cushion or the slots in the seatback bottom EXAMPLE BEES 54G183 3 Use your hands to carefully align the connecting bar tips with the anchors Take care not to pinch your fingers BEFORE DRIVING Installation of Child Restraint with EXAMPLE EXAMPLE Top Strap 98 5 Grasp the front of the child restraint and 54G184 4 Push the child restraint toward the AN 57L21048 anchors so that the connecting bar tips are partially hooked to the anchors Use your hands to confirm the position push the child restraint forcefully to latch the connecting bars Make sure they are securely latched by trying to move the child restraint system in all directions especially forward 6 Return the seatback if folded Attach the top tether strap if applicable A WARNING The seatback should always be Some child restraint systems require the use of a top strap Top strap anchor brack ets are provided in your vehicle at the loca tions shown in the illustrations Install the child restraint system as follows
240. iles x 1000 7 5 15 22 5 30 37 5 45 52 5 60 67 5 75 pa a e ometer c x 1000 125 25 375 50 625 75 875 100 1125 125 months 7 5 15 22 5 30 37 5 45 52 5 60 67 5 75 CHASSIS AND BODY 1 Clutch for manual transaxle Pedal and fluid level l 2 Brake discs and pads front rear 8 Brake hoses and pipes l 4 Brake fluid level check replacement R 1 5 Brake pedal stroke check adjustment l l 6 Parking brake lever and cable Lever movement check adjustment 1 1 7 Tires including tire rotation l 1 8 Wheel discs 9 Suspension system 1 l 10 Propeller shafts i AWD Drive axle boots l l l l 11 Manual transaxle oil Level check amp replacement Genuine SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 l Other than SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 R R 12 Continuously variable transaxle CVT Fluid level l l Fluid hose 13 Transfer oil i AWD l R l 14 Rear differential oil i AWD R 15 Steering system Steering wheel movement linkage l 16 Power steering if equipped l l l l 17 All latches hinges and locks 1 1 1 18 Air conditioner filter element if equipped R
241. includ ing the instrument panel top and trunk for the request switch warning buzzer remote controller reminder function to work 57L21017 2 10 BEFORE DRIVING NOTE Even with the remote controller within the inside sensing area the request switch warning buzzer remote controller reminder function may not work under any of the following conditions as the presence of the remote controller may not be sensed The battery of the remote controller is low The remote controller is influenced by strong radio waves or noise The remote controller is in contact with or covered by a metallic object The remote controller is in the glove box or a stowage for small articles such as a door pocket The remote controller is on the top or in front of the instrument panel in the sun visor pocket or on the floor The remote controller may be sensed under any of the following conditions even when the controller is not within the inside sensing area The request switch warning buzzer remote controller reminder function will then work The remote controller is outside the vehicle but very close to it The remote controller is on the instru ment panel top or in the trunk 2 11 Keyless unlocking locking using the trunk lid request switch 57L21010 57L21018 2 80 cm 2 1 2 feet When the remote controler is within approxim
242. ine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select BT A Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Change Name and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select an audio device to be changed and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 6 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Record Name and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 5 52 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 7 Pronounce the name to be used at voice recognition 8 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu 5 53 List of audio devices List Audio The registered name of audio devices are displayed in sequence 1 Press the Off Hook button 6 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select BT A Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 to select List Au
243. ing any part which has been certified under the provisions in the Clean Air Act sec 207 a 2 Maintenance Schedule The following table shows the times when you should perform regular maintenance on your vehicle This table shows in miles kilometers and months when you should perform inspections adjustments lubrica tion and other services These intervals should be shortened if driving is usually done under severe conditions refer to Maintenance Recommended Under Severe Driving Conditions A WARNING SUZUKI recommends that mainte nance on items marked with an aster isk be performed by your authorized SUZUKI dealer or a quali fied service technician If you are qualified you may perform mainte nance on the unmarked items by referring to the instructions in this section If you are not sure whether you can successfully complete any of the unmarked maintenance jobs ask your authorized SUZUKI dealer to do the maintenance for you CAUTION Whenever it becomes necessary to replace parts on your vehicle it is recommended that you use genuine SUZUKI replacement parts or their equivalent INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE A WARNING The shock absorbers are filled with high pressure gas Never attempt to disassemble them or throw them into a fire Avoid storing them near a heater or heating device When scrapping the absorber the gas must be released from the absorber safely Ask your dealer for
244. ing in Turning it clockwise increases the vol ume turning it counterclockwise decreases the volume Lean the VOL switch 9 while a call coming in Leaning to the upper side increases the volume leaning the lower side decreases the volume 4 Turn Dialing by using Redial Callback The last dialed number is dialed NOTE Up to latest 5 calls can be stored for each 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Redial or Callback and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection For calling from the outgoing call record or incoming call record Redial or Callback shall be selected respec tively 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a number and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Dial and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection The selected number is dialed NOTE e Selection of Go Back displays the pre vious menu Pressing the Off Hook button 7 in the 2nd step allows users to forward to the 3rd step with a single motion 5 40 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT e Pressing Confirm after selecting Registration in Phonebook 5 Press the Talk button 6 and pro Store allows the selected number to be A telephone number is registered to
245. ion display in the instrument cluster while the buzzer is sounding BEFORE DRIVING Daytime Running Light D R L System XP 1 2002 2 57L21129 1 D R L indicator light 2 Illumination indicator light The headlights light but are dimmer than the low beam when the following three conditions are all met Also the D R L indi cator light 1 on the instrument panel comes on Conditions for D R L system operation 1 The engine is running 2 The parking brake is released 3 The headlights are off or the lighting switch in the AUTO position and it is light around the light sensor 2 104 BEFORE DRIVING NOTE Be sure to turn the headlights on at night or at any time of the day when driving or weather conditions require the headlights to operate at full brightness and the tail lights to be on Lights On reminder A buzzer sounds to remind you to turn off the lights if they are left on when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to LOCK OFF and the driver s door is opened NOTE The warning and indicator message and the illumination indicator light 2 will be shown on the information display when this reminder is activated 2 105 Front Fog Light Switch if equipped 0 64J058 The front fog light comes on when the fog light switch is pushed in with the headlights are o
246. ipped with a battery that requires infrequent maintenance You will never have to add water You should how ever periodically check the battery battery terminals and battery hold down bracket for corrosion Remove corrosion using a stiff brush and ammonia mixed with water or baking soda mixed with water After removing corrosion rinse with clean water The test indicator on the top of the battery provides information on the condition of the battery If your vehicle is not going to be driven for a month or longer disconnect the cable from the negative terminal of the battery to help prevent discharge Fuses Your vehicle has three types of fuses as described below Main Fuse The main fuse takes current directly from the battery Primary Fuses These fuses are between the main fuse and individual fuses and are for electrical load groups Individual Fuses These fuses are for indi vidual electrical circuits For details on protected circuits refer to the Fuses and Protected Circuits section in this manual To remove a fuse use the fuse puller pro vided in the fuse box 57L71011 Fuses in the Engine Compartment INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE USE THE DESIGNATED FUSES AND RELAYS ONLY 57L71037 NO AMPS FUSE NAME 1 Ignition switch 2 30A Ra
247. ire that has been driven less than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours or more Curb Weight the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and if so equipped air conditioning and addi tional weight optional engine Intended Outboard Sidewall 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manu facturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other side wall of the tire or 2 the outward fac ing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Maximum Inflation Pressure the max imum cold inflation pressure a tire is designed to support in normal service Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight the sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight total load capacity and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight 68 kilo grams times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 shown below Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 shown below Production Options Weight the com bined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 2 3 kilograms in excess of those standard items which they replace not previ ously considered in curb weight or accessory weig
248. ires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pres sure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Continued 3 35 A WARNING Continued Driving on a significantly inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel effi ciency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire nance and it is the driver s responsi bility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale A WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for regular tire pressure inspections Check tire inflation pressures monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified on the vehicle s tire information placard and in the owner s manual Refer to Tires in the INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE section A WARNING If the low tire pressure warning light does not come on when you press the engine switch to change the igni tion mode to ON or comes on and blinks while driving there may be a problem with the tire pressure moni toring system Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer Eve
249. is used to register the vehicle It is also used to assist your dealer when ordering parts or refer ring to special service information Engine Serial Number 60G128 The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the above illustration Safety Certification Label MFO SUZUKI MOTOR CD JAPAN TIRES eve MAX COLO TIRE PRESS FED PN STANDAROS WE UATE or MANUFACTURE SHOW GYWR GAWA M AFRT AR FRY amp RR 52D059 This label contains important safety related information about your vehicle The label is located on the driver s door lock pil lar Emission Compliance Label for U S A EXAMPLE 60A412 The EPA emission compliance label is located under the hood GENERAL INFORMATION Warranties The warranties covering your vehicle are explained in a separate New Vehicle War ranty Information booklet given to you at the time of sale Please read this booklet carefully so you can understand your rights and responsibilities For U S A and Canada The following warranties are provided with your vehicle New Vehicle Limited Warranty Limited Warranty For SUZUKI Parts or Accessories Emission Components Defect Warranty Emission Performance Warranty 10 2 GENERAL INFORMATION On Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data Recorders Your vehicle is equipped with on board comp
250. ithin the switch s operating range If the remote controller is within the operat ing range you can also unlatch and let the trunk lid slightly open by holding the TRUNK LID UNLOCK button on the remote controller pressed for more than 1 second Refer to Keyless Start System Remote Controller in this section The trunk lid request switch 1 operates only to open the trunk lid If you close the trunk lid with the keyless start system remote controller left in the trunk with all the doors locked the trunk will be automatically unlatched CAUTION Check that you have the remote con troller whenever you close the trunk lid or there is a risk of leaving the remote controller inside the closed trunk lid 57L21011 You can unlock the lid by pushing the trunk lid unlatch switch 2 A WARNING Always make sure that the trunk lid is closed and latched securely Other wise it may open unexpectedly while driving Completely closing it also helps keep exhaust gases from enter ing the car Trunk Lid Lock Switch if equipped Internal Trunk Release EXAMPLE 57L21061 3 UNLOCK 4 LOCK This switch is inside the glove box If this switch is pushed to the down position the trunk lid is locked and cannot be opened Push the switch again to unlock the lid 57L21012 There is a release lever located inside the trunk on the rear part of the trunk lid This lever
251. its power source such as when the audio system is removed or the battery is disconnected the system will not operate again unless the PIN is reentered 5 67 Setting the Anti Theft Function 1 Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob 1 to power off 2 Press the Preset buttons 2 1 6 and VOL PUSH POWER knob 1 simulta neously SECURITY is displayed 3 Press the Up button 3 and Preset button 2 1 simultaneously 4 Enter a 4 digit PIN number using the Preset buttons 2 1 4 5 Hold down TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 4 for 1 sec or more NOTE Write down your PIN for the future use Canceling the anti theft feature This operation is to be done when you want to cancel the anti theft function or change your PIN 1 Press the Preset buttons 2 1 6 and the VOL PUSH POWER knob 1 simultaneously 2 Press the Up button 3 and Preset button 2 1 simultaneously 3 Enter a 4 digit PIN number using the Preset buttons 2 1 4 4 Hold down the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 4 for 1 sec or more NOTE To change your PIN first delete your cur rent PIN then set a new one Confirming Your Personal Identification Number PIN When the main power source is discon nected such as when you exchange your battery etc you will have to confirm your PIN to be able to use the audio system 1 Press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to 2 Press the Up button 3 and Preset button 2
252. ity Grades Treadwear Traction AA ABC Temperature B All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform To Federal Safety Requirements in Addition To These Grades 7 33 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled condi tions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative per formance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits Service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on speci fied government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance A WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi tions on
253. ity number PIN The security number PIN is specified Once PIN is specified PIN entry is required when toggling Phonebook between locking and unlocking 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Security and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Set PIN and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection If the PIN is already specified PIN entry is required If the PIN needs to be changed enter the current PIN 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a number for ones digit and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection Determine the tens hundreds and thousands digits in the same manner OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 6 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu Phonebook lock Locking Phonebook disables users from referring to using editing and deleting Phonebook outgoing call record and incoming call record 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main m
254. iv ing the air bag system or the seat belt pretensioner system may not work prop erly Have the air bag system inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible 2 57 Front Air Bags EXAMPLE 80JS026 57L21115 EXAMPLE 7 e 57L21116 The driver s front air bag is located behind the center pad of the steering wheel and the front passengers front air bag is located behind the passengers side of the dashboard The words SRS AIRBAG are molded into the air bag covers to identify the location of the air bags Frontal collision range Front air bags will not inflate 60G032 Front air bags are designed to inflate only in severe frontal collisions 65D236 Front air bags will probably not inflate 65D237 BEFORE DRIVING Front air bags are not designed to inflate in rear impacts side impacts rollovers or minor frontal collisions since they would offer no protection in those types of acci dents Remember since air bags deploy only one time during an accident seat belts are needed to restrain occupants from further movements during the acci dent Therefore an air bag is NOT a substitute for seat belts To maximize your protection ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS Be aware that no system can prevent all pos sible injuries that may occur in an accident A WARNING An air bag supplements or adds to the crash prot
255. keyless start system warning light flashing 2 Master warning indicator light flash ing NOTE f the warning is given locate the remote controller as soon as possible e Any attempt to start the engine will fail while the warning is active The mes sage appearing on the information dis play in the instrument cluster will also indicate this condition Refer to Informa tion display in the Before Driving sec tion for details e Flashing of the immobilizer keyless start system warning light and the master warning indicator light should stop shortly after the remote controller is brought back inside the vehicle If they do not stop flashing change the ignition OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE mode to LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch and then perform the engine starting operation Always keep the remote controller with you as the driver Interior Workable Area for Engine Starting Power Supply Mode Selec tion and Remote Controller Out side Warning 57L31004 1 Interior workable area The interior workable area for these func tions is defined as all the interior spaces except for the space above the instrument panel NOTE Even when the remote controller is in the interior workable area if it is in any of 3 6 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE the following conditions you may not be able to start the engine or select the power supply modes and the
256. l drive i AWD system The drive mode will then automatically switch to the two wheel drive 2WD mode The light flashes if the vehicle is in any of the following conditions and the drive train mode will then automatically switch to the 2WD mode Wheels of different diameters are fitted to the vehicle Drive train components overheat as a result of spinning of a drive wheel in the mud or snow The light should normally come on when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON and continue to light or go out depending on the drive train mode engaged NOTE Should the light flash immediately move the vehicle to a safe place and park it there to protect the drive train components If you let the engine run at idle for a while the light will stop flashing and then stay lit and the i AWD mode will resume 2 77 Electric Power Steering Warning Light 80J408 This light comes on while the engine is running if there is any problem with the electric power steering system The light should normally come on when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON and go out as Soon as the engine is started NOTE e The following conditions may indicate a problem with the electric power steering system In the event of any of these con ditions have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer The light comes on while driving The light d
257. l or push down the RES SET switch 3 To Change Cruising Speed Using the accelerator pedal To reset at a faster cruising speed acceler ate to the desired speed using the acceler ator pedal and push down the RES SET switch 3 The new speed will be main tained Using the brake pedal To reset at a slower cruising speed decel erate to the desired speed using the brake pedal and push down the RES SET switch 3 The new speed will be main tained NOTE When the brake pedal is depressed the SET indicator light goes off until reset the cruising speed Using the cruise control switch To reset at a faster cruising speed press repeatedly or hold push up the RES SET switch 3 Vehicle speed will 3 22 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE steadily increase When you release the switch the new speed will be maintained To reset at a slower cruising speed press repeatedly or hold push down the RES SET switch 3 until the vehicle has slowed to the desired speed then release the switch The new speed will be main tained NOTE You can adjust the set speed by approxi mately 1 0 mph 1 6 km h by pushing a cruise control switch quickly Cancellation of the Cruise Control The SET indicator light will go off and the cruise control will be canceled temporarily with following procedures Push the CANCEL switch 2 Depress the brake pedal For manual transax
258. l system is designed to assist you in starting to move up steep or slippery hills When you start to move up a hill the system helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling downward while you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal A WARNING Do not rely excessively on the hill hold control system The hill hold control system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downward on a hill under all load or road condi tions Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling downward Failure to pay attention and depress the brake pedal to hold the vehicle on a hill when necessary may result in loss of control or an accident Do not use the hill hold control sys tem to bring the vehicle to a stop on a hill The hill hold control system activates for a maximum of about 2 seconds if your foot is moved from the brake pedal when the fol lowing condition are all met 1 The gearshift lever is in a forward gear or reverse gear 2 The parking brake is released 3 The vehicle is on an upward incline NOTE You may hear a sound coming from the engine when the hill hold control system is activated This sound is normal and does not indicate a malfunction HILL HOLD DISABLE 57L31023 If the message shown in the above illustra tion appears on the information display there may be a problem with the hill hold control system your vehicle ins
259. le vehicle cover can help protect the finish from the harmful UV rays in sunlight and can reduce the amount of dust and air pollution reaching the surface Your SUZUKI dealer can help you select the right cover for your vehicle 9 2 APPEARANCE CARE Vehicle Cleaning 76G044S A WARNING When cleaning the interior or exterior of the vehicle NEVER USE flammable solvents such lacquer thinners gas oline benzene or cleaning materials such as bleaches and strong house hold detergents The materials could cause personal injury or damage to the vehicle Cleaning Interior Vinyl upholstery Prepare a solution of soap or mild deter gent mixed with warm water Apply the solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to loosen dirt Rub the surface with a clean 9 3 damp cloth to remove dirt and the soap solution If some dirt still remains on the surface repeat this procedure Fabric upholstery Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner Using a mild soap solution rub stained areas with a clean damp cloth To remove soap rub the areas again with a cloth dampened with water Repeat this until the stain is removed or use a commercial fab ric cleaner for tougher stains If you use a fabric cleaner carefully follow the manu facturer s instructions and precautions Leather upholstery Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner Using a mild soap or saddle soap
260. le depress the clutch pedal For CVT downshift from 3rd to 2nd in the manual mode The vehicle speed falls more than about 20 percent from the set speed Any time the vehicle speed falls below 25 mph 40 km h When the vehicle skids and ESP if equipped is activated To resume the previously set speed push up the RES SET switch 3 and turn on the SET indicator light Besides the vehicle speed has to be above 25 mph 40 3 23 km h when the vehicle is not in the above conditions To turn off the cruise control system push the CRUISE switch 1 and make sure the CRUISE indicator light is off Also if the malfunction indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on or blinks the cruise control system will be turned off NOTE If you turn off the cruise control system the previously set speed in the memory is cleared Reset your cruising speed again Parking Sensors if equipped 1 57L40019 1 Symbol representing an obstacle detected by parking sensor This symbol represents an obstacle that is located to the right rear at the vehicle The parking sensor system uses ultra sonic sensors to detect obstacles near the rear bumper If obstacles are sensed while you are parking or moving the vehicle slowly the system warns you by sounding a buzzer and displaying sym bols representing the obstacles on the information display in the instrument cluster Th
261. ler is in contact with or covered by a metal object When a radio wave type remote keyless entry is used nearby When the remote controller is placed near an electronic device such as per sonal computer Some additional precautions you should take and information you should be aware of are Make sure the key is stowed in the remote controller If the remote controller becomes unreliable you will not be able to lock or unlock the doors or start the engine Be sure that the driver always carries the remote controller e If you lose one of the remote controllers ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible for a replacement Be sure to have your dealer program the new remote controller code in your vehi cle s memory so that the old code is erased or perform the programming pro cedure yourself according to the instruc tions in this section You can use up to four remote controllers and keys for your vehicle Ask an autho rized SUZUKI dealer for details The battery life of the remote controller is about two years but it can vary depending on usage conditions Request Switch Warning Buzzer This outside buzzer beeps for about 2 sec onds in the following conditions to warn you that the request switch is not working The request switch is pressed after all doors are closed with the ignition mode changed to ACC or ON by pressing the engine switch The request switch is pressed in any
262. lers ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos sible for a replacement Be sure to have your dealer program the new remote controller code in your vehicle s memory so that the old code is erased TRUNK LID UNLOCK button 3 func tion Push and hold the TRUNK LID UNLOCK button pressed for more than 1 second the trunk lid will be unlatched and open slightly NOTE The trunk lid cannot be operated with the remote controller if the engine switch is in any other ignition mode than LOCK OFF PANIC button 4 function This function is to get the attention of oth ers Press the PANIC button 4 for more than 1 second The headlights and taillights will blink for about 30 seconds Also the horn will sound intermittently for about 30 sec onds at the same time To cancel the PANIC mode press any button PANIC LOCK UNLOCK or TRUNK LID UNLOCK on the remote con troller You can also press the engine switch to cancel the PANIC mode NOTE The PANIC button function will not acti vate when you have changed the ignition mode to ACC by pressing the engine switch Keyless unlocking locking using the request switches EXAMPLE 57L21014 When the remote controller is within the operating range described in this section you can lock or unlock the doors by push ing the request switch 1 on the door han dle of the driver s door or front passenger s door To lock all doo
263. letely n case of emergency you can stop the engine by depressing the engine switch more than 3 seconds while the vehicle in motion NOTE Except in emergency do not stop the engine while the vehicle in motion The steering and braking operation will require more efforts when the engine stopped Refer to Braking in the YOUR VEHICLE section OPERATING Starting a Cold Engine With your foot off the accelerator pedal crank the engine by pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to START CAUTION If the engine doesn t start on the first try wait about 15 seconds before try ing again After pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to START the starter cranks the engine for about 12 seconds before it can start the engine If the engine fails to start at the first attempt wait about 15 seconds then try again while keeping the engine switch pressed while pressing down the accelerator pedal to 1 3 of its travel Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts If the engine still does not start try holding the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while cranking This should clear the engine if it is flooded If you are unable to start the engine using this procedure consult your SUZUKI dealer OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Starting a Warm Engine Use the same procedure as for Starting a Cold Engine If the master warning light flashes and the engine
264. level check replacement 5 Brake pedal stroke check adjustment 6 Parking brake lever and cable Lever movement check adjustment 7 Tires including tire rotation 8 Wheel discs 9 Wheel bearings 10 Suspension system 11 Propeller shafts i AWD Drive axle boots 12 Manual transaxle oil Level check amp replacement Genuine SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 Other than SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 13 Continuously variable transaxle CVT Fluid level front rear Fluid hose 14 Transfer oil i AWD 15 Rear differential oil i AWD 16 Steering system Steering wheel movement 17 Power steering if equipped 18 All latches hinges and locks 19 Air conditioner filter element if equipped linkage Fluid deterioration check 4 7 13 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE R Replace or change 1 Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary miles x 1000 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 Interval This interval should be judged by odometer km x 1000 reading or months whichever comes first 70 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 months 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 CHASSIS AND BODY 1 2 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ftt 2 14 15 16 17 18 19 Continuously variable transaxle CVT Clutch for manual transaxle Pedal and fluid level Brake discs and pads Brake ho
265. ll occupants including the driver should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash 2 27 EXAMPLE 57L21035 Each front seat is equipped with a head restraint die 57L21036 2 1 head restraint 2 bars 3 release knob To raise the head restraint pull upward on the restraint until it clicks To lower the restraint push down on the restraint while holding in the release knob 3 If a head restraint must be removed for cleaning replacement etc push in the release knob and pull the head restraint all the way out NOTE It may be necessary to recline the seat back to provide enough overhead clear ance to remove the head restraint 4 57L21037 To reinstall the head restraint insert the head restraint bars into the holes 4 and push the head restraint down Front Seat Heater if equipped 57L21038 1 Driver s seat heater switch 2 Passengers seat heater switch With the ignition mode changed to ON by pressing the engine switch push in one or both of the seat heater switches to warm corresponding seat s When a seat heater switch is pushed the heater inside the corresponding seat operates Heating intensity can be adjusted to one of th
266. ller cap For the approximate capacity of the oil refer to the Capacities item in the SPECIFICATIONS section 2 Start the engine and look carefully for leaks at the oil filter and drain plug Run the engine at various speeds for at least 5 minutes 3 Stop the engine and wait about 5 min utes Check the oil level again and add oil if necessary Check for leaks again CAUTION When replacing the oil filter it is rec ommended that you use a genuine SUZUKI replacement filter If you use an after market filter make sure it is of equivalent quality and carefully fol low the manufacturer s instructions and precautions EXAMPLE 83E010 CAUTION Oil leaks from around the oil filter or drain plug indicate incorrect installa tion or gasket damage If you find any leaks or are not sure that the filter has been properly tightened have the vehicle inspected by your SUZUKI dealer INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Engine Coolant Selection of Coolant CAUTION SUZUKI LLC Super Blue coolant SUZUKI LLC Super Blue coolant is already diluted to the proper percent age Do not dilute with distilled water additionally Doing so may result in the possibility of freezing coolant and or overheating To maintain optimum performance and durability of your engine use SUZUKI Genuine Coolant or equivalent NOTE If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC Super B
267. ller outside warning works NOTE The immobilizer keyless start system is normal if this light goes out in 2 seconds after pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON If the light fails to go out in this period there is something wrong with the system There is also a problem with the system if the light remains on for 5 seconds after the engine switch is pressed when the switch is in any other ignition mode than ON Illumination or flashing of the light may be accompanied by a message on the information display in the instrument cluster NOTE e If you lose your keyless start system remote controller see your SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible to have the lost one deactivated then have the new remote controller made by them e If you own other vehicles with keyless start system remote controller keep those remote controllers away from the engine switch when using your SUZUKI or the engine may not be started because they may interfere with your SUZUKT s immobilizer system e In case of attaching any metal objects to the keyless start system remote control ler it may not start the engine BEFORE DRIVING CAUTION The keyless start system remote con troller is a sensitive electronic instru ment To avoid damaging the keyless Start system remote controller Do not expose it to impacts mois ture or high temperature such as on the dashboard under direct sun light Keep the k
268. llow the above steps in reverse to restore the original state Front fog light if equipped 1 Start the engine To facilitate bulb replacement turn the steering wheel away from the front fog light whose bulb is to be replaced then turn off the engine EXAMPLE 57L70039 2 Remove the screw 1 7 50 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE 57L70041 4 Remove the part of the bumper 3 indi cated in the illustration 7 51 EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 80JM071 5 Disconnect the coupler with pushing the lock release Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it 6 Replace the bulb then follow the above steps in reverse to restore the original state Side marker lights 1 Start the engine To facilitate bulb replacement turn the steering wheel away from the side marker light whose bulb is to be replaced then turn off the engine 2 Remove the screw 1 57L70039 EXAMPLE 3 Remove the screws 2 57L70040 57L70041 4 Remove the part of the bumper 3 indi cated in the illustration 57L71030 5 Disconnect the coupler with pushing the lock release Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it 6 Replace the bulb then follow the above steps in reverse to restore the original state Front turn signal lights 1 Start the engine To facilitate bulb replacement turn the stee
269. lock Phonebook is unlocked To implement Phonebook unlocking pronounce the PIN number and subsequently Confirm to implement the unlocking Add entry Phonebook add entry Change name Phonebook change name Phonebook Delete entry Phonebook delete entry List names Phonebook list names Set speed dial Phonebook set speed dial Delete speed dial Phonebook delete speed dial 1 If a PIN number is not assigned pronounce Set PIN and subsequently a 4 digit PIN number 5 60 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Bluetooth Hands Free Set up List phone 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Function Telephone connection Pair phone 1 Pronounce phone name and Confirm to confirm the operation 2 Pronounce Phone only or Internal audio and subsequently Confirm to confirm the operation Select phone Telephone selection Pronounce phone name and Confirm to confirm the operation Change of telephone name Change name 1 Pronounce phone name and Confirm to confirm the operation 2 Pronounce new phone name and Confirm to confirm the operation Set Phone setup Reading of telephone names in sequence Pressing the Talk button during reading allows users to select the tele phone that is read at the moment and
270. low relay Right 29 Blank MAIN 30 _ Blank In engine FUSE 31 x Blank compartment EUN 32 Air conditioning compressor relay 33 Rear defogger relay 34 z Blank 35 Windshield wiper relay 2 11 4 FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS 28 34 24 31 If 25 19 26 57171037 COLOR SIZE AMPS FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT MAIN FUSE BOX Blank wo NJ Windshield wiper relay 1 C2 Starting motor relay Ww Fuel pump relay Radiator fan relay 3 compartment A Radiator fan relay 1 AB Door mirror heater relay oa Radiator fan relay 2 A A Main relay A l i i i i i i 2 Throttle motor relay 11 5 FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS USE DESIGNATED FUSES 57L70034 COLOR SIZE AMPS FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT 1 PINK 30 P W Power window 2 BLUE 15 WIP Windshield washer motor 3 YELLOW 20 S H Seat heater 4 WHITE 25 FR WIP Windshield wiper motor Under
271. luding interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 3 39 Traveling to CANADA Please note that service for the tire pres sure monitoring system may not be avail able in CANADA should there be any problems or malfunctions in the system DRIVING TIPS DRIVING TIPS scisssccsssatuescastinsinsssvedeciainansdcaiaseanedsscdacinestavandasidecucaease 4 1 Catalytic Converter 4 1 Improving Fuel Economy 4 2 Highway Driving 4 3 Driving on Hills 4 3 Driving on Slippery Roads 4 4 60G409 DRIVING TIPS 52D078S A WARNING Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times Even though air bags are equipped at the front seating positions the driver and all passengers should be properly restrained at all times using the seat belts provided Refer to the Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems section for instructions on proper use of the seat belts Never drive while under the influ ence of alcohol or other drugs Alcohol and drugs can seriously impair your ability to drive safely greatly increasing the risk of injury to yo
272. lue follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC Standard Green To see the detail of the mainte nance schedule refer to Periodic Mainte nance Schedule in this section This type of coolant is best for your cooling system as it Helps maintain proper engine tempera ture Gives proper protection against freezing and boiling Gives proper protection against corro sion and rust 7 18 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level at the reserve tank not at the radiator With the Failure to use the proper coolant can dam age your cooling system Your authorized SUZUKI dealer can help you select the A WARNING proper coolant CAUTION To avoid damaging your cooling sys tem Always use a high quality ethylene glycol base phosphate type coolant diluted with distilled water at the correct mixture concentration Make sure that the proper mix is 50 50 coolant to distilled water and in no case higher than 70 30 Concen trations greater than 70 30 coolant to distilled water will cause over heating conditions Do not use straight coolant nor plain water except SUZUKI LLC Super Blue Do not add extra inhibitors or addi tives They may not be compatible with your cooling system Do not mix different types of base coolants Doing so may result in accelerated seal wear and or the possibility of severe overheating and extensive engine CVT damage 7 19 engine c
273. lustration An optional rubber net can be hooked to these hooks to help keep cargo from mov ing around in the luggage compartment during normal driving CAUTION Use the net and rope hooks only for holding light objects Roof Rack Anchors if equipped 80J082 You can use the roof rack anchors to attach the optional roof rack which is avail able at your SUZUKI dealer If you use a roof rack observe the instructions and pre cautions in this section and provided with the roof rack Make sure the roof rack is securely installed To mount various types of cargo such as skis bicycles etc properly use suit able attachments which are available from your SUZUKI dealer Be sure to install the attachments properly and securely according to the instructions provided Do not mount cargo directly on the roof panel The cargo can damage the roof panel 5 92 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT The gross weight of the roof rack plus cargo must not exceed the loading capacity 50 kg 110 Ibs Also do not let the gross vehicle weight fully loaded vehicle including driver passengers cargo roof load and trailer tongue weight exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR listed in the driver s door lock pillar Mount and secure the cargo onto the roof rack properly according to the instructions provided Be sure to stow the heaviest items at the bottom and dis tribute the cargo as evenly as p
274. ly drive on salted roads your vehicle should be washed at least once a month during the winter If you live near the ocean your vehicle should be washed at least once a month throughout the year For washing instructions refer to the Vehi cle Cleaning section Remove foreign material deposits Foreign material such as salts chemicals road oil or tar tree sap bird droppings and industrial fall out may damage the finish of your vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces Remove these types of deposits as quickly as possible If these deposits are difficult to wash off an additional cleaner may be required Be sure that any cleaner you use is not harmful to painted surfaces and is specifically intended for your purposes Follow the manufacturer s directions when using these special cleaners Repair finish damage Carefully examine your vehicle for damage to the painted surfaces especially if it is used off road Should you find any chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting If the chips or scratches have gone through to the bare metal have a qualified body shop make the repair Keep passenger and cargo compart ments clean Moisture dirt or mud can accumulate under the floor mats and may cause corro sion Occasionally check under these mats to ensure that this area is clean and dry More frequent checks are necessary if the vehicle is used off road or in wet weather
275. ly inspection in OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC Super Blue follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC Standard Green 7 8 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE R Replace or change 1 Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary miles x 1000 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 Interval This interval should be judged by odometer km x 1000 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 reading or months whichever comes first months 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 CHASSIS AND BODY 1 Clutch for manual transaxle Pedal and fluid level 2 Brake discs and pads 3 Brake hoses and pipes 4 Brake fluid level check replacement 5 Brake pedal stroke check adjustment 6 Parking brake lever and cable Lever movement check adjustment 7 Tires including tire rotation 8 Wheel discs 9 Wheel bearings 10 Suspension system 11 Propeller shafts i AWD Drive axle boots 12 Manual transaxle oil Level check amp replacement Genuine SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 Other than SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 13 Continuously variable transaxle CVT Fluid level front rear Fluid hose 14 Transfer oil i AWD 15 Rear differential oil i AWD 16 Steering system Steering wheel movement 17 Power steering if equipped 18 All latches hinges and locks 19 Air conditioner filter
276. ly is not obvious Any seat belt assembly which was not in use during a colli sion should be replaced if it does not function properly it is damaged in any way or the seat belt pretension ers were activated Child Restraint Systems 60G332 65D202 BEFORE DRIVING Infant restraint rear seat only EXAMPLE 80JC007 80JC008 2 44 BEFORE DRIVING SUZUKI highly recommends that you use a child restraint system to restrain infants and small children Many different types of child restraint systems are available make sure that the restraint system you select meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan dards All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by either seat belts lap belts or the lap portion of lap shoulder belts or by special rigid lower anchor bars built into the seats Whenever possible SUZUKI recommends that child restraint systems be installed on the rear seat According to accident statistics chil dren are safer when properly restrained in rear seating positions than in front seating positions If you must use a front facing child restraint in the front passenger s seat be sure to move the front passenger s seat as far back as possible 2 45 65D607 A WARNING Do not install a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger s seat If the passenger s air bag inflates a child in a rear facing
277. mains stuck after a few minutes of rocking get another vehicle to pull your vehicle out A WARNING Do not allow anyone to stand near the vehicle when you are rocking it and do not spin the wheels faster than an indicated 40 km h 25 mph on the speedometer Personal injury and or vehicle damage may result from spin ning the wheels too fast CAUTION Release the accelerator pedal when operating the gearshift lever Operat ing the lever with the engine racing can damage the gears 4 4 DRIVING TIPS CAUTION Do not continue rocking the vehicle for more than a few minutes Pro longed rocking can cause engine overheating transaxle or transfer case damage or tire damage Tire Chains Tire chains should only be used if they are needed to increase traction or are required by law Make sure that the chains you use are small link chains or cable type chains and are the correct size for your vehicle s tires Also make sure that there is enough clearance between the fenders and the chains as installed on the tires Install the chains on the front tires tightly according to the chain manufacturer s instructions Retighten the chains after driving about 1 0 km 1 2 mile if neces sary With the chains installed drive slowly CAUTION If you hear the chains hitting against the vehicle body while driving stop and tighten them If your vehicle is equipped with full wheel caps remove the wheel caps befor
278. mat could be damaged and the front passenger sensing system may not work prop erly A WARNING The front passenger sensing system may not work properly in the follow ing situations The occupant is sitting near the dashboard or is not sitting in the proper position Objects placed under the seat are pushing up on the seat cushion A WARNING If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator on the instrument panel turns on even though there is no occupant or an adult occupant in the front pas senger s seat it means that some thing may be wrong with the passenger sensing system Have the system inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible A WARNING Do not spill any liquids on the seat Liquids can damage the sensors under the front seat Have the front passenger s sensor mat inspected by your dealer after a collision Do not replace the front seats If you replace them the air bags and front passenger sensing system may not work properly Do not use a seat cover If you use a seat cover the front passenger sensing system may not work prop erly BEFORE DRIVING How the System Works In a frontal collision the crash sensors will detect rapid deceleration and send a signal to the controller If the controller judges that the deceleration represents a severe frontal crash the controller will trigger the inflators The controller also judges Whether the front air bags should deploy at
279. me in a parked vehi cle with the engine running make sure the air intake selector is set to FRESH AIR and the blower is at high speed Avoid operating the vehicle with the trunk open If it is necessary to operate the vehicle with the trunk open make sure the sunroof if equipped and all windows are closed and the blower is at high speed with the air intake selector set to FRESH AIR To allow proper operation of your vehicle s ventilation system keep the air inlet grille in front of the windshield clear of snow leaves or other obstructions at all times Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear of snow and other material to help reduce the buildup of exhaust gases under the vehicle This is particularly important when parked in blizzard conditions Have the exhaust system inspected periodically for damage and leaks Any damage or leaks should be repaired immediately Daily Inspection Checklist Before Driving 1 Make sure that windows mirrors lights and reflectors are clean and unob structed 2 Visually check the tires for the following points the depth of the tread groove abnormal wear cracks and damage loose wheel nuts existence of foreign material such as nails stones etc Refer to Tires in INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE section for details 3 Look for fluid oil leaks NOTE It is normal for water to drip from the air conditioning system after use 4 Make sure the
280. menu Reset to factory defaults You can delete all registered data and reset the all changement to the factory default 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select System Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Initialize and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 6 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Selection of telephone Select Phone The phone to be used can be selected 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selec tion 4 Turn th
281. mes whether or not air bags are mounted at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash A WARNING If the AIR BAG light in the instrument cluster ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system If this ever happens have the vehicle ser viced immediately because the air bags may not offer the protection for which they were designed equipped with a sensor to monitor whether or not the front passenger s seat belt is fas tened A WARNING When the buckle sensor has a prob lem the AIR BAG light on the instru ment cluster will turn on If this happens deployment of the front passenger s air bag will not include consideration of whether the front passenger s seat belt is fastened or not Have the air bag system inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible Front Passenger Sensing System The front passenger sensing system will turn off the front passenger s front air bag and seat belt pretensioner under certain conditions This system works using a sen sor mat that is part of the front passenger s seat The front passenger sensing system is designed to detect whether an occupant is present in the seat and if an occupant is present to determine whether the front passengers front air bag and seat belt pre tensioner should be enabled or disabled turned off NOTE The front passenger s side air bag
282. must be completed within 15 seconds 2 Turn the knob control on the lighting control lever to the 2002 position 5 and then to the OFF position 4 Repeat this operation 4 times with the control finally set to the OFF position 3 Push the lock end forward end of the power door lock switch 1 to lock the doors and then the unlock end back ward end to unlock the doors Repeat these operations 3 times and finally push the lock end of the switch 2 17 Every time you perform the series of the above steps the state of the theft deterrent alarm system changes from the currently selected one to the other You can check whether the system is enabled or disabled by the number of interior buzzer beeps at the end of the procedure as follows System state Number of beeps Disabled Once Enabled 4 times NOTE e You cannot disable the theft deterrent alarm system while it is in the armed condition If you fail to complete the operations in step 2 and 3 within 15 seconds per form the procedure again from the beginning Make sure all doors are closed when performing the above procedure Windows Power Window Controls Driver s side EXAMPLE 57L21024 The power windows can be operated when the ignition mode is changed to ON by pressing the engine switch The driver s door has switches 1 2 4 5 to operate the drivers window the front passenger s window the rear
283. n 60A004 Your vehicle requires regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum rating of 87 pump octane R M 2 method In some areas the only fuels that are available are oxy genated fuels Oxygenated fuels which meet the mini mum octane requirement and the require ments described below may be used in your vehicle without jeopardizing the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE Oxygenated fuels are fuels which contain oxygen carrying additives such as MTBE or alcohol 1 1 Gasoline Containing MTBE Unleaded gasoline containing MTBE methyl tertiary butyl ether may be used in your vehicle if the MTBE content is not greater than 15 This oxygenated fuel does not contain alcohol Gasoline Ethanol blends Blends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol grain alcohol also known as gasohol may be used in your vehicle if the ethanol content is not greater than 10 Gasoline Methanol blends Fuels containing 5 or less methanol wood alcohol may be suitable for use in your vehicle if they contain cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors Do NOT USE fuels containing more than 5 methanol under any circumstances Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels are not the responsibility of SUZUKI and may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fuel Pump Labeling In some states pumps that dispense oxy genated fuels are required to be labeled for the type and perc
284. n only an authorized SUZUKI dealer should be allowed to service or replace your air bags Please remind anyone who services your SUZUKI that it has air bags Service on or around air bag components or wiring must be performed only by an authorized SUZUKI dealer Improper ser vice could result in unintended air bag deployment or could render the air bags inoperative Either of these two conditions may result in severe injury BEFORE DRIVING To prevent damage or unintended inflation of the air bag system be sure the battery is disconnected and the engine switch has been in the LOCK OFF mode for at least 90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on your SUZUKI Do not touch air bag system components or wires The wires are wrapped with yel low tape or yellow tubing and the couplers are yellow for easy identification Scrapping a car that has an undeployed air bag can be hazardous Ask your dealer body repair shop or scrap yard for help with disposal 2 66 BEFORE DRIVING If it is necessary to modify the advanced front air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities owners in the con tinental United States can call American Suzuki toll free at 1 800 934 0934 or write to American Suzuki Motor Corporation Automotive Customer Relations 3251 East Imperial Highway Brea CA 92821 6795 If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canada please contact the Suzuki Canada Cus tomer Relations Department
285. n for proper tire rotation procedures 3 21 Cruise Control if equipped 57L31017 The cruise control system allows you to maintain a steady speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal The controls for operating the cruise control system are on the steering wheel You can use the cruise control system with the following conditions For manual transaxle vehicle the gear position is in 4th 5th or 6th For a CVT vehicle the select lever is in D position or the gear is in 3rd 4th 5th or 6th with the lever in the M position The vehicle speed is about 25 mph 40 km h or higher A WARNING To help avoid loss of vehicle control do not use the cruise control system when driving in heavy traffic on slip pery or winding roads or on steep downgrades 57L40013 1 CRUISE switch 2 CANCEL switch 3 RES SET switch To Set Cruising Speed 1 Turn on the cruise control system by pushing the CRUISE switch 1 When the CRUISE indicator light comes on you can set cruising speed 2 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed 3 Push down the RES SET switch 3 and turn on the SET indicator light Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the set speed will be maintained A WARNING If the cruising speed is set by acci dent you cannot decelerate or could loose control of the vehicle Thi
286. n and the beams set to the low beam position Turn Signal Control Lever 57L21128 A WARNING To avoid possible injury do not oper ate controls by reaching through the steering wheel Turn Signal Operation After changing the ignition mode to ON by pressing the engine switch move the lever up or down to activate the right or left turn signals Normal turn signal EXAMPLE 57L21066 Move the lever all the way upward or down ward to signal When the turn is com pleted the signal will cancel and the lever will return to its normal position Lane change signal EXAMPLE 57L21067 Move the lever part way in the direction to turn and hold it there The turn signal and its indicator flash while the lever is held at the moved posi tion The turn signal and its indicator flash three times even if you return the lever immedi ately after moving it NOTE You can customize the setting for the num ber of times of flashing of the turn signal and its indicator 1 to 4 times Please ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer for the cus tomization BEFORE DRIVING Hazard Warning Switch EXAMPLE 57L21068 Push in the hazard warning switch to acti vate the hazard warning lights All turn sig nal lights and both turn signal indicators will flash simultaneously To turn off the lights push the switch again Use the hazard warning lights to warn oth
287. n could use the sunroof switches and get trapped by the sunroof A WARNING Never drive with the glove box lid open It could cause injury if an acci dent occurs 5 85 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Overhead Console CAUTION Do not drive with the overhead con sole lid open or the articles stowed inside could fall down during brak ing acceleration or in the event of a collision Always close the lid after putting something into or taking something out of the console If you park your vehicle outdoors in direct sunlight or in hot weather the overhead console can get very hot since it is close to the roof So when parking in such conditions Do not leave eyeglasses in the 57L51030 The glove box light stays on while the lid is 57151031 overhead console The heat Use this stowage to keep small articles distort plastic lenses or frames You can open the lid 1 by pressing the Do not place flammable items raised portion on it such as a lighter in the overhead console The heat may cause a fire Do not apply undue force to the lid when closing it Doing so could break the lid and articles inside Place glasses in a case when stow ing them in the overhead console or the lenses may be damaged 5 86 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Lidded Instrument Panel Box 57L51032 Use this stowage to keep small articles Y
288. n if the light turns off after blinking indicating that the monitor ing system has recovered make sure to have an authorized SUZUKI dealer check the system A WARNING The load rating of your tires is reduced at lower inflation pressures If your tires become even moderately under inflated the vehicle load may exceed the load rating of the tires which can lead to tire failure The low tire pressure warning light will not alert you of this condition The warn ing light will only come on when one or more of your tires become signifi cantly under inflated Check adjust your tire inflation pressure at least once a month Refer to Tires in the INSPECTION AND MAINTE NANCE section A WARNING If the low tire pressure warning light comes on and stays on reduce your speed and avoid abrupt steering and braking Stop in a safe place as soon ur possible and check your tires f you have a flat tire replace it with the spare tire Refer to Jacking Instructions in the EMERGENCY SERVICE section Refer to Replacing Tires and or Wheels for instructions on how to restore normal operation of the tire pres sure monitoring system after you have had a flat tire If one or more of your tires is under inflated adjust the inflation pressure in all of your tires to the recommended inflation pressure as Soon as possible Be aware that driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire can cause the tire to overhea
289. n it It various parts of the vehicle body can be damaged even when wiped with tissue paper e If the garnishing is damaged you repair it to some extent by using a mate rial such as headlight polish commer cially available Do not use any chemical products that contain the following substances for cleaning as these will cause cracks and deformation to the garnishing Also be sure to thoroughly read the precautions on the product s container Solvents such as benzine gasoline paint thinner sticker removing solvent etc the instrument panel and console B taining an abrasive material These will 9 4 APPEARANCE CARE Washing A WARNING Never attempt to wash and wax your vehicle with the engine run ning If your vehicle is equipped with an rain sensing wiper system place the wiper control lever in the OFF position If the lever is left in the AUTO position the wipers could unexpectedly operate and cause an injury and could also be damaged When cleaning the underside of the body and fender where there may be sharp edged parts you should wear gloves and a long sleeved shirt to protect your hands and arms from being cut After washing your vehicle care fully test the brakes before driving to make sure they have maintained their normal effectiveness follow the CAUTION When washing the vehicle avoid directing steam or hot water of more than 8
290. n the maximum rest while driving or use the clutch Downshifting Km h mph allowable speeds for the next lower to keep the vehicle stationary on a gear or severe engine damage can slope Depress the clutch fully result when shifting When shifting or starting off do not 2nd to 1st 50 81 A WARNING race the engine Racing the engine can shorten engine life and affect Reduce your speed and downshift smooth shifting to a lower gear before going down 3rd to 2nd 90 56 a long or steep hill Downshifting will allow the engine to provide braking Avoid riding the brakes or Ath to 3rd 135 84 they may overheat resulting in brake failure When driving on slippery roads be sure to slow down before down 5th to 4th 185 115 shifting Large sudden changes in engine speed may cause loss of traction which could cause you to lose control Make sure that the vehicle is com pletely stopped before you shift NOTE into reverse You may not accelerate to the maximum allowable speed because of the driving sit uation and or the vehicle condition 6th to Sth 225 140 3 14 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT A WARNING Always depress the brake pedal before shifting from P Park or N Neutral if the vehicle is station ary to a forward or reverse gear to help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly when you shift
291. nano 3rd generation iPod nano 2nd generation iPod nano 1st generation iPod 5th generation Please update the firmware of your iPod before using it Some functions may not be available depending on the model of iPod or its firmware version iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc reg istered in the U S and other countries Apple is not responsible for the opera tion of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards iPod connection Please make sure to detach the iPod after turning off the car engine turning the ACC to OFF The iPod may not shut down while still connected which may result in battery depletion Please do not connect iPod accesso ries such as an iPod remote control or headphones while connecting iPod with the unit The unit may not operate correctly Bluetooth Hands Free if equipped OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Hands free switches SEEK TRACKICAT Lo XM J MENU 1 TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 2 VOL PUSH POWER knob 6 Talk button 3 Preset buttons 7 Off Hook button 4 DISP button 8 On Hook button b RDM button 9 VOL switch 5 38 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Bluetooth language selection The language used for the voice guidance
292. ncorrectly when there are strong infrared rays Reprogramming the Automatic Light Function The following settings of the automatic light function can be customized to your prefer ence Please contact an authorized SUZUKI dealer if you want the function reprogrammed Sensitivity of the light sensor The amount of outside light needed to turn the lights on and off is pre set at the fac tory The sensitivity of the light sensor can be adjusted so that the lights are turned on and off when it is lighter outside than the pre set condition or darker outside than the pre set condition Rain triggered automatic lighting oper ation The setting of the auto on headlight sys tem can be changed to make it turn on the headlights when the rain sensor senses heavy rain fall pre set at the factory when the rain sensor senses light and heavy rainfall in coordination with rain sensing wiper operation or independently from rain sensing wiper operation Light Reminder Buzzer The interior buzzer continuously beeps if you open the driver s door without turning off the headlights and position lights This function is triggered under the following condition The headlights and position lights are on even after you change the ignition mode to LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch The buzzer stops sounding when you turn off the headlights and position lights NOTE A message is indicated on the informat
293. nebook and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Change Name and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select a number to be changed and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 5 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Record Name and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 6 Pronounce the name to be used at voice recognition 7 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previous menu OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Making a call by Phonebook The number registered in Phonebook is dialed 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone book and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select List Names and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection The registered numbers are displayed in sequence 4 Press the Off Hook button 7 The displayed number is dialed Deletion of registered data Delete Entry The number registered in P
294. ng light will come on due to normal changes in temperature and atmospheric pres sure it is important to check and adjust the tire pressures when the tires are cold Tires that appear to be at the specified pressure when checked after driving when the tires are warm could have pressure below the specification when the tires cool down Also tires that are inflated to the specified pres sure in a warm garage may have pres sure below the specification when the vehicle is driven outside in very cold temperature If you adjust the tire pressure in a garage that is warmer than the outside temperature you should add 1 psi to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure for every 10 F difference between garage tem perature and outside temperature 7 30 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Measuring Air Pressure Use the following steps to achieve proper tire inflation 1 Identify the recommended tire pres sure on the vehicle s Tire and Load ing Information Label or in the owner s manual 2 Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem 3 Using a reliable pressure gauge measure the tire inflation pressure by pressing the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement Remember that inflation pressures should be checked when the tires are cold meaning before they have been driven one mile or after sitting for three hours or more allowing the tire to cool to ambient air tempera ture If the air pressur
295. ng the cycling process to pre vent possible overheating 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the fre quency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly Proceed with Programming HomeLink step 4 to complete Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator secu rity system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties or ques tions contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three but tons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed as outlined below follow the step noted Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both but tons Do not hold for longer that 30 sec onds HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming HomeLink step 2 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a de
296. ngine switch to change the ignition mode to LOCK OFF Emission control system and CVT if equipped damage may result Driving on Slippery Roads 60G089S Under wet road conditions you should drive at a lower speed than on dry roads due to possible slippage of tires during braking When driving on icy snow cov ered or muddy roads reduce your speed and avoid sudden acceleration abrupt braking or sharp steering movements Intelligent All Wheel Drive i AWD Models Your i AWD provides greater traction on slippery roads than 2 wheel drive models However your i AWD will not have as much traction in deep snow mud or sand as multipurpose 4WD vehicles You should not attempt to drive your i AWD in deep snow mud or sand i AWD models are not sport utility vehicles and are not designed for off road use DRIVING TIPS If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in snow mud or sand follow the directions below 1 Shift the transaxle back and forth between a forward range or first gear for manual transaxle and reverse This will create a rocking motion which may give you enough momentum to free the vehicle Press gently on the accelerator to keep wheel spinning to a minimum wheel rpm Remove your foot from the accelerator while shifting Do not race the engine Excessive wheel spin will cause the tires to dig deeper making it more difficult to free the vehicle 2 If your vehicle re
297. nister air suction filter SUZUKI LLC Standard Green SUZUKI LLC Super Blue 1 First time only Replace at 150000 km 90000 miles or 90 months EDI Second time and after Replace every 75000 km 45000 miles or 45 months Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 180 months Replace every 250000 km 150000 miles or 150 months 1 Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC Super Blue follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC Standard Green 7 11 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE R Replace or change 1 Inspect clean adjust lubricate or replace as necessary Interval This interval should be judged by miles x 1000 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 odometer reading or months whichever km x 1000 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 comes first months 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 ENGINE amp EMISSION CONTROL 1 Drive belt Inspect for damage m 5 E 2 Valve lash clearance Es z B 3 Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R 4 Cooling system hoses and connections x 5 Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC Standard Green R SUZUKI LLC Super Blue 1 First time only Replace at 150000 km 90000 miles or 90 months Second time and after Replace every 75000 km 45000
298. nning to lose traction When this happens the system operates the front or rear brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin NOTE You may hear a clicking sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when you start the engine or just after the vehicle begins to move This means that the above systems are in the self check mode This sound does not indicate a mal function Anti Lock Braking System ABS ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec tronically controlling braking pressure It will also help you maintain steering control when braking on slippery surfaces or when braking hard The ABS works automati cally so you do not have to use any special braking technique Just push the brake pedal down without pumping The ABS will operate whenever it senses that wheels are locking up You may feel the brake pedal pulsate while the ABS is operating For more information on ABS see Brak ing in the OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section NOTE If the ABS system is activated you may hear a clunking noise and or feel pulsating in the brake pedal This is normal and indi cates that the brake fluid pressure is being controlled properly A WARNING The ESP may not work properly if tires or wheels other than those specified in the Owner s Manual are used When replacing tires or wheels use only the size and type specified i in this Owner s Manual The ESP may not work properly if tires are not inflated
299. nt System air bags EXAMPLE 54G022 A WARNING This section of the owner s manual describes the protection provided by your SUZUKI s SUPPLEMENTAL bags RESTRAINT SYSTEM air Please read and follow ALL these instructions carefully to minimize your risk of severe injury or death in the event of a collision Your vehicle has advanced front air bags and front side air bags for the driver and right front passenger Your vehicle also has side curtain air bags and rear side air bags BEFORE DRIVING EXAMPLE 57L21050 57L21051 Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple mental Restraint System consisting of the following components in addition to a lap shoulder belt at each front seating position Drivers front air bag Front passenger s front air bag Seat belt pretensioners Lap outer pretensioners Air bag controller Occupant classification module PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator Forward crash sensors Front side air bags 10 Side curtain air bags 11 Side crash sensors 12 Rear side air bags 13 Rear side crash sensors 14 Front passenger s sensor mat 15 Seat belt buckle sensors 5 2 56 BEFORE DRIVING ry If the AIR BAG light on the instrument clus ter does not blink or come on when the ignition mode is first changed to ON by pressing the engine switch or the AIR BAG light stays on or comes on while dr
300. nt it as shown in the illustration Doing otherwise may damage the ashtray and or the center console and the molded roof lining do not hang down the assist grip 5 82 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Coat Hooks GAS ZW 57L51049 You can hang clothing on the coat hooks These hooks are not designed for large or heavy items A WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags do not hang sharp items like a hanger on the coat hook When hanging the clothes hang it on hook without using a hanger 5 83 Sunroof if equipped You can tilt or slide the sunroof by operat ing the TILT part of the sunroof switch or the SLIDE part of the sunroof switch after pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON There is a system to prevent being pinched by the sunroof When the system senses that something is pinched when the sunroof is sliding for ward the sunroof will automatically reverse direction and slide rearward This system will operate when the sunroof is closing automatically This system does not oper ate when tilting the sunroof down Make sure there are no hands or other obstructions in the path of the sunroof when you close the sunroof even though there is a system to prevent being pinched by the sunroof A WARNING The system to prevent being pinched by the sunroof does not work in the area where the sunroof is almost completely closed Th
301. o 8 digit number and Confirm to confirm the operation Set Passkey When no audio device is registered 1st word Function Pair audio Audio device connection player Pronounce audio device name and Confirm to confirm the operation Passkey setting Set Passkey Pronounce 4 to 8 digit number and Confirm to confirm the operation NOTE Before using these command you must disconnect your cell phone and select Bluetooth audio mode by pressing CD button 5 55 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Constant usable voice command 1st word Function Cancel A current operation is stopped and the former state is restored Repeat The last voice guidance repeats Go Back The state before pressing the Talk button is restored Help Available operations are guided Voice command during a call 1st word 2nd word Function Mute Voice transmission is temporarily stopped Pronouncing Mute again restores a normal call Call transfer A hands free call is transferred to a cell phone number A tone signal is sent Press one of Send the preset but A speed dial number is transmitted in the tone dialing mode tons 1 to 6 5 56 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Bluetooth Hands Free Dialing 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Function
302. o one of the three operating positions In the AUTO position if provided the wipers automatically operate when the wiper sys tem senses rain or snow In the LO posi tion the wipers operate at a steady low speed In the HI position the wipers operate at a steady high speed To turn off the wipers move the lever back to the OFF position Move the lever up and hold it to the MIST position the wipers will operate continu ously at low speed for as long as you hold the lever in the MIST position 57L21072 If the control lever has on AUTO position you can increase the system s sensitivity to rain snow by turning the knob of the control lever forward for increased sensitivity or rearward for decreased sensitivity BEFORE DRIVING A WARNING Observe the following instructions when the wiper lever is set to the AUTO position with the engine switch in the ON mode Other wise the wipers could unexpect edly operate and cause injury and could also be damaged Do not touch or wipe the rain sensor area of the windshield with a cloth Do not hit the windshield or rain sensor Be sure to set the wiper control lever to the OFF position before washing the vehicle in an auto matic car wash or cleaning the windshield NOTE e Under the following conditions the rain sensor may not be able to sense rain or snow correctly and thus the rain sensing wiper function may not w
303. oderately under inflated the vehicle load may exceed the load rating of the tires which can lead to tire failure The low tire pressure warning light will not alert you of this condition The warn ing light will only come on when one or more of your tires become signifi cantly under inflated Check adjust your tire inflation pressure at least once a month Refer to Tires in the INSPECTION AND MAINTE NANCE section A WARNING If the low tire pressure warning light comes on and stays on reduce your speed and avoid abrupt steering and braking Stop in a safe place as soon ur possible and check your tires f you have a flat tire replace it with the spare tire Refer to Jacking Instructions in the EMERGENCY SERVICE section Refer to Replacing Tires and or Wheels for instructions on how to restore normal operation of the tire pres sure monitoring system after you have had a flat tire If one or more of your tires is under inflated adjust the inflation pressure in all of your tires to the recommended inflation pressure as Soon as possible Be aware that driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire can cause the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure and may affect steering control and brake effectiveness This could lead to an accident resulting in severe injury or death Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE sec tion for additional details on
304. oes not come on even when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON The light stays on after the engine has started The electric power steering system stops functioning if it has any problem Without the system operating the steer ing wheel will require more effort to turn than usual Master Warning Indicator Light 78K049 When you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON the light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working When the information dis play shows warning and indicator mes sages this indicator light may also come on or blink For details refer to Information Display in this section Speedometer Tachometer BEFORE DRIVING Fuel Gauge EXAMPLE HII 80 S o EN 120 CRUISE SET 57L21057 EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 5 s i The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in km h and mph 57L21058 The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute CAUTION Never drive with the engine speed indicator in the red zone or severe engine damage can result When downshifting to a lower gear make sure not to operate with exces sive revolution speeds of the engine Refer to Downshifting maximum allowable speeds in the OPERAT ING YOUR VEHICLE section 57L21059 When yo
305. of the following conditions after changing the ignition mode to LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch The remote controller is left inside the vehicle Any of the doors is open Press the request switch again after doing the following With the ignition mode changed to LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch bring out the remote controller if it is inside the vehicle and check that all doors are com pletely closed Remote Controller Reminder Function When you lock a door without using the key this function prevents it from being locked if the remote controller is left inside the vehicle With the remote controller inside the vehi cle locking of the driver s and passenger s doors made with the power door locking system or door lock knobs will be can celled if either of the doors is open NOTE Whenever you lock a door without using the key check that you have the remote controller with you This is a good habit to prevent locking a door with the remote controller left behind The remote controller reminder function is activated when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ACC or ON anywhere the remote controller is placed BEFORE DRIVING Vehicle Inside Area Where Request Switch Warning Buzzer Remote Con troller Reminder Function Works Inside the vehicle the remote controller may be located in any place within the indi cated inside sensing area 1 not
306. oisture or chemicals in hard to reach areas of the vehicle underbody or frame 2 Chipping scratches and any damage to treated or painted metal surfaces resulting from minor accidents or impact from stones and gravel Environmental conditions which accel erate corrosion 1 Road salt dust control chemicals sea air or industrial pollution will all acceler ate the corrosion of metal 2 High humidity will increase the rate of corrosion particularly when the temper ature range is just above the freezing point 3 Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle for an extended period of time may pro mote corrosion even though other body sections may be completely dry 4 High temperatures will cause an accel erated rate of corrosion to parts of the 9 1 vehicle which are not well ventilated to permit quick drying 52D151 This information illustrates the necessity of keeping your vehicle particularly the underbody as clean and dry as possible It is equally important to repair any damage to the paint or protective coatings as soon as possible How to Help Prevent Corrosion Wash your vehicle frequently The best way to preserve the finish on your vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to keep it clean with frequent washing Wash your vehicle at least once during the winter and once immediately after the win ter Keep your vehicle particularly the underside as clean and dry as possible If you frequent
307. ome vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the second or accessories position or the on position for programming and or operation of HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being pro grammed to HomeLink for quicker train ing and accurate transmission of the radiofrequency signal Do not repeat Pro gramming HomeLink step 1 to train additional devices to a second or third OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT HomeLink button Begin with Program ming HomeLink step 2 57L51036 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons buttons one and three releasing only when the indica tor light begins to flash after 20 sec onds Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step 1 to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink buttons 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 5 14 cm 1 3 inches away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink hand held transmitter buttons Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been com pleted NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Oper
308. on See page 1 1 Engine oil recommendation Engine oil with Starburst symbol For further details see Engine Oil and Filter in the INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE section Brake and clutch fluid DOTS SAE J1703 CVT fluid SUZUKI CVT FLUID GREEN 1 or Shell GREEN 1V Tire cold pressure See the Tire Information Label located on the driver s door lock pillar SUZUKI 99011 57L20 03E SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION Part No 99011 57L20 03E December 2010 Printed in U S A
309. on 2 or the Down but ton 3 The category being received is displayed 5 23 Channel selection Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 4 The channel being received is displayed NOTE e RADIO ID is displayed with channel 000 Loading is displayed during the acqui sition of audio data or information Channel selection by category Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 4 during category display The channel being received is displayed Preset memory 1 Select the desired channel 2 Select the Preset buttons 5 to which you want to store the channel and press and hold the button for 2 sec onds or longer Preset channel calling Press the Preset button 5 The corresponding channel preset can be received NOTE If the button for a channel not preset is pressed the unit displays Display change Press the DISP button 6 Each time it is pressed display is changed as follows Channel name Channel number display Y Song program title display Y Artist feature name display XM Reception XM reception can be affected by atmo spheric conditions Nearby buildings or under the overhead railway may interfere or deflect reception causing poor recep tion Listening to a CD Disp mu Lo w o D
310. on display on the instrument cluster shows this message AWD SYS TEM HIGH TEMP AWD IS OFF 57L30042 When the i AWD warning light comes on after you have operated your vehicle in the i AWD mode continuously park the vehicle at a safe place and run the engine idle After some time the i AWD indicator light turns on again and the driving mode returns to the i AWD mode OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Note that i AWD vehicles are not all around vehicles Be sure to observe the following instructions when driving your vehicle Do not drive through water such as by crossing a river Do not drive continuously places such as sand and mud where front wheels tend to race When any wheel is in the air for such reason as running off the road do not race it needlessly If the i AWD warning light comes on or blinks when driving there may be something wrong with the i AWD system Have the system inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer The information display shows the AWD SYSTEM HIGH TEMP AWD IS OFF message whenever the i AWD warning light comes on or blinks 3 20 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Unevenly worn tires can cause prob lems with operation of the 2WD i AWD switch Be sure to rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule Refer to Tires and Main tenance Schedule in the INSPEC TION AND MAINTENANCE sectio
311. on during previous driving NOTE When you reconnect the negative ter minal to the battery the value of average fuel consumption will be shown after driv ing for a period of time You can select when the value of average fuel consumption is reset from among the following three methods Reset after refuel the value of average fuel consumption will be reset automati cally by refueling Reset with trip A the value of average fuel consumption will be reset automati cally by resetting trip meter A Reset manually the value of average fuel consumption will be reset by pulling and holding the DISP switch 2 when the display indicates the average fuel consumption 2 83 To change when the value of average fuel consumption is reset refer to Setting Mode later in this section NOTE If you add only a small amount of fuel when you select Reset after refuel the average fuel consumption value may not be reset Driving range If you selected driving range the last time you drove the vehicle the display indicates for a few seconds and then indicates the current driving range when the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to ON The driving range shown in the display is the approximate distance you can drive until the fuel gauge indicates E based on current driving conditions When the remaining fuel in fuel tank reaches a low level the display will appear I
312. on the windshield and also damage your vehicle s paint CAUTION Damage may result if the washer motor is operated with no fluid in the washer tank 7 57 Air Conditioning System If you do not use the air conditioner for a long period such as during winter it may not give the best performance when you start using it again To help maintain opti mum performance and durability of your air conditioner it needs to be run periodically Operate the air conditioner at least once a month for one minute with the engine idling This circulates the refrigerant and oil and helps protect the internal components 60G411 EMERGENCY SERVICE EMERGENCY SERVICE Tire Changing Tool 8 1 Jacking Instructions 8 2 Changing Wheels 8 5 Jump Starting Instructions 8 6 Towing a Disabled Vehicle 8 7 If the Starter Does Not Operate 8 7 If the Engine is Flooded 8 8 If the Engine Overheats 8 8 EMERGENCY SERVICE Tire Changing Tool CAUTION Do not remove the spacer 5 under the spare tire T
313. one shaped end facing the wheel Tighten each nut snugly by hand until the wheel is securely seated on the hub 8 5 81A057 Wheel tightening torque 140 Nm 103 3 Ib ft 14 3 kg m 7 Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts in a crisscross fashion with a wrench as shown in the illustration A WARNING Use genuine wheel nuts and tighten them to the specified torque as soon as possible after changing wheels Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts may come loose or fall off which can result in an accident If you do not have a torque wrench have the wheel nut torque checked by an authorized SUZUKI dealer Full Wheel Cover if equipped EXAMPLE 1 60G309 1 or 2 Flat end tool Your vehicle includes two tools a wheel brace and a jack crank one of which has a flat end Use the tool with the flat end to remove the full wheel cap as shown above EXAMPLE VY 54G117 When installing the cover make sure that it is positioned so that it does not cover or foul the air valve Jump Starting Instructions A WARNING Never attempt to jump start your vehicle if the battery appears to be frozen Batteries in this condition may explode or rupture if jump starting is attempted When making jumper cable con nections be certain that your hands and the jumper cables remain clear from pulleys belts or fans Batteries produce flammable
314. one time from interior If this message is displayed have your buzzer vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI 2 dealer BCM SERVICE BCM SYSTEM 57L21130 2 99 Lighting Control Lever 57L21128 A WARNING To avoid possible injury do not oper ate controls by reaching through the steering wheel Lighting Operation if equipped 3 2 57L21062 To turn the lights on or off twist the knob on the end of the lever There are three positions OFF 1 All lights are off 200 2 Front position lights tail lights license plate light and instrument lights are on but headlights are off D 3 Front position lights tail lights license plate light instrument lights and headlights are on BEFORE DRIVING 57L21063 With the headlights on push the lever for ward to switch to the high beams main beams or pull the lever toward you to switch to the low beams When the high beams main beams are on a light on the instrument panel will come on To momen tarily activate the high beams main beams as a passing signal pull the lever slightly toward you and release it when you have completed the signal 2 100 BEFORE DRIVING Automatic Lights Operation if equipped EXAMPLE 57L21064 D 2 101 57L21118 Your vehicle s lighting system is controlled by three main systems the Ligh
315. ool the engine coolant level should be between the FULL and LOW marks Adding Coolant 57L71002 If the engine coolant level is below the LOW mark more engine coolant should be added Remove the reserve tank cap and add engine coolant until the reserve tank level reaches the FULL mark Never fill the reserve tank above the FULL mark Engine coolant is harmful or fatal if swallowed or inhaled Do not drink antifreeze or coolant solution If swal lowed do not induce vomiting Imme diately contact a poison control center or a physician Avoid inhaling mist or hot vapors if inhaled remove to fresh air If coolant gets in eyes flush eyes with water and seek medi cal attention Wash thoroughly after handling Solution can be poisonous to animals Keep out of the reach of children and animals CAUTION SUZUKI LLC Super Blue coolant SUZUKI LLC Super Blue coolant is already diluted to the proper percent age Do not dilute with distilled water additionally Doing so may result in the possibility of freezing coolant and or overheating CAUTION SUZUKI LLC Standard Green coolant The mixture you use should con tain 50 concentration of anti freeze If the lowest ambient temperature in your area is expected to be 35 31 F or below use higher concentrations up to 60 following the instructions on the antifreeze container CAUTION When putting the cap
316. or 1 sec or more calls the next page The display will return to the frequency display after 6 seconds 5 21 Radio Reception Radio reception can be affected by envi ronment atmospheric conditions or radio signal s power and distance from the sta tion Nearby mountains and buildings may interfere or deflect radio reception caus ing poor reception Poor reception or radio static can also be caused by electric cur rent from overhead wires or high voltage power lines Station name display Radio text display Station name display and radio text dis play are not available when no data is received or may not be displayed properly when the data is incorrectly transmitted or received Listening to the XM Radio if equipped OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display 5 12157 R 1 XM button 2 Up button 3 Down button 4 TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 5 Preset buttons 1 to 6 6 DISP button A B D Band Preset number Channel number Channel name IL wa 5 22 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Selecting the reception band Press the XM button 1 Each time the button is pressed the reception band is switched as follows XM1 gt XM2 gt Category selection Press the Up butt
317. ork or may work incorrectly Use a position other than AUTO under these conditions Rain or snow does not hit the rain sen sor area of the windshield or the snow is not of a type that is able to be detected by the sensor The rain sensor area is covered with mud ice or other similar substance You should remove any foreign sub stance 2 108 BEFORE DRIVING There were already raindrops on the windshield before starting rain sensing wiper operation You should remove the raindrops by operating the wipers under manual control The rain sensor is hotter than 80 C 176 F in the sun or lower than 10 14 F in freezing weather The wip ers do not operate under this condi tion The windshield is coated with a water repellent substance which causes raindrops to run down quickly This will give a clearer view and the wipers may seem to operate too frequently In this case decrease the system s sensitiv ity The sensor area is covered with a sticker The wiper blades are damaged You should replace them e The following conditions may indicate problems with the rain sensing wiper system If your system exhibits any of the following conditions have inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer Rainfall snowfall rate varies but the wiping interval remains constant Rain snow is falling but the wipers do not operate 2 109 Reprogramming the Wiper Function The
318. ormation Display in the Before Driving section for details You may customize the system to cause the interior buzzer to sound once for the remote controller out of sensing range warning To incorporate this customiza tion please contact an authorized SUZUKI dealer f the battery of the remote controller is about to become completely discharged the corresponding message will appear on the information display when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON Refer to Informa tion Display in the Before Driving sec tion for details For details on replacing the battery refer to the Keyless Start System Remote Controller section in the Before Driving chapter Remote Controller Outside Warn ing When the conditions described below are met the system gives a remote controller outside warning by sounding the interior and exterior buzzers and flashing the immobilizer keyless start system and mas ter warning indicator lights The remote controller is not inside the vehicle when any of the doors is opened when the engine is running or when the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to ACC or ON and then all doors are closed The remote controller is not inside the vehicle when you attempt to start the engine after changing the ignition mode to ACC or ON by pressing the engine Switch 57L31003 1 Immobilizer
319. ossible Do not carry items so large that they hang over the bumpers or the sides of the vehicle or block your view Secure the front and rear ends of long items such as wood panels surfboards and so forth to both the front and rear of the vehicle You should protect the painted surfaces of the vehicle from scuffing caused by tie down ropes Check periodically to make sure the roof rack is securely installed and free from damage For vehicles with roof rack anchors make sure the anchors are covered with the caps when not in use 5 93 A WARNING Abrupt maneuvers or failure to properly secure cargo can allow the cargo to fly off the vehicle and hit others causing personal injury or property damage Mount cargo securely and avoid abrupt maneuvers such as jack rabbit starts sharp turns fast cor nering and sudden braking Check periodically to make sure that cargo is securely fastened Large bulky long or flat items can affect vehicle aerodynamics or be caught by the wind and can reduce vehicle control resulting in an acci dent and personal injury Drive cau tiously at a safely reduced speed when carrying this type of cargo HomeLink if equipped f HomeLink Wireless Control System 66J092 HomeLink HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Technology Company The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three h
320. ot open covers and do not repair by yourself Refer servicing to qualified personnel Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Ink A WARNING Keep away from the medical devices This unit and mobile phones can interfere with the functioning of medical devices such as hearing aids or pacemakers Failure to observe this may arise the malfunction of medical devices resulting in personal injury or death OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT A WARNING This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency RF Exposure Guidelines in Supple ment C to OET 65 This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation MPE But it is desirable that it should be installed and oper ated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator and person s body excluding extremities hands wrists feet and ankles Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth ready device whenever requested This unit shares the communication fre quency with other private or public wire less communication equipment such as a wireless LAN and other wireless commu nication radios You should stop using this unit whenever you are notified that your unit disturbs other wireless communication immedi ately 5 14 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT FCC ID A
321. other vehicle such as a motorhome provided you use the proper towing method speci fied for your vehicle The towing method you must use depends on the specifica tions of your vehicle whether it is a 2 wheel drive 2WD or intelligent All Wheel Drive i AWD vehicle Use the towing instruction table to select the proper towing method for your vehicle and carefully follow the corresponding instructions Be sure to use proper towing equipment designed for recreational tow ing and make sure that towing speed does not exceed 90 km h 55 mph A WARNING Always use a safety chain when tow ing your vehicle and be sure to observe federal state and local requirements for trailer hitches tow bars lights etc VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING TOWING INSTRUCTION TABLE DRIVE TOWING TRAIN TRANSAXLE METHOD VT AUT m CVT AUTO A M T MANUAL AB i AWD includ ing 2WD CVT none mode 80J2051 CAUTION For the CVT of intelligent All Wheel Drive i AWD models don t tow your vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motorhome or the drive train may be seriously damaged 6 2 VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING A 2WD except 2WD mode of i AWD TOWING METHOD A VEHICLES WITH MANUAL TRANS AXLE or CVT ee ONA DOLY 1 Secure the front wheels on a towing AND REAR WHEELS ON THE GROUND dolly according to the instructions pro vided by the dolly manufacturer 2 Release th
322. ou can open the lid 1 by pressing the raised portion on it A WARNING Never drive with the lid of the lidded instrument panel box open It could cause injury if an accident occurs 5 87 Cup Holder and Storage Area if equipped 57L51069 Cup holders 1 are provided in the center console You can open the lid 2 by pressing the raised portion on it 57L51046 The cup holder 1 for rear seat passen gers is extended ready for use when the armrest is tilted down and the button 2 is pressed Push the cup holder backward to store it OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT You should hold a bottle with a cap in the holder Bottle holder A WARNING Front Do not use the cup holder or the stor age bin to hold cups containing hot liquids or sharp edged hard or breakable objects Objects in these bins may be thrown about during a sudden stop or impact and could cause personal injury If a drink is spilled over the audio system if equipped or electric switches or if a spilled drink reaches the under floor wiring or electric components it could cause the sys tem to malfunction or even a fire and impair normal operation of the SRS air bag system 9255 PES A 57L50041 1 Bottle holder Rear 57L50042 1 Bottle holder A WARNING Prevent drink from spilling by cap ping the bottle as necessary If a hot drink is spilled you may
323. pected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer NOTE The hill hold control system will not acti vate while this message is displayed OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS if equipped The tire pressure monitoring system is designed to alert you when one or more of the tires on your vehicle is significantly under inflated A Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor containing a unique identification code is mounted on each wheel The TPMS sensors transmit tire pressure signals to receiver which relays the information to a tire pressure monitoring system controller When the inflation pressure of one or more tires indi cates significant under inflation the low tire pressure warning light shown below comes on 3 34 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Low Tire Pressure Warning Light 52D305 A WARNING Each tire including the spare if pro vided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac ard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres sure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your t
324. pedal Try again as instructed by the message 2 88 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Master Warning GEARSHIFT NOT IN PARK 57L21090 Message indicator Sound Cause and Remedy Manual Transaxle Off Off The engine switch is pressed without depressing the brake and clutch pedals Try again as instructed by the message PRESS BRAKE AND CLUTCH TO START 57L21120 CVT Off Off The engine switch is pressed with the gear shift lever in a position other than P Try again as instructed by the message 2 89 BEFORE DRIVING Warning and Indicator Message Master Warning Indicator Sound Cause and Remedy Blinks Ping one time from interior There is a problem with the steering lock buzzer system JT A Have your vehicle inspected by an autho rized SUZUKI dealer SERVICE STEERING LOCK SYSTEM 57L21091 Blinks Ping one time from interior There is a problem with the keyless push buzzer start system Have your vehicle inspected by an autho TES rized SUZUKI dealer SERVICE START SYSTEM 57L21092 2 90 BEFORE DRIVING pels NOT BETEGTED 57121093 ex PLACE KEY FOB ON BTART SWITC 57L21094 Warning and Indicator Master Warning Message Indicator Sound Cause and Remedy Blinks Repeated beeps under cer The remote controller may be outside th
325. quality of hands free is low Distortion noise etc There is another wireless device near the unit Switch off the wireless device or keep it away from the unit 5 69 Error Display Messages OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display Possible cause Possible solution XM Ck Antenna XM antenna unconnected Connect the XM antenna No Signal XM broadcasts unreceivable because of Move to an area where XM broadcasts can be received poor receiving conditions well Ch Off Air Ghannel Robin serios oe is not currently in service Tune to another Ch Unavail Channel unavailable This channel is out of service Tune to another channel Ch Unauth Channel unauthorized This channel is not authorized Tune to another channel 5 70 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display Possible cause Possible solution CD Insert the disc with its label side up Check the disc that it is not warped and is free of flaws ERROR 1 Theidise cannot be read If ERROR 1 does not go out when a normal disc is inserted consult your dealer The an Bier chan THEE If CD is inserted in the unit press the CD eject button to ERROR 3 PR as P remove the disc If the disc cannot be ejected consult your dealer USB iPod Unplug the USB device and plug it again ERROR 1 No operation by some cause If ERROR 1 does not go out when a normal disc is inserted consult your de
326. r 5 32 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT CAUTION Do not connect any USB device other than a USB memory or a USB audio player Do not con nect multiple USB devices to the USB connector Supplying power to multiple USB devices from the connector could cause overheat ing and smoking Selecting a USB device mode Press the USB button 1 Selecting a folder Turn the sound control knob 2 to select a folder Selecting a track Press the Up button 3 to listen to the next track Press the Down button 4 twice to listen to the previous track When the Down button 4 is pressed once the track currently being played will start again at the beginning Fast forwarding Rewinding a track Hold in the Up button 3 to advance a track rapidly Hold in the Down button 4 to rewind a track 5 33 Random play Press the RDM button 6 Each time the button is pressed the mode changes in the following order Repeat play Press the RPT button 5 Each time the button is pressed repeat play mode changes as follows OFF gt FOLDER RANDOM gt ALL RANDOM OFF gt FILE REPEAT gt FOLDER REPEAT NOTE To cancel random play press the RDM button 6 several times to change the ran dom play mode to OFF FOLDER RANDOM The random indicator RDM F lights The tracks in the current folder are played at random ALL RANDOM The random indicator RDM lights T
327. r Messages by corner sensors by center sensors If there is a problem or warning regarding the parking sensor system a message is Dist Distance displayed on the information display in the Buzzer Symbol Buzzer Symbol instrument cluster and a symbol flashes and the buzzer sounds If a message is displayed follow its instruction 37 5 60 cm Short beeps at Three 60 150 cm Short beeps at 15 24 in short intervals lines 24 59 in long intervals Probable Message Symbol Buzzer cause and Short beeps at Ines remedy 25 37 5 cm 45 60 Short beeps at _ 10 251 VERDE m Two lines 18 24 in short intervals Two Series There may intervals flashing of dou prob Less than Short beeps at linesinajble with 25 cm ae One line 14 18 in very short Two lines sensor beeps he park 10 in p intervals location ing sensor Tan ess ave your 35 cm i One line vehicle 14 in inspected NOTE Symbols are displayed with a short delay m SUZUKI after the detection of obstacles dealer f the system detects multiple obstacles simultaneously the display shows all of their positions using the corresponding symbols However the buzzers will sound only for the nearest obstacles One Series The indi flashing lof sin cated sen line ina igle sor is sensor beeps contami location nate
328. r fails to open If the fuel filler door fails to open due to a problem in the system or a flat battery have the vehicle inspected by an autho rized SUZUKI dealer If you must open the door immediately do the following NN 57L51055 Remove the trim 1 inside the trunk 57L51056 Pull the rod 2 toward you The fuel filler door will be unlocked Push the rod inward to lock the door 3 Unlock 4 Lock OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Fuel Filler Cap EXAMPLE 2 e A Sy Sos 2 SS 57L51057 From the outside push the part indicated by the arrow of the fuel filler door 5 see the illustration The door will open slightly 79K053 To remove the fuel filler cap 1 Open the fuel filler door 2 Remove the cap by turning it counter clockwise A WARNING Remove the fuel filler cap slowly The fuel may be under pressure and may spray out causing injury 57L51019 NOTE The cap holder 1 can hold the fuel filler cap 2 when refueling To reinstall the fuel filler cap 1 Turn the cap clockwise until you hear several clicks 2 Close the fuel filler door A WARNING Fuel is extremely flammable Do not smoke when refueling and make sure there are no open flames or sparks in the area 5 74 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ine H A WARNING Engine Hood Avoid spilling fuel Any spil
329. re Under normal driving conditions the indicator should stay within the normal acceptable temperature range between H and C If the indicator approaches H overheating is indicated Follow the instructions for engine overheating in the EMERGENCY SERVICE section CAUTION Continuing to drive the vehicle when engine overheating is indicated can result in severe engine damage 57L21080 When the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to ON the instrument panel lights come on Your vehicle has a system to automatically dim the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on You can change the brightness of the instrument panel lights regardless of whether the parking lights or headlights are off or on To increase the brightness of the instru ment panel lights turn the brightness con trol knob 1 clockwise To reduce the brightness of the instrument panel lights turn the brightness control knob 1 counterclockwise EXAMPLE If you do not turn the brightness control knob within about 5 seconds of activat ing the brightness control display the brightness control display will be can celed automatically e When you reconnect the battery the brightness of the instrument panel lights will be reinitialized Readjust the bright ness according to your preference NOTE If you select the lowest brightness le
330. re pressure Refer to Tires in the INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE section for details Do not use tires other than those specified by SUZUKI Never use dif ferent sizes or types of tires on the front and rear wheels For informa tion regarding the specified tires refer to the Tire Information Label located on the driver s side door pillar Never use oversized tires or special shocks and springs to raise jack up your vehicle This will change its handling characteristics Over sized tires may also rub against the fender over bumps causing vehicle damage or tire failure Continued A WARNING Continued After driving through water test the brakes while driving at a slow speed to see if they have main tained their normal effectiveness If the brakes are less effective than normal dry them by repeatedly applying the brakes while driving slowly until the brakes have regained their normal effective ness DRIVING TIPS 4 6 DRIVING TIPS 60G407 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System Climate Control ende 5 1 Radio Antenna 5 9 Audio Systems 5 10 Fuel Filler DOOM 5 73 Fuel Filler 5 74 Engine HOO 5 75 SUM qe c 5 77 Interior Light Switch eres 5 78 Courte
331. re the flexible straps or rigid connecting bars are securely latched to the anchors NOTE Although there are three rear seating posi tions you cannot install three LATCH type child restraints in the rear seats You can install one or two LATCH restraint s Be sure to install the LATCH type child restraint s in the outboard seating posi tions If your LATCH restraint has flexible lower connecting straps these general instruc tions apply 1 If possible fold the seatback rearward for easier installation EXAMPLE 73K017 2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat feeding the strap hooks through the slots in the seat cushion or the slots in the seatback bottom BEFORE DRIVING EXAMPLE EXAMPLE 65D340 3 Snap the strap hooks to the anchors Take care not to pinch your fingers 65D341 4 Return the seatback to the normal upright position Tighten the lower straps as described in the child restraint owner s manual Attach the top tether strap if applicable 2 50 BEFORE DRIVING EXAMPLE 65D342 5 Make sure the child restraint is securely fastened by trying to move the child restraint system in all directions espe cially forward A WARNING The seatback should always be securely latched in a fairly upright position when any type of child seat is installed An unlatched or reclined seatback will reduce the intended effectiveness of the ch
332. red above is less than the minimum distance required have your vehicle inspected by your SUZUKI dealer NOTE When measuring the distance between the brake pedal and floor wall be sure not to include the floor mat or rubber on the floor wall in your measurement 60G104 7 26 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE A WARNING If you experience any of the following problems with your vehicle s brake system have the vehicle inspected immediately by your SUZUKI dealer Poor braking performance Uneven braking brakes not work ing uniformly on all wheels Excessive pedal travel Brake dragging Excessive noise Except ABS equipped vehicle Pedal pulsation pedal when pressed for braking pulsates 7 27 Parking Brake Lever 200 N 44 Ibs 20 kg 60A226 Ratchet tooth specification b Steering Wheel EXAMPLE 80J005 Steering wheel play 6th 8th Check the parking brake for proper adjust ment by counting the number of clicks made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly pull up on the parking brake lever to the point of full engagement The parking brake lever should stop between the speci fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheels should be securely locked If the parking brake is not properly adjusted or the brakes drag after the lever has been fully released have the parking brake inspected and or adjusted by your SUZUKI dealer 0
333. ree levels L low M medium and H high BEFORE DRIVING Every time you press the seat heater switch the indicators inside the switch light one at a time in the following sequence to indicate the selected heater operation L low Weak heating Only the L indi cator lights M medium Moderate heating The L and M indicators light H high Strong heating The L M and H indicators light OFF Heater turned off No indicator illuminates 86G064 2 28 BEFORE DRIVING A WARNING Improperly using the seat heater can be hazardous An occupant can suf fer burns even if the heating tempera ture is fairly low if the occupant is wearing thin pants a thin skirt or shorts and leaves the heater on for long periods Avoid using the seat heater for these occupants People who have reduced feeling in their legs including the elderly or those with certain disabilities Small children or anyone with sen sitive skin People who are asleep or under the influence of alcohol or other drugs which make them tired CAUTION To avoid damaging the heater ele ment Do not subject the front seats to heavy impacts such as children jumping on them Do not cover the seat with any insulating materials such as blan kets or cushions 2 29 Rear Seats Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to help reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case of an accident
334. rench f as shown in the illustration to firmly tighten the hook 57L51042 Side 3 Front 57L51043 57L51044 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 57L51045 Frame hooks are provided on the front 1 rear 2 and side 3 of the vehicle The hooks 1 and 2 are used for emergency situations The hooks 3 are used for trailer train shipping purposes The hook 4 is used for transportation by ship To tow your vehicle on the road or highway follow the instruction of Towing in EMER GENCY SERVICE section A WARNING Do not use the frame hooks to tow another vehicle or to have your vehi cle towed on the road or highway The hooks 1 and 2 are designed for use in emergency situations only such as if your vehicle or another vehicle gets stuck in deep mud or snow The hooks 3 are provided for trailer train shipping purpose The hook 4 is provided for transpor tation by ship CAUTION Never use the hooks 1 and 2 for transporting the vehicle by a trailer train or ship as doing so may dam age the vehicle 5 98 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT MEMO 54G215 VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING Vehicle Loading 6 1 Trailer TOWING oia nice e an i ra iaa 6 2 Towing Your Vehicle recreational towing
335. ring wheel away from the front turn signal light whose bulb is to be replaced then turn off the engine 57L70044 2 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the hole and remove the clip 1 by twisting the screwdriver as shown in the illustra tion INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 57L70045 3 Open the indicated end of the cover on the inside of the fender and remove the bulb socket 2 by turning it counter clockwise 4 Replace the bulb then follow the above steps in reverse to restore the original state 7 52 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Rear combination lights reversing turn signal brake tail lights ole M 57L70019 1 Remove the side trim 1 inside the trunk 57L70020 7 53 License plate light 57L71036 57L70022 3 Reversing light dar 4 Rear turn signal light 1 Open the trunk lid and open the indi 5 Brake tail light cated end of the trim 1 on the inner NM side of the lid 2 Open the indicated end of the rubber When opening the trim remove the foam cover 2 to access the lights and cover 2 and clips 3 by prying them replace the blown bulb s off with a flat blade screwdriver 3 Replace the blown bulb s then follow the above steps in reverse to restore the original state 57L70035 2 Disconnect the coupler 4 with
336. river s side EXAMPLE 57L21007 1 LOCK 2 UNLOCK BEFORE DRIVING Front passenger s side EXAMPLE 57L21008 1 LOCK 2 UNLOCK when using the power door locking switch To lock or unlock all the doors simulta neously depress the front or rear of the Switch 5 or 6 respectively NOTE You can also lock or unlock all doors by operating the remote controller Refer to Keyless Start System Remote Control ler in this section e You can also lock or unlock all doors by pushing the request switch on the door handle Refer to Keyless Start System Remote Controller in this section 2 4 BEFORE DRIVING Child Lock System rear doors Trunk Lid EXAMPLE 57L21009 1 LOCK 2 UNLOCK Each of the rear doors is equipped with a child lock which can be used to help pre vent unwanted opening of the door from inside the vehicle When the lock lever is in the LOCK position 1 the rear door can only be opened from outside When the lock lever is in the UNLOCK position 2 the rear door can be opened from inside or outside A WARNING Be sure to place the child lock in the LOCK position whenever children are seated in the rear 2 5 57L21010 To open the trunk lid lift it while pressing the trunk lid request switch 1 The trunk lid request switch 1 operates when the keyless start system remote con troller is w
337. rs when all doors are unlocked Push the request switch on one of the door handles once The turn signal lights will flash once when the doors are locked To unlock a door or all doors Push the request switch on the door handle once to unlock only one door Push the request switch on the door handle twice to unlock all doors When the doors are unlocked The turn signal lights will flash twice f the interior light switch is in the DOOR position the interior light will turn on for about 15 seconds and then fade out If you press the engine switch during this time the light will start to fade out immediately Be sure the doors are locked after you operate the request switch to lock the doors NOTE e The door locks cannot be operated by the request switch under the following conditions If any door is open or is not completely closed If the ignition mode has been changed to LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch If no doors are opened within about 30 seconds after unlocking the doors by pushing the request switch the doors will be locked again automatically BEFORE DRIVING 57L21015 2 80 cm 2 1 2 feet When the remote controler is within approximately 80 cm 2 1 2 feet from a front door handle you can lock or unlock the doors by pushing the request switch 2 8 BEFORE DRIVING NOTE If the remote controller is outside t
338. s could lead to an accident resulting in severe injury or death Turn off the cruise control system and make sure the CRUISE indica tor light is off when the system is not in use CRUISE indicator light CRUISE 520113 When you push the CRUISE switch the system is on and a CRUISE indicator light on the instrument cluster will be on SET indicator light SET 65D474 When the vehicle s speed is controlled by the cruise control system a SET indica tor light on the instrument cluster will be on To Change Speed Temporarily When the cruising speed is maintained you can temporarily accelerate or deceler ate To accelerate depress the accelerator pedal When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will return to the set speed To decelerate depress the brake pedal The set speed will be canceled and SET indicator light will go off To resume the previously set speed push up the RES SET switch 3 and turn on the SET indicator light again when vehicle speed is above 25 mph 40 km h The vehicle will accelerate to and maintain the previously set speed OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE For CVT vehicle when the cruising speed is maintained you cannot decelerate by using the engine brake if you downshift from higher gear to 3rd in the manual mode To decelerate while the cruise control is on depress the brake peda
339. s to appear on the display instantaneous fuel consumption average fuel consump tion driving range average speed or no indication EXAMPLE 57L21082 a Instantaneous fuel consumption b Average fuel consumption c Driving range d Average speed e No indication BEFORE DRIVING To switch the display indication pull the DISP switch 2 quickly NOTE The value of fuel consumption driving range and average speed shown in the dis play are affected by conditions such as the following road condition surrounding traffic condition driving condition e vehicle condition amalfunction which causes the malfunc tion indicator light to come on or blink Instantaneous fuel consumption If you selected instantaneous fuel con sumption the last time you drove the vehi cle the display does not show the bar graph when the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to ON The display shows the bar graph only when the vehicle is moving 2 82 BEFORE DRIVING Average fuel consumption If you selected average fuel consumption the last time you drove the vehicle the dis play shows the last value of average fuel consumption from previous driving when the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to Unless you reset the value of average fuel consumption the display indicates the value of average fuel consumption which includes average fuel consumpti
340. s been left in the sun with the windows closed it will cool faster if you open the windows briefly OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT e Even under automatic operation you can set individual selectors to the man ual mode The manually selected func tions are maintained and the other functions remain under automatic opera tion To return the blower speed selector 4 air intake selector 5 and MODE switch 6 to automatic operation push the AUTO switch 9 EXAMPLE 57L51014 Be careful not to cover the interior temper ature sensor 12 located between the steering wheel and the climate control panel or the solar sensor 13 located at the top of the central part of the dash board These sensors are used by the automatic system to regulate temperature Manual operation You can manually control the climate con trol system Set the selectors to the desired positions EXAMPLE 57L51015 NOTE If you need maximum defrosting e push the defrost switch 7 to turn on the defroster the air conditioning system will come on and the FRESH AIR mode will be selected automatically set the blower speed selector to HIGH e adjust the temperature selector to the HI indication on the display and e adjust the side outlets so the air blows on the side windows 5 8 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Maintenance If you do not use the air conditioner for a long period such
341. saxle is in Neu tral or Park for vehicles with a CVT before attempting to start the engine CAUTION Do not depress the acclerator dur ing the engine starting procedure f the engine does not respond when you try to start it with the engine switch or if the engine switch repeats cycling through the OFF ACC ON mode the vehicle battery may be discharged Check the voltage of the vehicle battery before trying again NOTE You do not need to keep the engine switch pressed to start the engine The engine of a manual transaxle vehi cle will not start unless the clutch pedal is depressed CVT vehicles have a starter interlock device which is designed to keep the starter from operating if the transaxle is in any of the drive positions During the engine starting procedure messages on the information display will help you Refer to Information Display in the Before Driving section for details You should turn off such loads as the headlights and air conditioning system to facilitate starting of the engine e Even if you fail to start the engine the starter motor will stop turning automati cally after a short time After the starter motor has stopped or if there is some problem with the system the starter motor will rotate only while the engine switch is being pressed Stopping the engine Depress the engine switch to stop the engine after the vehicle stopped com p
342. ses and pipes front rear Brake fluid level check replacement Brake pedal stroke check adjustment Parking brake lever and cable Lever movement check adjustment Tires including tire rotation Wheel discs Wheel bearings Suspension system Propeller shafts i AWD Drive axle boots Manual transaxle oil Level check amp replacement Genuine SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 Other than SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W 80 Fluid level Fluid deterioration check Fluid hose Transfer oil i AWD Rear differential oil i AWD Steering system Steering wheel movement Power steering if equipped All latches hinges and locks Air conditioner filter element if equipped linkage 2 BH 20 1 gl 8 1 1 E _ 1 DD 1 2 This table shows the service schedule to 125000 km 75000 miles Beyond 125000 km 75000 miles perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart Clean more frequently if the air flow from the air conditioner decreases 2 Check or replace as necessary if you usually drive with high speed or high engine revolutions 7 14 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Drive Belt A WARNING When the engine is running keep hands hair clothing tools etc away from the moving fan and drive belts Check the accessory drive belt only for damage You do not need check it for ten
343. show the fol lowing message KEY FOB NOT DETECTED Unreleased Steering Lock Warning If the steering lock remains engaged when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON the information dis play in the instrument cluster will show a message to alert you to that condition Refer to Information display in the Before Driving section for details Keyless Push Start System Provided the keyless start system remote controller is within the interior workable area Refer to the related explanation in this section you can use the engine switch for starting the engine and selecting a power supply mode ACC or ON In addition the following functions can be used Keyless entry function Refer to Keyless Start System Remote Controller in the Before Driving section for details Locking and unlocking doors using a request switch Refer to Keyless Start System Remote Controller in the Before Driving section for details Opening the trunk lid from outside using the trunk lid request switch Immobilizer anti theft function Refer to Immobilizer System in the Before Driv ing section for details Engine Switch Illumination The engine switch is illuminated lit in the following situations The driver s door is open only when the engine is not in operation For 15 seconds after the driver s door is closed only when the engine is not in oper
344. sible with a vacuum cleaner Using a mild soap solution rub stained areas with a clean damp cloth To remove soap rub the areas again with a cloth dampened with water Repeat this until the stain is removed or a commercial carpet cleaner for tougher stains If you use a carpet cleaner APPEARANCE CARE carefully follow the manufacturer s instruc Cleaning the Center Pillar Garnishing Palm oil based detergent tions and precautions Caring for Aluminum Wheels Instrument panel and console NOTE LZ Do not use an acidic or alkaline deter Wipe up spills containing chemicals alco P gent to wash aluminum wheels These DOR EIC S immediately damp types of detergent will cause permanent cloth Use a mild soap solution if neces sary Do not use cleaners or polishes con em gt pe P d taining strong solvents or acidic solutions 1 _ These chemicals may stain and discolor X Do not use a bristle brush and soap con damage finished surfaces 1 Use the same wax you use for the body Cicaningthe ExIeHor surfaces also for waxing aluminum CAUTION BEN wheels to protect their clear finish It is important that your vehicle be 1 Center pillar garnishing kept clean and free from dirt Failure NOTE to keep your vehicle clean may result The garnishing is vulnerable to damage in fading of the paint or corrosion to Use chamois or a soft cloth to clea
345. sition make sure that there is nothing around the striker Any foreign materials prevent the seatback from being locked securely 2 33 57L21041 1 LOCK 2 UNLOCK Raise the seatback until it locks into place After returning the seat try moving the seatback to make sure they are securely latched A WARNING Do not put your hand into the rear seatback lock opening or your finger may get caught and be injured CAUTION After securing the rear seatback make sure that it is locked securely If it is not a red sign will appear behind the release lever CAUTION When returning the rear seatback to the normal position do not allow any foreign material to enter the lock opening This may prevent the seatback from being locked securely When returning the rear seatback to the normal position be sure to handle it carefully by hand to avoid any damage to the lock itself Do not push it by using some material or by applying excessive force As the lock is designed exclusively for securing the rear seatback do not use it for any other purpose Incorrect use of it may cause dam age to the inside of the lock and prevent the seatback from being locked securely Locking Rear Seatback 57L30104 1 To lock 2 To unlock To prevent theft the rear seatback has a locking function to prevent it from being folded down Insert the key into the lock behind the lock lev
346. solution wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth To remove soap wipe the areas again with a soft cloth dampened with water Wipe the areas dry with a soft dry cloth Repeat this until the dirt or stain is removed or use a commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt or stains If you use a leather cleaner care fully follow the manufacture s instructions and precautions Do not use solvent type cleaners or abrasive cleaners NOTE In order to keep leather upholstery look ing good it should be cleaned at least twice a year e If leather upholstery becomes wet immediately wipe it dry with tissue paper or a soft cloth Water may cause leather to harden and shrink if it is not wiped off e When parking on sunny days select a shady place or use a sunshade If leather upholstery is exposed to direct sunlight for a long time it may discolor and shrink e As is common with natural materials leather is inherently irregular in grain and cowhide has spots in its natural state These do not affect the performance of the leather in any way Seat belts Clean seat belts with a mild soap and water Do not use bleach or dye on the belts They may weaken the fabric in the belts Vinyl floor mats Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl with water or mild soap Use a brush to help loosen dirt After dirt is loosened rinse the mat thoroughly with water and dry it in the shade Carpets Remove dirt and soil as much as pos
347. sportation DOT marking indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards The letters and numbers following the DOT marking is the Tire Iden tification Number TIN The TIN identifies the tire manufacturer and plant tire size and date the tire was manufactured Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three perfor mance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance Refer to the Uniform Tire Quality Grading section for more details INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE F Load Rating Load rating is the maximum weight a tire is designed to sup port in normal service G Max Inflation Pressure Max inflation pressure is the max imum inflation pressure a tire is designed for H Tire Ply Material These tire markings describe the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread Load Index and Speed Rating The two or three digit number is the tire s load index the maximum load a tire can carry at the speed indicated by its speed symbol at the maximum inflation pressure The higher the number is the greater the load carrying capacity The letter symbol denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time Ratings are listed below Letter Rating Speed Rating Q 99 mph R 106 mph S 112 mph T 118 mph 7
348. ssure for this spare is 420 kPa 60 psi Do not use tire chains on the compact spare If you must use tire chains rearrange the wheels so standard tires and wheels are fitted to the front axle Continued 7 35 Continued The compact spare tire has a much shorter tread life than the conventional tires on your vehi cle Replace the tire as soon as the tread indicator appears e When replacing the compact tire use a replacement tire with the exact same size and con struction wear CAUTION For intelligent All Wheel Drive i AWD models driving with an underinflated compact spare tire or over 80 km h 50 mph while using a compact spare tire can result in damage to the drive train son tires which are designed for use in summer and most winter conditions For improved traction in severe winter conditions SUZUKI recommends mounting radial snow tires on all four wheels Snow tires must be the same size as the standard tires Also be sure to use the tires of the same type and brand on all four wheels of your vehi cle GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOL OGY Accessory Weight the combined weight in excess of those standard items which may be replaced of CVT power steering power brakes power windows power seats radio and heater to the extent that these items are available as factory installed equipment whether installed or not Cold Tire Inflation Pressure the pres sure in a t
349. st move the vehicle slowly while checking around it using your direct vision or rearview mirrors There is increased risk of an accident if you control the vehi cle relying only on the parking sen Sor Avoid hitting the sensor areas or directing the nozzle of a high pres sure car washer onto the sensor areas Otherwise the sensors may be damaged NOTE f the bumper hits a hard object the sen sors on it may not work properly If this occurs have the sensors inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer vehicle 3 24 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Under the following conditions the parking sensor system may not work normally because the sensors cannot detect obstacles correctly Sensors are covered with mud ice or other materials Such materials must be removed for normal operation Sensors are wet from water splashes or heavy rain Sensors are covered by a hand sticker accessory etc There is an accessory or other object attached within the sen sor s sensing area Items such as tow hooks a back lit license plate commercially available corner poles radio antenna etc are installed on the bumper The height of the bumper is changed due to alteration to the suspension or other causes The sensor areas are extremely hot from direct sunlight or cold due to freezing weather The vehicle is on a rough sur face slope gravel road or grass field Th
350. stem remote controller or by push ing the request switch The theft deterrent light will go out indicating that the theft deterrent alarm system is disarmed How to stop the alarm Should the alarm be triggered accidentally change the ignition mode to ON by press ing the engine switch The alarm will then stop NOTE Even after the alarm has stopped if you lock the doors using the keyless start system remote controller or by pushing the request switch the theft deterrent alarm system will be rearmed with a delay of about 20 seconds If you disconnect the battery while the theft deterrent alarm system is in the armed condition or the alarm is actually in operation the alarm will be triggered or re triggered when the battery is then reconnected although in the latter case the alarm remains stopped for the period between disconnection and reconnec tion of the battery Even after the alarm has stopped at the end of the predetermined operation time it will be triggered again if any door is opened without disarming the theft deterrent alarm system Checking whether the alarm has been triggered during parking If the alarm was triggered due to an unau thorized entry into the vehicle and you then change the ignition mode to ON by press ing the engine switch the theft deterrent light will flash rapidly for about 8 seconds and a buzzer will beep 4 times during this period If this happens check whether your
351. straint could be seriously injured The back of a rear facing child restraint would be too close to the inflating air bag According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in rear seating positions than in front seating posi tions Whenever possible SUZUKI recom mends you install child restraints in the rear seat 2 63 The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable the front passenger s front air bag when the system senses a properly seated adult in the front passen gers seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the air bag to be enabled the PASS AIR BAG OFF indica tor will remain off to remind you that the air bag is active If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat and the PASS AIR BAG indicator comes on it could be because that person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens unfasten the seat belts sit upright in the center of the seat with the seatback nearly vertical and your legs outstretched and refasten the seat belt 52D258 When seated as shown in the above illus tration the front passenger sensing sys tem senses a properly seated occupant and enables the air bag When using a seat belt extender follow the instructions in the Seat Belt Extender section A WARNING Do not place any heavy objects on the front passenger s seat The pres sure sensors in the sensor
352. subsequently pronouncing Select phone Change or Delete phone allows users to implement each corresponding operation Set passkey Passkey setting Pronounce 4 to 8 digit number and Confirm to confirm the operation Delete phone Telephone deletion Pronounce phone name and Confirm to confirm the operation Handsfree power HF On Off Pronounce Turn on to enable HF and Turn off to disable HF 1 When List phones is pronounced telephone names are read in sequence When the corresponding telephone is read press the Talk button 5 61 Bluetooth Audio NOTE Set up is not available when no cell phone is registered word in Bluetooth audio mode OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT If audio device is registered and no cell phone is connected you can use 3rd 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Function Pair audio player Audio device connection Pronounce audio device name Confirm to confirm the operation Audio device selection 1 Pronounce audio device name 1 and Confirm to confirm the operation Select audio player 2 Pronounce From for connection from this unit or From audio for connection from the audio device and subsequently Confirm to con firm the operation Change of audio device name 1 Pronounce audio device name and Confirm to confirm the opera e Chan
353. switch in the Down posi tion 3 Close the front window by holding the switch in the Up position and keep holding the switch for 2 seconds after the window fully closed 4 Check the front window if the auto down up feature work Pinching Prevention Function if equipped The front window is equipped with the pinching prevention function The function detects a foreign object caught in the win dow while being closed by the auto up feature which you can close the window without holding the window switch in the Up position and stops the window clos ing to prevent damage A WARNING To avoid injuring an occupant by win dow entrapment be sure no part of the occupant s body such as hands or head is in the path of the electric window when closing it The function may not detect the object depending on size hardness and position of the object caught by the closing window CAUTION The pinching prevention function does not act while you are holding the window switch in the Up posi tion The pinching prevention function may not detect an object caught in the window where just before the window fully closed NOTE Even if you cannot close the window by the auto up feature because there may be something wrong with the pinching preven tion function you can close the window by holding the window switch in the Up posi tion If you drive in extreme off road condition the
354. sy Lights 5 79 Footwell Lights 5 79 Trunk 5 79 Spot Light 5 80 Accessory Socket 5 80 Assist Grips cscs sascascecsastencessncceccexecetesaesscceasteesceseaze 5 82 HOOKS Rt 5 83 Sunroof if equipped 5 83 Glove pr 5 85 Overhead Console 5 86 Lidded Instrument Panel Box 5 87 Cup Holder and Storage Area if equipped 5 87 Front Seat Back Pocket if equipped 5 89 FOOUGSE M 5 89 Center Console 5 89 X 5 90 Floor Mats if equipped 5 91 Luggage Under box 5 92 Net Rope Hooks aenean nnn nannnas 5 92 Roof Rack Anchors if equipped 5 92 HomeLink if equipped 5 93 Frame HOOKS sitive sess sicccactendccwoacacasvecsaxcacesccaanstenssceavestivacsauses 5 96 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Autom
355. t System air bags section in addition to this Seat Belt Pretensioner System sec tion and follow all those precautions 2 54 BEFORE DRIVING The front seat belt retractors and lap belt anchorages are each provided with a pre tensioner The pretensioner tightens the seat belt so the belt fits the occupant s body more snugly in the event of a frontal or side crash The retractors will remain locked after the pretensioners are acti vated Upon activation some noise will occur and some smoke may be released These conditions are not harmful and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle The driver and all passengers must be properly restrained by wearing seat belts at all times whether or not a pretensioner is equipped at their seating position to help minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash Sit fully back in the seat sit up straight do not lean forward or sideways Adjust the belt so the lap portion of the belt is worn low across the pelvis not across the waist Please refer to the Seat Adjustment sec tion and the instructions and precautions about the seat belts in this Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems section for details on proper seat and seat belt adjustments Please note that the pretensioners along with the air bags will activate only in severe frontal or side collisions They are not designed to activate in rear impacts roll overs or minor frontal collisions Th
356. t and can lead to tire failure and may affect steering control and brake effectiveness This could lead to an accident resulting in severe injury or death The low tire pressure warning light can come on due to normal causes such as natural air leaks and pressure changes caused by changes in temperature or atmospheric pressure Adjusting the air pressure in the tires to the pressure shown on the tire information placard should cause the low tire pressure warning light to turn off If the light turns on again shortly after adjusting the pressure in your tires you may have a flat tire If you have a flat tire replace it with the spare tire Refer to Jacking Instructions in the EMER GENCY SERVICE section Refer to Replacing Tires and or Wheels for instructions on how to restore normal oper ation of the tire pressure monitoring sys tem after you have had a flat tire LOW TIRE PRESSURE 50 F 491 Miles 57L31025 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The information display shows the above warning and indicator message when this light comes on When the tire inflation pressure is adjusted in high altitude areas the low tire pressure light may not turn off even after tire inflation pressure adjustment In this case adjust the inflation pressure to a slightly higher pressure than is shown on the tire information placard e The low tire pressure warning light may turn off temporarily after
357. t fuel must be wiped clean with a soft cloth Leaving the fuel as is could lead to a fire or other unexpected accident Fuel will also cause spots discoloration or cracks on the paintwork in the area Close the fuel filler cap firmly after refueling A loose cap may cause fuel leakage and eventually a fire If you need to replace the fuel cap use a genuine SUZUKI cap Use of an improper cap can result in a malfunction of the fuel system or 57151020 emission control system It may To open the engine hood also result in fuel leakage in the 1 Pull the hood release handle 1 event of an accident located on the outboard side of the drivers side of the instrument panel This will disengage the engine hood lock halfway 57L51066 2 Push the under hood release lever 2 sideways with your finger as shown in the illustration While pushing the lever lift up the engine hood 5 75 57L50015 3 Continue to lift up the hood until it is high enough to support with the prop rod 3 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT To close the engine hood 1 Lift the hood up slightly and remove the prop rod from the hole 5 Put the prop rod back to the holding clip 4 2 Lower the hood close to the bumper then let it drop down Make sure the hood is securely latched after closing A WARNING Make sure the hood is fully closed and latched before driving If it is not it can fly up unexpe
358. t reminder works as follows 1 The driver s seat belt reminder light will come on for about 20 seconds when the ignition mode is changed to ON by pressing the engine switch the engine switch then will blink for about 55 seconds When the light comes on a buzzer will also sound intermittently for about 6 seconds Reminder 1 2 If the vehicle is driven vehicle speed gt 8 km h Reminder 2 will operate about 30 seconds after Reminder 1 has fin ished If the vehicle is not driven vehicle speed 8 km h Reminder 2 will oper ate when driving starts vehicle speed gt 8 km h 3 Reminder 3 will operate about 3 min utes after Reminder 2 has finished 4 Even if the drivers seat belt remains unbuckled after Reminder 3 there will be no further reminders If the driver has buckled his or her seat belt and later unbuckles the seat belt the reminder system will be activated from Reminder 1 or Reminder 2 according to the vehicle speed Refer to the flow chart The driver s seat belt reminder will be auto matically canceled when the drivers seat belt is buckled or the ignition mode is 2 42 BEFORE DRIVING changed to LOCK OFF by pressing the engine switch Front passenger s seat belt reminder if equipped The front passengers seat belt reminder will activate only when there is a passen ger sitting in the front seat In some situa tions however such as when you place heavy objects in the front seat
359. t size or type on the four wheels of your vehicle Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving which may lead to an accident The size and type of tires used should be only those approved by SUZUKI Motor Corporation as standard or optional equipment for your vehi cle Tire Inflation Pressure Tire inflation pressure should be checked when the tire is cold Cold tire inflation pressure is the pressure in a tire that has been driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km or has been standing for three hours or more EXAMPLE 8035025 The front and rear tire pressure speci fications for your vehicle are shown below and are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label which is located on the driver s door lock pillar The Tire and Loading Information Label contains the following informa tion Seating Capacity Maximum Allowed Combined Weight of Occupants and Cargo Original Tire Size Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure of Original Tires Size of Compact Spare Tire Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure of Compact Spare Tire Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures Front Tires E ifs Rear Tires E ifa Compact Spare Tire ifa INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE NOTE The tire inflation pressure will change due to changes in atmospheric pres sure temperature or tire temperature when driving To reduce the chance that the low tire pressure warni
360. t some air bag components may be hot for a while after inflation A seat belt helps keep you in the proper position for maximum protection when an air bag inflates Adjust your seat as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Sit fully back in your seat sit up straight do not lean over the steering wheel or dashboard Front occu pants should not lean on or sleep against the door Please refer to the Seat Adjust ment section and the Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems section in the BEFORE DRIVING section for details on proper seat and seat belt adjustments 2 65 65D610 54G582 A WARNING The driver should not lean over the steering wheel The front passen ger should not rest his or her body against the dashboard or other wise get too close to the dash board For vehicles with side air bags rear side air bags and side curtain air bags occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door In these situations the out of position occupant would be too close to an inflating air bag and may suffer severe injury Do not attach any objects to or place any objects over the steering wheel or dashboard Do not place any objects between the air bag and the driver or front passenger These objects may interfere with air bag operation or may be propelled by the air bag in the event of a crash Either of these conditions may cause severe injury
361. t your vehicle s body 3 Wash the entire exterior with a mild detergent or car wash soap using a sponge or soft cloth The sponge or cloth should be frequently soaked in the soap solution parts such as spoilers cannot be damaged If you are in doubt consult the car wash operator for advice 9 5 Waxing 60B211S After washing the vehicle waxing and pol ishing are recommended to further protect and beautify the paint Only use waxes and polishes of good quality When using waxes polishes observe the precautions specified by the manufacturers APPEARANCE CARE 9 6 APPEARANCE CARE 54G072 GENERAL INFORMATION GENERAL INFORMATION Identification Numbers 10 1 Safety Certification Label 10 2 Emission Compliance Label for U S A 10 2 Warranties 10 2 On Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data Recorders nd 10 3 Reporting Safety Defects 10 4 GENERAL INFORMATION Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification Number EXAMPLE for some vehicles Sz 80 090 Rc 79J019 10 1 The Vehicle Identification Number VIN may be found in the location shown in the above illustrations This number
362. tches on the steering wheel p i OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Adjusting the volume To increase the volume lean the VOL switch 1 to the upper side The volume continues to increase until you release the switch To decrease the volume lean the VOL switch 1 to the lower side The volume continues to decrease until you release the switch To mute press the switch 2 Selecting the mode Press the switch 3 Each time the button is pressed the mode is switched as follows FM1 Radio FM2 Radio CD Bluetooth audio USB iPod AM Radio XM1 if equipped if equipped if equipped You can also turn on the audio system by pushing the switch 3 5 64 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Selecting the radio station FM1 FM2 AM mode To select the next preset station lean Selecting the channel XM1 XM2 XM3 mode To select the next preset channel lean the SEEK switch 4 to the upper side briefly To select the previous preset station lean the SEEK switch 4 to the lower side briefly To scan to a higher frequency radio sta tion lean the SEEK switch 4 to the upper side for 1 sec or longer To scan to a lower frequency radio sta tion lean the SEEK switch 4 to the lower side for 1 sec or longer 5 65 the SEEK switch 4 to the upper side briefly To select the previous preset channel lean the SEEK switch 4 to t
363. tems other than ABS the ESP OFF light comes on and stays on For details of the ESP systems refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in the OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE sec tion 50G051 This light comes on when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to and goes out when the engine is started The light will come on and remain on if there is insufficient oil pressure If the light comes on when driving pull off the road as soon as you can and stop the engine Check the oil level and add oil if necessary If there is enough oil the lubri cation system should be inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer before you drive the vehicle again CAUTION f you operate the engine with this light on severe engine damage can result Do not rely on the Oil Pressure Light to indicate the need to add oil Be sure to periodically check the engine oil level 2 72 BEFORE DRIVING Charging Light Driver s Seat Belt Reminder Light AIR BAG Light 50G052 This light comes on when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON and goes out when the engine is started The light will come on and remain on if there is something wrong with the bat tery charging system If the light comes on when the engine is running the charging system should be inspected immediately by an authorized SUZUKI dealer 2 73 I 7 60G0
364. the center side and rear outlets Bi level d 57L51008 Temperature controlled air comes out of the floor center side rear and rear floor outlets Heat e 57L51009 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Temperature controlled air comes out of the floor rear floor and the side outlets also comes out of the windshield defroster outlets and also comes slightly out of the side defroster outlets and the side outlets Heat amp defrost f 97 0 57151010 Temperature controlled air comes out of the floor and rear floor outlets the wind shield defroster outlets the side defroster outlets and the side outlets All areas other than Mexico NOTE When you select the Heat amp defrost func tion the air intake mode will automatically switch to FRESH AIR Defrost switch 7 7 w FRONT REAR 57L51011 Push the defrost switch 7 to turn on the defroster Defrost 57L51012 5 6 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Temperature controlled air comes out of the windshield defroster outlets the side defroster outlets and the side outlets 1 All areas other than Mexico NOTE When you push the defrost switch 7 the FRESH AIR mode will be automatically selected and the air conditioning switch will automatically turn on A C will appear on the display Furthermore it is impossible to return
365. the driver s seat and seatback properly adjusted before you start driving A WARNING To avoid excessive seat belt slack which reduces the effectiveness of the seat belts as a safety device make sure that the seats are adjusted before the seat belts are fastened 57L21109 The adjustment lever for each front seat is located under the front of the seat To adjust the seat position pull up on the adjustment lever and slide the seat forward or rearward After adjustment try to move the seat forward and rearward to ensure that it is securely latched 57L21110 If the drivers seat is equipped with a seat height adjuster lever on the outboard side of the seat raise or lower the seat by pull ing up or down the adjuster lever Adjusting seatbacks A WARNING All seatbacks should always be in an upright position when driving or seat belt effectiveness may be reduced Seat belts are designed to offer maxi mum protection when seatbacks are in the upright position 57L21111 To adjust the seatback angle of front seats pull up the lever on the outboard side of the seat move the seatback to the desired position and release the lever to lock the seatback in place After adjustment try moving the seatback to make sure it is securely locked BEFORE DRIVING Power Seat if equipped Adjusting seat position A WARNING Never attempt to adjust the driver s s
366. the nounce a registered name registered to the Phonebook Phonebook 6 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH Pressing Confirm after selecting 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm Delete allows the selected number to The Bluetooth main menu appears and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH be deleted from the list 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the SOUND knob 1 to select Phone selection book and press the TUNE FOLDER NOTE PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine e Selection of Go Back displays the pre the selection vious menu 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH Up to 20 numbers can be registered in SOUND knob 1 to select Add Entry Phonebook and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select By Voice By Phone Manual Input or Call History and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection By Voice Registers through the voice command By Phone Registers through the telephone Manual Input Registers with use of the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 Call History Registers through the incoming outgoing call records 5 41 Name change Change Name The name of number registered in phonebook is changed 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Pho
367. the selection 5 46 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 7 Pronounce the name to be used at voice recognition 8 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Confirm and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu 5 47 List of telephones List Phones The registered name of phones are dis played in sequence 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select List Phones and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection The names of registered phones are displayed in sequence NOTE Selection of Go Back displays the previ ous menu Passkey setting Set Passkey The security number Passkey is speci fied 1 Press the Off Hook button 7 The Bluetooth main menu appears 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to determine the selection 3 Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob 1 to select Phone Setup and press the TUNE FOLDER PUS
368. ting switch the Auto On Headlight System when the lighting switch is in the AUTO position and the Daytime Running Light D R L system Of these systems the D R L system does not work while the parking brake is applied The three systems work together to operate your lights as shown in the following chart E G Engine ON Lights ON LIGHT When it is light around the light sensor 5 DARK When it is dark around the light sensor 5 Ignition mode B men Lighting Main lights to Cor AGC em position Pe operated E G OFF E G OFF E G RUNNING LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK D R L ON ON oor m Head lights D R L ON exo 7 Head lights D R L ON ON 3 DE Las lights ON ON ON ON ON ON ail lights Head lights DRL 4 8 Position lights ON ON ON ON ON ON Tail lights Head lights ON ON ON ON ON ON To turn the lights on or off twist the knob on the end of the lever There are four posi tions OFF 1 All lights are off AUTO 2 This function works when the ignition mode has been changed to ON by press ing the engine switch The headlights and position lights are turned on and off auto matically according to the amount of out side light detected by a sensor They go out automatically when you change the ignition mode to
369. to the RECIRCULATED AIR mode even if you push the air intake selec tor 5 In cold weather air flows out of the defroster outlets but the air conditioning does not turn on even though the A C indi cator comes on as well as the defrost indi cator 2 Mexico NOTE When you push the defrost switch 7 the FRESH AIR mode will be automatically selected and the air conditioning switch will automatically turn on A C will appear on the display In cold weather air flows out of the defroster outlets but the air condi tioning does not turn on even though the A C indicator comes on as well as the defrost indicator 5 7 Air conditioning switch 8 lt a gt MODE DUAL AIC 8 57L51016 The air conditioning switch 8 is used to turn on and off the air conditioning system To turn on the air conditioning system push in the switch will appear on the display and the indicator on the switch will come on To turn off the air conditioning system push in the switch again A C and the indicator will go off You can use the air conditioning switch 8 to manually turn the air conditioner on or off according to your preference When you turn the air conditioning switch off the cli mate control system cannot lower the inside temperature below outside temperature System Operating Instructions Automatic operation 57L51
370. to the recom mended tire inflation pressure The ESP may not work properly if tires are fitted with tire chains The ESP may not work properly if the tires are excessively worn Be sure to replace tires when the tread wear indicators in the grooves appear on the tread surface The ESP is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road A WARNING The ESP may not work properly if engine related parts such as the muffler are not equivalent to stan dard equipment or are extremely deteriorated Do not modify the vehicle s sus pension since the ESP may not operate correctly The ESP indicator lights are described below ESP Warning Light The ESP warning light in the instrument cluster comes on if there is a problem in the electronic control system of the ESP when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to This indicator light also blinks at a rate of 8 times per second when one of the systems other than the ABS is activated CAUTION If the ESP warning light comes on and stays on while driving there may be a malfunction of the ESP sys tems other than ABS You should have the systems inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer NOTE When the ESP warning light comes on and stays on while driving indicating a malfunction of the ESP systems other than ABS the brake system will function OPER
371. ton 2 If you left a CD ejected for a period of about 15 seconds it will be automatically drawn inside the unit Auto reload func tion only at ACC off The backup eject function This function allows you to eject a CD with the ACC power turned off by pressing the Eject button 2 CAUTION If you forcefully try to push an ejected CD inside the unit before auto reload ing the disc surface might be scratched Eject completely before reloading Listening to a CD When a CD is inserted it is automatically played back When a CD is already inside the unit press the CD button 3 to play back the CD Selecting a track Press the Up button 4 to listen to the next track Press the Down button 5 twice to listen to the previous track When the Down button 5 is pressed once the track currently being played will start again at the beginning Fast forwarding Rewinding a track Hold in the Up button 4 to advance a track rapidly Hold in the Down button 5 to rewind a track Random play Press the RDM button 7 Each time the button is pressed the mode changes in the following order OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT NOTE To cancel repeat play press the RPT but ton 6 to change the repeat play mode to OFF TRACK REPEAT The repeat indicator RPT lights The track being currently played is played repeatedly Repeat play Press the RPT button 6 Each time the button is press
372. ton 3 twice to listen to the previous track When the Down button 3 is pressed once the track currently being played will start again at the beginning Fast forwarding Rewinding a track Hold in the Up button 2 to advance a track rapidly Hold in the Down button 3 to rewind a track OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Random play Press the RDM button 5 Each time the button is pressed the mode changes in the following order Repeat play Press the RPT button 4 Each time the button is pressed repeat play mode changes as follows OFF gt FOLDER RANDOM gt ALL RANDOM OFF gt FILE REPEAT gt FOLDER REPEAT NOTE To cancel random play press the RDM button 5 several times to change the ran dom play mode to OFF FOLDER RANDOM The random indicator RDM F lights The tracks in the current folder are played at random ALL RANDOM The random indicator RDM lights The tracks in the disc that is loaded are played at random NOTE To cancel repeat play press the RPT but ton 4 several times to change the repeat play mode to OFF FILE REPEAT The repeat indicator RPT lights The track currently being played is played repeatedly FOLDER REPEAT The repeat indicator RPT F lights All the tracks in the folder currently being played are played repeatedly 5 28 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Display change Press the DISP button 6 Each time it is
373. trust this job to your dealer 7 45 Interior Light Front dome light P a j 57L71014 Pull down the lens by using a flat blade screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as shown To install it simply push it back in Rear dome Light 57L71015 Pull down the lens by using a flat blade screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as shown To install it simply push it back in The bulb can be removed by simply pulling it out When replacing the bulb make sure that the contact springs are holding the bulb securely Spot light LV 1d j d 57L71016 Pull down the lens by using a flat blade screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as shown To install it simply push it back in Vanity mirror light 57L71017 Pull down the lens by using a flat blade screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as shown To install it simply push it back in The bulb can be removed by simply pulling it out When replacing the bulb make sure that the contact springs are holding the bulb securely Courtesy light 57L71018 Pull down the lens by using a flat blade screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as shown To install it simply push it back in INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Headlights Low beam light 1 Open the engine hood 57L71019 2 Remove the cover 1 using a flat blade screwdriv
374. ts or wires The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or yellow tubing and the couplers are yellow for easy identification Do not leave the engine running in garages or other confined areas When the engine is running keep hands clothing tools and other objects away from the moving fan and drive belt When it is necessary to do service work with the engine running make sure that the parking brake is set fully and the transaxle is in Neutral for manual transaxle vehicles or Park for CVT Continued A WARNING Continued e Do not touch ignition wires or other ignition system parts when starting the engine or when the engine is running or you could receive an electric shock Be careful not to touch a hot engine exhaust manifold and pipes muffler radiator and water hoses Do not allow smoking sparks or flames around fuel or the battery Flammable fumes are present Do not get under your vehicle if it is supported only with the portable jack provided in your vehicle Be careful not to cause accidental short circuits between the positive and negative battery terminals Keep used oil engine coolant and other fluids away from children and pets Dispose of used fluids prop erly never pour them on the ground into sewers etc NOTICE for U S A Maintenance replacement or repair of the emission control devices and sys tems may be performed by any automo bile repair establishment or individual us
375. u press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON this gauge gives an approximate indication of the amount of fuel in the fuel tank F stands for full and E stands for empty If the indicator gets off the graduation of E not character E refill the tank as soon as possible NOTE The indicator moves a little depending on road conditions for example slope or curve and driving conditions because of fuel moving in the tank 2 78 BEFORE DRIVING If the low fuel warning light 1 comes on fill the fuel tank immediately When the low fuel warning light 1 comes on a ding sounds once to remind you to fill the fuel If you do not fill the fuel a ding sounds every time you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON CAUTION Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damag ing the catalytic converter NOTE The activation point of the low fuel warning light 1 varies depending on road condi tions for example slope or curve and driving conditions because of fuel moving in the tank The mark 2 indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the left side of the vehi cle 2 79 Temperature Gauge Brightness Control 57L21060 When the ignition mode has been changed to ON by pressing the engine switch this gauge indicates the engine coolant tem peratu
376. ughness around the edges The unit may not work or the sound may skip if such discs are used Use a ball point pen B etc to remove the roughness C from edges of the disc before insertion inside the unit Never stick labels on the surface of the compact disc or mark the surface with a pencil or pen Do not use any solvents such as commer cially available cleaners anti static spray or thinner to clean compact discs 5 12 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Do not use compact discs that have large Do not expose compact discs to direct scratches are misshaped or cracked etc sunlight or any heat source Use of such discs will cause damage or prevent the system from operating prop NOTE erly Do not use commercially available CD protection sheets or discs equipped with stabilizers etc e These may get caught in the internal mechanism and damage the disc CD R discs may not be able to playback in this unit due to the recording condi tions e CD RW discs can not playback in this unit 5 13 Part 15 of the FCC Rules FCC Warning Any unauthorized changes or modifica tions to this equipment would void the user s authority to operate this device A WARNING Laser product This product is a class laser prod uct Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo sure Do n
377. ur vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying American Suzuki Motor Corp If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or American Suzuki Motor Corp To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Ave SE Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other infor mation about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov To contact American Suzuki owners in the continental United States can call toll free 1 800 934 0934 or write to American Suzuki Motor Corporation Automotive Customer Relations 3251 East Imperial Highway Brea CA 92821 6795 For owners outside the continental United States please refer to the dis tributors address listed in your War ranty Information booklet For vehicles registered for use and principally operated in Canada please contact Suzuki Canada Inc at 1 905 889 2677 extension 2254 or write to Suzuki Canada Inc Customer Relations 100 East Beaver Creek Road Richmond Hill
378. urn the lock knob forward then pull and hold the door handle as you close the door NOTE If the remote controller is left within the inside sensing area the locking of the front doors will be cancelled To unlock a driver s door from outside the vehicle insert the key and turn the top of the key toward the rear of the vehicle EXAMPLE 57L21005 1 LOCK 2 UNLOCK To lock a door from inside the vehicle turn the lock knob forward Turn the lock knob rearward to unlock the door To lock a rear door from outside the vehi cle turn the lock knob forward and close the door You do not need to pull and hold the door handle as you close the door Power Door Locking System You can lock and unlock all the doors simultaneously by Turning the key in a driver s door lock or Pushing the power door locking switch located on the driver s side or the front passengers side door panel 57L21006 1 LOCK 2 UNLOCK 3 Rear 4 Front when using the key To lock all the doors simultaneously insert the key in a drivers door lock and turn the top of the key toward the front of the vehi cle once To unlock all the doors simultaneously insert the key in a driver s door lock and turn the top of the key toward the rear of the vehicle twice To unlock only one of the drivers doors insert the key in that door lock and turn the top of the key toward the rear of the vehicle once D
379. urself and others You should also avoid driving when you are tired sick irritated or under stress 4 1 Break In CAUTION The future performance and reliabil ity of the engine depends on the care and restraint exercised during its early life It is especially important to observe the following precautions during the initial 960 km 600 miles vehicle operation After starting do not race the engine Warm it up gradually Avoid prolonged vehicle operation at a constant speed Moving parts will break in better if you vary your speed Start off from a stop slowly Avoid full throttle starts Avoid hard stopping especially during the first 320 km 200 miles of driving Do not drive slowly with the tran saxle in a high gear Drive the vehicle at moderate engine speeds Catalytic Converter WTR 68KM085 The purpose of the catalytic converter is to minimize the amount of harmful pollutants in your vehicle s exhaust Use of leaded fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic converters is prohibited by federal law because lead deactivates the pollutant reducing components of the catalyst sys tem The converter is designed to last the life of the vehicle under normal usage and when unleaded fuel is used No special mainte nance is required on the converter How ever it is very important to keep the engine properly tuned Engine misfiring which can result from an improperly tun
380. uses the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Each tire including the spare 2 69 should be checked at least once a month when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehi cle placard and owner s manual The low tire pressure warning light is also used to inform you of a TPMS malfunction When the system detects a malfunction this light will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illu minated This sequence will be repeated after the ignition mode is changed to ON by pressing the engine switch as long as the malfunction exists NOTE The low tire pressure warning light may not come on immediately if you have a sudden loss of air pressure A WARNING If the low tire pressure warning light does not light for 2 seconds after pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON or comes on and blinks while driving there may be a problem with the tire pressure monitoring system Have your vehi cle inspected by an_ authorized SUZUKI dealer Even if the light turns off after blinking indicating that mon itoring system has recovered make sure to have an authorized SUZUKI dealer check the system A WARNING The load rating of your tires is reduced at lower inflation pressures If your tires become even m
381. ut reserve power in the brake system you can still stop the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal harder than normally required How ever the stopping distance may be longer Brake Assist System When you slam the brakes on the brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal firmly NOTE If you quickly and forcefully depress the brakes you may hear a clicking sound in the brake pedal This is normal and indi cates that the brake assist system is acti vated properly 3 28 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Anti Lock Brake System ABS if equipped ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec tronically controlling braking pressure It will also help you maintain steering control when braking on slippery surfaces or when braking hard The ABS works automatically so you do not need any special braking technique Just push the brake pedal down without pumping The ABS will operate whenever it senses that the wheels are locking up You may feel the brake pedal pulsate while the ABS is operating NOTE The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is under about 10 km h 6 mph 3 29 A WARNING On some types of loose surfaces such as gravel snow covered roads etc the stopping distance required for an ABS equipped vehi cle may be slightly greater than for a comparable vehicle with a con ventional brake system With a convention
382. uter systems which monitor and control several aspects of vehicle per formance including the following Emission related components and engine parameters such as engine speed and throttle position are moni tored to provide emissions control and to provide optimum fuel econ omy Your vehicle also has an on board diagnostic system which mon itors and records information about emission related malfunctions Signals from various sensors are monitored to provide air bag deploy ment f your vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes conditions such as vehicle speed and brake perfor mance are monitored so that the ABS system can provide effective antilock braking If your vehicle has an lectronic Stability Program ESP system conditions such as yaw rate lateral acceleration and brake fluid pressure are monitored so that the system can help the driver control the vehicle in diffi cult driving situations Some information may be stored by the on board computers during normal 10 3 operation of the vehicle This stored information can assist technicians in repairing the vehicle when malfunc tions occur Other information is stored only in the event of crash by computer Systems that are commonly called Event Data Recorders EDRs In a crash event EDRs such as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Mod ule SDM in your vehicle may record information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated
383. ve backward at the ward to adjust the angle of the seatback same time 2 25 Adjusting the Lumbar Support if equipped 57L21033 Use the lumbar support switch 3 located at the rear of the reclining switch to adjust the force with which the seatback supports the lumbar area of your back Push the front button on the switch for firmer support Push the rear button on the switch for softer support Seat Position Memory System if equipped Power seat if equipped This function allows you to restore your preferred preprogrammed seat position at the touch of one of the three position but tons which are provided on the top of the switch block on the outside of the driver s seat One seat position can be pro grammed to each button so a total of three different positions can be stored in mem ory How to program a seat position 57L21034 1 Adjust the seat position as desired 2 Within 5 seconds after pressing the memory button 4 or while pressing the button press one of the position but tons 1 3 5 A buzzer will sound when the position has been successfully pro grammed BEFORE DRIVING NOTE The seat position programmed to a posi tion button is overwritten if you program another seat position to the same button How to restore the seat to a memorized position 1 Press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ACC or ON 2 Press th
384. ve your hand from the gearshift lever then shift the lever again You cannot shift gears continu ously while holding the lever in the or on position Using the shift paddle if equipped 2 Ps A TN 7 TS 57131013 1 side shift up 2 side shift down To shift up pull the gearshift lever to the side rearward When you remove your hand from the gearshift lever the lever will return to the position automatically To shift down push the gearshift lever to the side forward When you remove your hand from the gearshift lever the lever will return to the position auto matically 57L40010 To shift up pull the side shift paddle located on right side of the steering wheel toward you When you remove your finger from the switch the switch will return to the original position Canceling the manual mode To cancel the manual mode shift the gear shift lever from to Temporary manual mode Pull the shift paddle if equipped toward you when driving with the gearshift lever in the D position The information display shows the manual mode indicator 1 and the current gear position 2 57L40011 o To shift down pull the side shift paddle located on left side of the steering wheel toward you When you remove your finger from th
385. vel when the parking lights or headlights are on the instrument panel lights other than meter lights are turned off BEFORE DRIVING Information Display The information display is shown when the ignition mode has been changed to ON by pressing the ignition switch 57L30067 1 Information display 2 80 BEFORE DRIVING EXAMPLE 57L30043 2 DISP switch 3 TRIP switch The information display shows the follow ing information Display A CVT selector position indicator for contin uously variable transaxle Display B Warning Indicator Consumption Driving Speed Display C Trip meter Thermometer Display D Odometer Messages Fuel Range Average 2 81 57L30068 When the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to ON the message shown in the above illustration will appear on the display for several sec onds Some warning and indicator messages may appear on the display when the igni tion mode is changed to ACC by pressing the engine switch CVT Selector Position for continu ously variable transaxle EXAMPLE 4 W 50 F 491 57121127 The display A shows the continuously variable transaxle selector position 4 Fuel Consumption Driving Range Average Speed When there are no warning or indicator messages on the display B you can select one of the following five indication
386. ver side and passenger side floor mats are retained with fasteners to prevent them from sliding forward and possibly interfering with the pedals Whenever you put the mats back after removing them correctly position and secure the mats by passing the fastener knob through each hole in the mats and turning it to the lock position as shown in the illustration so that the mats will neatly fit under your feet and the passengers feet When you replace the floor mats in your vehicle with a different type such as all weather floor mats we highly recommend using genuine SUZUKI floor mats for proper fitting A WARNING Failure to take the following precau tions may result in the driver s side floor mat interfering with the pedals and causing a loss of vehicle control or an accident Make sure that all fastener knobs are in their holes in the floor mats and correctly locked Never place additional floor mats on top of the existing floor mats Luggage Under box Use this stowage for carrying small bag gage or the like To access the stowage raise the floor board by holding the handle 1 on it and hang the hook 2 on the edge of the trunk 57L51050 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Net Rope Hooks 57L50049 There are two net hooks 1 one on each of the trunk opening sides There are four rope hooks 2 provided on the trunk floor Pull out these hooks to use as shown in the il
387. vice to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained fol low these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button DO NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Pro gramming HomeLink step 2 For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Frame Hooks Front hook 1 1 Take out the necessary tools jack bar wheel nut wrench and tow hook from the onboard tool set 2 Use the end of the jack bar a wrapped with a cloth b to open the front tow hook cover c 57L51037 3 Insert the tow hook e into the tow hook receptacle d and screw the hook in as far as it can be turned by hand 5 96 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 57151038 4 Further screw in the tow hook using the wheel nut wrench f as shown in the illustration to firmly tighten the hook 57L51039 5 97 Rear hook 2 1 Take out the necessary tools jack bar wheel nut wrench and tow hook from the onboard tool set 2 Use the end of the jack bar a wrapped with a cloth b to open the rear tow hook cover c 57151040 3 Insert the tow hook into the tow hook receptacle d and screw the hook in as far as it can be turned by hand 57L51041 4 Further screw in the tow hook using the wheel nut w
388. way into the socket Do not leave the USB device for long periods of time in places inside the car where the temperature rises too high Back up any important data beforehand We cannot accept responsibility for any lost data The use of USB devices that contain data files other than MP3 WMA format is not recommended neordina MP3 WMA files on a USB device Playback or display may not be possible depending on the type of USB device or the condition of the recording Depending on the connected USB memory the order in which the files are played back may differ from the order in which the files were stored Compression formats MP3 Bit rate MPEG1 Audio Layer III 64 320 kbps MPEG2 Audio Layer III 64 160 kbps e Sampling frequency MPEG1 Audio Layer III 32 44 1 k 48 kHz MPEG2 Audio Layer 111 16 k 22 05 k 24 kHz WMA Ver 7 Ver 8 Bit rate CBR 48 k 192 kbps e Sampling frequency 32 k 44 1 k 48 kHz WMA Ver 9 Bit rate CBR 48 k 320 kbps e Sampling frequency 32 k 44 1 k 48 kHz WMA 9 Professional LossLess Voice are not supported Maximum number of files folders Maximum number of files 2500 files folders Maximum number of files in one folder 255 Maximum depth of trees 8 Maximum number of folders 255 Root folder is included 5 34 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Listening to an iPod TUNE FOLDER CH VOL russ POWER rust SOUND nogam 7 N Bluetoot
389. worn with the straps twisted and should be adjusted as tightly as is com fortable to provide the protection for which they have been designed A slack belt will provide less pro tection than one which is snug Continued 2 35 65D199 A WARNING Continued Pregnant women should use seat belts although specific recommen dations about driving should be made by the woman s medical advi sor Remember that the lap portion of the belt should be worn as low as possible across the hips as shown in the diagram Make sure that each seat belt buckle is inserted into the proper buckle catch It is possible to cross the buckles in the rear seat Continued A WARNING Continued Do not wear your seat belt over hard or breakable objects in your pockets or on your clothing If an accident occurs objects such as glasses pens etc under the seat belt can cause injury Never use the same seat belt on more than one occupant and never attach a seat belt over an infant or child being held on an occupant s lap Such seat belt use could cause serious injury in the event of an accident Periodically inspect seat belt assemblies for excessive wear and damage Seat belts should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed contaminated or damaged in any way It is essential to replace the entire seat belt assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious Children ag
390. y including the weight of all the occu pants accessories cargo plus trailer tongue weight if towing a trailer The weight of any accessories already installed on your vehicle at the time of purchase or that you or the dealer install after purchase must be sub tracted from the total load capacity to determine how much capacity remains available for occupants cargo and trailer tongue weight if towing a trailer Contact your dealer for further information Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and actual loads at the front and rear axles can only be determined by weighing the vehicle using a vehicle scale To measure the weight and load try making your vehicle to a high way weighing station shipping com pany or inspection station for trucks etc Compare these weights to the GVWR and GAWR front and rear listed on the Safety Certification Label If the gross vehicle weight or the load on either axle exceeds these ratings you must remove enough weight to bring the load down to the rated capacity A WARNING Never overload your vehicle Over loading your vehicle can cause damage to your tires and lead to poor steering and braking which can result in an accident The gross vehicle weight sum of the weights of the loaded vehicle driver and passengers must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR listed on the Safety Certification Label In addition never distribute a load so that the weight on eit
391. you the engine automatically starts when you press the engine switch to select this igni tion mode after placing the gearshift lever in the P position and depressing the brake pedal If you need to re start the engine while the vehicle is moving shift into N Manual Transaxle Provided you have the keyless start system remote controller with you the engine automatically starts when you press the engine switch to select this ignition mode after shifting to Neutral 3 3 and depressing the brake and clutch ped als NOTE You do not need to keep the engine switch pressed to start the engine CAUTION Do not leave the engine switch in the ACC or ON mode when the engine is not running Avoid using the radio or other electric accesso ries for a long time when the engine switch is in the ACC or ON mode when the engine is not running oth erwise the battery may discharge NOTE The steering lock may not be released if some load is acting on the steering wheel If this happens turn the steering wheel to the right or left to relieve it from the load before you press the engine switch again to change to the desired ignition mode Inthe presence of strong radio signals or noise you may not be able to change the ignition mode to ACC or ON or to start the engine using the engine switch In this case the information display on the instrument cluster will

Suzuki 2010 Kizashi Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents